058-0048 Project Manual 012605Received
JAN 2 7 2005
Project Manual
Yelm Community Schools District No. 2
Yelm Storage Building
January 26, 2005
ser n
ERICK §ON•McGOVERN
Architecture • Analysts • School Design
Erickson MCGO , PUC lei: 253- 531 -0206
120 131 st Street South for. 253 -531 -9197
loComo. WA 99444 -1804
Project Manual
Yelm Storage Building
' Yelm Community Schools District No. 2
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
L. F. "SKIP" BUSH BCE ENGINEERS
16412 139' AVENUE EAST 6021 12TM STREET EAST, SUITE 200
PUYALLUP, WA 98374 TACOMA, WA 98424
CONTACT: SKIP BUSH CONTACT: (MECH) CHRIS CAFFEE
PHONE: (360) 893 -1464 (ELEC) MIKE COUwT
FAx: (360) 893 -1466 PHONE: (253) 922-0446
FAx: (253) 922 -0896
✓mum Y26,2005
OWNER
'
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
107 1^ STREET NORTH
P.O. Box 476
'
YELM, WA 98597
ARCHITECT
t
ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.L .L .C.
120 131ST STREET SOUTH
TACOMA, WA 98444
CONTACT: JOHN ERICKSON
SHENON PORTER
PHONE: (253) 631-0206
FAX: (253) 531 -9197
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER MECHANICAL / ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
L. F. "SKIP" BUSH BCE ENGINEERS
16412 139' AVENUE EAST 6021 12TM STREET EAST, SUITE 200
PUYALLUP, WA 98374 TACOMA, WA 98424
CONTACT: SKIP BUSH CONTACT: (MECH) CHRIS CAFFEE
PHONE: (360) 893 -1464 (ELEC) MIKE COUwT
FAx: (360) 893 -1466 PHONE: (253) 922-0446
FAx: (253) 922 -0896
✓mum Y26,2005
I
ITABLE OF CONTENTS YELM STOMGE BUILDING
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER OF PAGES
' FRONTISPIECE ................................ ............................... 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS ........................... ............................... 2
1
' SECTION 00030, INVITATION TO BID ............. ............................... 1
00120, SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .......................... 1 2
00300, FORM OF PROPOSAL .............. ............................... 2
1 00420, SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES ........ ............................... 2
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM ....... ............................... 2
CONTRACT FORMS
SECTION 00500, CONTRACT FORMS ................ ............................... 1
00800, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ....... ............................... 27
00830, PREVAILING WAGE RATES - THURSTON COUNTY ......................... 27
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 01010, SUMMARY OF THE WORKISPECIA- CONDITIONS .......................... 2
01030, ALTERNATES .................... ............................... 2
01095, REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS ............................. 7
01200, PROJECT MEETINGS ............... ............................... 2
01330, SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ........... ............................... 7
ELECTRONIC INFORMATION DISCLAIMER ............................... 2
01400, QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES ........ ............................... 4
01500, CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS ................... 4
01510, SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS ........... ...............................
01700, PROJECT CLOSEOUT .............. ............................... 6
01730, OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA .. ............................... 4
SECTION 03300, CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE ......... ............................... 12
SECTION 06100, ROUGH CARPENTRY ............... ............................... 12
06192, PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES ..... ............................... 3
06200, FINISH CARPENTRY ............... ............................... 6
[,elm elg] 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGES
DESCRIPTION NUMBER OF
DIVISION 7. THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
'
SECTION 07160, BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING ...... ...............................
07311, ASPHALT SHINGLES ... ................... .................
3
.. 6
,
07900, JOINT SEALERS .................. ...............................
6
DIVISIONS DOORS AND WINDOWS
,
SECTION 08111, STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ....................... ...............
.. 5
08360, SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS ....... ...............................
4
,
DIVISION 9. FINISHES
'
SECTION 09900, PAINTING .................. ...............................
10
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS- MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL SECTIONS
DIVISION 15. MECHANICAL
'
MECHANICALTABLEOFCONTENTS ..................... ........ ...............
1
1
SECTION 15055, GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ............................
6
15060, PIPE AND FITTINGS ........... ...............................
2
15065, EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR MECHANICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ......
5
15095, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ...... ...............................
3
'
15100. VALVES ................... ...............................
3
15120, PIPING SPECIALTIES .......... ...............................
1
15261, PIPING INSULATION ..........................................
2
'
15412, SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM ...........................
2
15487, NATURAL GAS .............. ...............................
2
'
DIVISION 16. ELECTRICAL
ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS .............. ...............................
1
'
SECTION 16050, ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS ...............................
9
16055, EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ......
16110. RACEWAY ................. ...............................
4
3
'
16120, WIRES AND CABLES ........... ...............................
3
16130, OU 1-ET AND PULL BOXES ...... ...............................
3
16140, SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES .... ...............................
2
16160, PANELBOARDS .............. ...............................
3
'
16450, GROUNDING ................ ...............................
2
16500. LIGHTING .................. ...............................
6
'
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
tye4m st9l 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
,
I
SECTION 00030 — INVITATION TO BID
' 1 NOTICE TO BIDDERS
2
'3 Sealed bids will be received by the Yelm Community Schools District No. 2 at the District Administrative
4 Offices, 107 1" Street North, Box 476, Yelm, WA 98597 -0476, prior to 3:00 P.M., P.S.T., on February 3,
5 2005, for the construction of Yelm Storage Building and related site work, Yelm, Washington, and the said
6 bids will then and there be publicly opened and read aloud. Bidders and others properly interested are invited
'7 to be present at the bid opening. Bids received after the time fixed for opening cannot be considered.
8
9
10 BYORDEROF: Yelm Community Schools District No.2
' 11
12
13 END OF SECTION 00030
1
1
1
' tyeim stgl 00030 - 1 INVITATION TO BID 00030-1
I
tSECTION 00120 — SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS — STANDARD FORM
2
'3 The 'Instructions to Bidders" A.I.A. Document A701, 1997 Edition, is hereby made a part of these
4 specifications whether or not herein included. This document may be purchased directly from the American
5 Institute of Architects, 1201 Pacific Avenue, Fountain Court Level, Suite C4, Tacoma, WA 98402. Telephone:
6 (253) 6274006. FAX (253) 572 -2634.
' 7
8
9 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
0
11 These "Supplementary Instructions to Bidders" form a part of and are incorporated in the contract for
12 construction. All terms defined elsewhere in the contract shall have the same meaning here, unless the
13 contract clearty indicates otherwise. In case of conflict between the provisions of the "Supplementary
'14 Instructions to Bidders" and any other Contract Document, the "Supplementary Instructions to Bidders" shall
15 govern.
ARTICLE 3. BIDDING DOCUMENTS:
3.1 COPIES
3.11 Add the following supplementary information:
Each individual holder of the Bidding Documents shall be responsible to confirm that the Documents
are complete with all pages, sheets, addenda, etc.
ARTICLE 4, BIDDING PROCEDURES
4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS
4.11. (Add the following new oaragraohs)
For Divisions 15 and 16, during the bidding process, the "Mechanical Subcontractor and 'Electrical
Subcontractor" are the Principal Bidders that bid directly to the General Contractor. The General
Contractor is the Principal Bidder that bids directly to the Owner.
All Division 15 - Mechanical sub - bidders shall submit their bids only to the Principal Mechanical
Subcontractor. (Not to the Principal General Contractor.) In turn, the Principal Mechanical
Subcontractors shall submit their bid, which represent the total Work for their Divisions, to the
Principal General Contractor. The Principal Mechanical Subcontractor shall be responsible for all
Work of their Division.
All Division 16 - Electrical sub - bidders shall submit their bids only to the Principal Electrical
Subcontractor. (Not to the General Contractor.) In turn, the Principal Electrical Subcontractors shall
submit their bid, which represent the total Work for their Division, to the Principal General Contractor.
The Principal Electrical Subcontractor shall be responsible for all Work of their Division.
' lyelm stgl 00120-1 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00120-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
4.2 BID SECURITY
4.21 (Add the following suoolemental information)
Certified check or bank cashier's check or bid bond required with each bid, equal to five percent of
Base Bid plus additive Alternate Bids, Base Bid Substitute Bids and Alternate Bid Substitute Bids, if
any. Make payable to "Owner' as defined in Section 01095.
Should a bidder fail to enter into contract and furnish performance and payment bonds within ten days
after his proposal has been accepted, his bid guarantee will be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated
damages, but not as a penalty.
4.2.3 (Add the following supplemental information)
The successful bidder's check or bid bond will be retained until he has entered into contract and
furnished the required performance and payment and maintenance bonds. The right is reserved to
hold the bid guarantees of the two next low bidders until he has done so, or for a period of (30) thirty
days, whichever is the shorter time. Bid guarantees of all other bidders will be returned as soon as
feasible after bids are opened.
END OF SECTION 00120
helm stgj 00120-2 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00120 -2 1
' SECTION 00300 — FORM OF PROPOSAL
To Yelm Community Schools District No. 2
107 1^ Street North
Box 476
Yelm, WA 98597
Having carefully examined the Project Manual and drawings entitled, Yelm Storage Building, as well as the
premises and conditions affecting the work, the Undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and
supplies and to construct the project and perform all work as required by the Contract Documents for the
following sums:
BASE BID
For the Base Bid, as defined in the Specifications, the sum of: ($ )
Dollars
Written format
TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY PROVISIONS
(Inmde aiw'in e w Bid)
If the bid amount contains any work which requires trenching exceeding a depth of four feet, all costs for
trench safety shall be included in the Base Bid and indicated above for adequate trench safety systems in
compliance with Chapter 39.04 RCW, 49.17 RCW and WAC 296 - 155 -650. Bidder must include a lump sum
dollar amount in blank above (even if the value is $0.00) to be responsive.
ALTERNATE BIDS
A -1 Sectional Overhead Garage Doors .............................. $
A -2 Portion
of Building as
Described on
Drawing .......................
$
ADDENDA
Receipt of the following Addenda is hereby acknowledged:
Addendum No. dated Addendum No. dated
Addendum No. dated
SALES TAX
None of the above bid prices include State Sales Tax.
THE UNDERSIGNED ALSO AGREES AS FOLLOWS:
Addendum No. _ dated
To do any extra work, not covered by the above schedule of prices which may be ordered by the Owner,
pursuant to the Contract Documents.
]yelm stg] 00300 - 1 FORM OF PROPOSAL 00300-1
TIME OF COMPLETION/ LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
The Undersigned agrees if awarded the Contract, to complete the entire project as stipulated in the Contract
Documents. The Undersigned further agrees that the Owner may retain from the compensation otherwise
due, the liquidated damage costs incurred by the Owner, for each calendar day expiring beyond the time fixed
for completion that the work remains not substantially completed, this sum not to be construed in any sense
as penalty, but as agreed liquidated damages which the Owner shall sustain in the case of the failure of the
Undersigned to complete the work at the time stipulated. For dates of completion and liquidated damages
amount, see SECTION 01010 — SUMMARY OF THE WORK/SPECIAL CONDITIONS.
If the Undersigned be notified of the acceptance of this Bid within thirty (30) days after the time set for opening
bids, he agrees to execute a Contract for the above work for a compensation established by adjusting the
Base Bid by any Altemate Bids selected by the Owner, in the Form of Agreement required by the
Specifications, and to fumish Performance and Labor and Material Payment Bonds as required by the
Specifications.
BID GUARANTEE
The Undersigned further agrees that the check or bid bond accompanying this Bid is left in escrow with the
Owner, that its amount is the measure of the damages which the Owner will sustain by the failure of the
Undersigned to execute said agreement and bonds, and that if the Undersigned fails to deliver said
documents within ten (1 0) days after written notice of the award of the Contract to him, then the check shall
become the property of the Owner or the bid bond shall remain in full effect. But if this Bid is not accepted
within thirty (30) days after the time set for opening bids, or if the Undersigned delivers said Contract and
bonds, then the check shall be returned to him or the bid bond shall become void.
COMPANY NAME
SIGNATURE (TITLE)
ADDRESS
TELEPHONE CONTRACTOR'S REGISTRATION
END OF SECTION 00300
lyeim stgl 00300 - 2 FORM OF PROPOSAL 00300-2 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 00420 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
DURING BIDDING PERIOD
Requests for approved equal or substitutions, clarification of specifications, or protest of specifications shall
be received by Architect, not later than ten (10) days prior to bid date. Requests received after that time will
not be considered.
To aid in the review of request, submit on form following this section, which may be copied.
If proposed substitution is approved, such approvals will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall
not rely upon approvals made in any other manner.
AFTER CONTRACT AWARD
The Owner may, at his option, consider formal requests from Contractor for substitution of products in place
of those specified when submitted in accordance with the requirements of this Section. One or more of the
following conditions must also be documented:
The substitution must be required for compliance with final interpretation of code requirements or
insurance regulations.
The substitution must be due to the unavailability of the specified products, through no fault of the
Contractor. The Contractor must provide a letter from the supplier or manufacturer attesting to the
products unavailability.
The substitution may be requested when subsequent information discloses the inability of the
specified products to perform properly or to fit in the designated space.
The substitution may be due to the manufacturer's or fabricator's refusal to certify or guarantee
performance of the specified product as required.
The substitution may be requested when it is clearly seen, in the judgment of the Architect, that a
substitution would be in the Owners best interest in terms of cost, time, or other considerations.
Request for substitution beyond those identified in items 19 through 30 above, will not be considered
unless General Contractor and/or material supplier agree to an adjustment in the contract amount
associated with costs relating to the review of the substitution request. An adjustment in the contract
amount shall be required in both cases of approval or disapproval of the substitution request.
Rates of Compensation shall be as follows
ArchitectlEngineer $125.00 per hour
Mileage .36 per mile
Substitutions will not be considered if:
Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
They are indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without request submitted
in accordance with the General Conditions.
Document each reauest with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract
Documents.
be"sV] 00420 -1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 00420 -1
A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level
of the specified product.
Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the
Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner.
Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become
apparent.
Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re-
approval by authorities.
Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product
data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the
Contract Documents.
Substitution Submittal Procedure:
Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed
substitution.
Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product
equivalent. Burden of proof is on proposer.
The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
END OF SECTION 00020 '
1
1
1
1
lyeim stgl 00420 - 2 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 00420-2
SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
TO: Erickson McGovern, v ,.tc.
FROM:
PROJECT: YELM STORAGE BUILDING
We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above
project:
Section Paragraph Specified Item
Proposed Substitution:
Attach complete technical data, including laboratory tests, if applicable.
Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will
require for its proper installation.
Submit with request all necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance
to that which is specified. PLEASE INDICATE ALL COMPARATIVE INFORMATION, i.e. material weights,
gauges, finishes, strength of materials, insulation, anchorage, power requirements, "R" factor, "U" factor, etc.
Clearly mark manufacturers literature to indicate equality in performance.
Please submit all Division 15 and Division 16 substitution requests directly to the appropriate engineers.
Complete the following:
1. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings?
Yes_ No_ If Yes, Geary indicate changes.
2. Will the undersigned pay forchanges tothe building design, including engineering and detailing costs
caused by the requested substitution?
3. What effect does substitution have on other trades?
4. What effect does substitution have on applicable code requirements?
5. Differences between proposed substitution and specified items are:
[Yam still SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Page 1 of 2
6. Manufacturer's guarantees of the proposed and specified items are
Same_ Different _(Explain)
CERTIFICATION OF EQUAL PERFORMANCE AND ASSUMPTION OF LIABILITY FOR EQUAL
PERFORMANCE
The undersigned states that the function, appearance, and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified
item.
Submitted bv:
Firm Date
Address Telephone
Signature Title
Signature must be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide
legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval.
For Use by Architect:
Approved
Approved as Noted
Remarks
Erickson McGovern, v Lc.
120 South 131st Street
Tacoma, WA 98444
:YI
Received Too Late
Disapproved
DATE
tyelm stgl SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM Page 2 of 2
SECTION 00500 - CONTRACT
FORM OF AGREEMENT
The Standard Form, of the American Institute of Architects, No. At 01 entitled "Standard Form of Agreement
between Owner and Contractor," 1997 Edition, shall be designated and made the FORM OF AGREEMENT
for this Contract, as fully as if hereto attached or herein repeated. Copies of the "A.I.A. Form of Agreement"
may be examined at the office of the Architect, or may be purchased directly from the American Institute of
Architects, 1201 Pacific Avenue, Fountain Court Level, Suite C4, Tacoma, Washington 98402. Telephone:
(253) 6274006.
PERFORMANCE. PAYMENT (LABOR & MATERIAL). AND MAINTENANCE BONDS
The standard State of Washington Performance Bond covering performance, Payment Bond covering labor
and material, and Maintenance Bond covering one -year warranty work, in form as required by RCW 39.08
of the State Statutes for Public Work shall be designated and made the Form of Performance and Labor and
Material Payment Bond for this Contract, as fully as if hereto attached or herein repeated. Copies may be
examined at the office of any State of Washington licensed Surety broker or agent.
See also Supplementary Conditions Paragraph 11.5.1.
The Surety Company writing the above mentioned bonds shall be a company listed in the most current edition
of the Federal Register as "Company's Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties" and also shall
be listed in Best's Key Rating Guide with a minimum rating of "A-, VII" or better.
END OF SECTION 00500
' (yelm Mgt 00500 - 1 CONTRACT FORMS 00500-1
I
I
' [yelm stg] 00600 - 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800- 1
SECTION 00800— SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
'
INDEX
PAGE
GENERAL GENERAL CONDITIONS, STANDARD FORM
3
'
STANDARD GENERAL CONDITION ARTICLES MODIFIED BY THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
3
'
1.1 Basic Definitions
1.2 Correlation And Intent Of The Contract Documents
ARTICLE 2 -OWNER
3
'
2.1 General
2.2 Information And Services Required Of The Owner
2.4 Owner's Right To Carry Out The Work
'
2.5 Owner Rights And Responsibilities
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR
5
3.2 Review Of Contract Documents And Field Conditions By Contractor.
'
3.3 Supervision And Construction Procedures
3.4 Labor And Materials
3.5 Warranty
1
3.6 Taxes
3.7 Permits, Fees And Notices
3.9 Superintendent
3.10 Contractor's Construction Schedule
3.11 Documents And Samples At The Site
3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data And Samples
3.13 Use Of Site
'
3.18 Indemnification
ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
9
42 Architect's Administration Of The Contract
4.3 Claims And Disputes
4.5 Mediafion
4.6 Arbitration
1
ARTICLE 5- SUBCONTRACTORS
11
5.2 Award Of Subcontracts And Other
Contracts For Portions Of The Work
ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTOR
11
6.1 Owners Right To Perform Construction
And To Award Separate Contracts
'
6.2 Mutual Responsibility
I
' [yelm stg] 00600 - 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800- 1
ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.1 General
7.2 Change Orders
7.3 Construction Change Directives
ARTICLE 8 - TIME
6.1
Definitions
8.2
Progress And Completion
11.3
8.3
Delays And Extensions Of Time
ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.2
Schedule Of Values
9.3
Applications For Payment
9.4
Certificates For Payment
9.5
Decisions To Withhold Certification
9.6
Progress Payments
9.7
Failure Of Payment
9.8
Substantial Completion
9.10
Final Completion And Final Payment
ARTICLE 10 -
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.3
Hazardous Materials
10.4
ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1
General Provisions
11.2
Contractor's Liability Insurance
11.3
Property Insurance
11.5
Performance Bond And Payment Bond
ARTICLE 12 -
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1
Uncovering Of Work
122
Correction Of Work
ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.1
Governing Law
13.4
Rights And Remedies
13.5
Tests And Inspections
13.7
Commencement Of Statutory Limitation Period
ARTICLE 14 -
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
14.1
Termination By The Contractor
14.2
Termination By Owner For Cause
14.3
Suspension By The Owner For Convenience
14.4
Termination By The Owner For Convenience
ARTICLE 15 - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
15.1 Provisions To The Revised Code Of Washington
12
16
17
20
21
24
24
25
26
lyelm slgl 00800 - 2 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - 2
I
'
1
GENERAL CONDITIONS— STANDARD FORM
2
The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction," A. LA. Document A -201 1997 Edition are hereby
'3
4
made apart of these Specifications whether or not herein included. Copies of the "A.I.A. Document A -201"
5
may be examined at the office of the Architect, or may be purchased directly from the American Institute of
Architects, 1201 Pacific Avenue, Fountain Court Level, Suite C-4, Tacoma, WA 98402. Telephone: (253) 627-
'6
7
4006.
8
9
10
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
'
11
12
The following Supplementary Conditions amend, modify and /or delete provisions of the "General Conditions
13
of the Contract for Construction," AIA Document A201, Fifteenth Edition, 1997. Where a portion of the
14
General Conditions is amended, modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered
15
portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect.
16
t17
18
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
19
20
1_1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
'21
22
1.1.1 Supplement as follows: Add the Instructions to Bidders, the Accepted Bid or Proposal, to the items
23
consisting of the Contract Documents.
'24
25
1_2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
26
27
1.2.1 Supplement as follows: Whenever an article, device or piece of equipment is referred to in singular
28
number, such reference applies to all such articles shown on drawings or required to complete the
29
installation.
30
1.2.3 Supplement as follows: In the event of conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents,
'31
32
interpretations will give precedence in the following order: (1) The Agreement; (2) Addenda, with
33
those of later date having precedence over those of earlier date; (3) Supplementary Conditions; (4)
34
General Conditions; and (5) Drawings and Specifications. In the case of inconsistency between the
'35
Drawings and Specifications or within either document, the better quality or greater quantity of work
36
shall be provided in accordance with the Architect's interpretation without additional compensation
37
to the Contractor.
38
39
40
ARTICLE OWNER
41
42
2_1 GENERAL
43
44
2.1.1 Delete in its entirety and insert the following: The Owner of this project is the Yelm Community
45
Schools District No. 2, which is governed by its School Board of Directors (the "Board"). The Board
46
shall designate a Project Manager who shall be the primary contact on behalf of the Board and
47
District. Such Manager shall have such authority as shall be confirmed by the Board. Unless
48
specifically limited by the Board, such Manager shall have the ability to make decisions on behalf of
'49
the Owner only to the following extent: approving details of location; approvals of colors and products
50
or materials which meet specifications; making ministerial decisions in the administration of the
51
Contract; the giving of written notices provided in the Contract Documents including notices under
52
53
Paragraphs 2.3, 2.4, and 12.2. The Board shall retain the final decision on acceptance of the contract
and approval of any proposed Change Orders or proposed Construction Change Directives except
54
for the limited delegation in this paragraph. Should the Contractor proceed to carry out the Work
55
required by the Construction Change Directive approved by the Project Manager (as opposed to
56
approval by the Board itself) the Contractor by so doing agrees to accept as full compensation for all
57
costs and claims arising from and related to such Construction Change Directive a reasonable sum
'
[yelm stg100800 -3 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -3
which shall in no case exceed $25,000. Except for the limited approval authority delegated for
Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, the School Board of Directors shall have the
sole authority to authorize any change to the provisions of the Contract which the Contractor claims
may entitle the Contractor to any equitable adjustment or extra compensation.
2.1.3 Address paragraph as follows: PROJECT MANAGER ON SITE. The Board's designated Project
Manager referred to in paragraph 2.1.1 above shall have only that authority stated above. The
presence on site of the Board's designated Project Manager, any Board member, maintenance staff,
principal, teacher, or any other employee or officer of the School District shall not imply any authority
by such person to direct extra work or make approvals or acceptances except as specifically
delegated in this Contract or as adopted by formal action of the School Board of Directors and
communicated in writing to the Contractor. This limitation of authority shall apply whether or not such
persons on site are called clerk of the works, inspector, or any other related designation. The
presence of such persons on the site and his/her observations, knowledge, and/or statements shall
not create any apparent authority. No act or omission, statement or silence by such person on site
shall waive any requirements of this Contract, constitute acceptance or approval by the Owner, or
waive any requirement of written notice . No such Project Manager or other Owner employee or
officer shall have authority: to direct the manner or means by which the Contractor carries out the
work; to direct or approve safety measures of the Contractor, or to direct any extra work, except the
Project Manager may do so by the written Construction Change Directive procedure within the limited
monetary authority herein provided. The presence on site of such persons shall in no way derogate
from the authority of the Architect; nor shall it alter the contractually specified procedures for
communication through the Architect.
2.1.4 The Project Manager and the Architect, separately and jointly, shall have authority on behalf of the
Owner to condemn or reject Work when, in the Project Manager's or the Architect's opinion, the work
does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever in the Project Managers or the Architect's
reasonable opinion it Is considered necessary or advisable to insure the proper implementation of the
intent of the Contract Documents, the Project Manager or the Architect shall have the authority to
require special inspection or testing of any Work in accordance with the provisions of the Contract
Documents whether or not such Work be then fabricated, installed, or completed.
2.1.5 The Project Manager will have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work, whether
or not such Work be then fabricated, installed, or completed. However, neither the Project Managers
authority nor any decision made by the Project Manager in good faith either exercise or not to
exercise such authority shall give rise to any duty or responsibility of the Project Manager to the
Contractor, any subcontractor, any of their agents or employees, or any other person performing any
of the Work.
2.1.6 The Project Manager shall have the authority and discretion to call, schedule, and conduct job
meetings to be attended by the Contractor, and representatives of his Subcontractors, and Material
Suppliers and Vendors and the Architect, to discuss such matters as procedures, progress, problems,
and scheduling.
2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
2.2.1 Delete in its entirety.
2.2.3 Supplement by addinc the following: Such surveys and the drawings show physical characteristics
and utility locations based upon information readily available at the time of their preparation. To the
extent the surveys or drawings depict the expected location of underground utilities or wires, pipes,
or similar plumbing or electrical locations which are hidden behind walls, the Contractor understands
and assumes the risk that the exact locations may be somewhat different. The Contractor shall use
care in exploring and locating such underground or behindwalls utilities, plumbing and electrical runs
and shall adjust any necessary work or connections relating to such existing utility plumbing and
electrical locations without additional costs to the Owner.
lyelm srgl 00800 - 4 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 - = '
2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
2.4.1 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: If the Contractor neglects to carry out the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents or falls to correct defective work and fails within a seven
(7) day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction
of such failure or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other
remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In the event such deficiencies threaten the
health or safety of employees or occupants, the Owner may proceed to correct such deficiencies with
such notice (or no notice) to the Contractor as is reasonable under the circumstances. When the
Owner has undertaken to carry out a portion of the Work prior to final acceptance of the Contract, an
appropriate Modification shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the
Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Architecfs
additional services, and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If payments
then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall
pay the difference to the Owner.
2.5 Add OWNER RIGHTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES:
2.5.1 The Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection
with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph 3.3.
The Owner will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to carry out the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents. The Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be
responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or
of any other persons performing portions of the Work.
2.5.2 In the exercise of the Owner's right to carry out the Work under Paragraphs 2.4 and /or 12.2, the
Owner shall have the right to use the Owner's own forces or hire another Contractor with or without
public bid to carry out such work.
ARTICLE CONTRACTOR
3_2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
3.2.1 Supplement as follows: The existence of errors, omissions or inconsistencies in the contract
documents should not entitle the contractor to compensation or extra costs for delay, but may entitle
the contractor to an extension of time; and the contractor shall use all reasonable efforts to minimize
the costs and delays occasioned by discovery of errors, omissions or inconsistencies in the contract
Documents.
3.2.2 Supplement as follows: In all cases except those in which the contract documents detail a
construction which violates any applicable law, statute, ordinance, building code, or rule and
regulation, the contractor shall be responsible to construct the work in accordance with all applicable
laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulation.
3.2.3 Supplement as follows: If the contractor fails to perform the obligations of subparagraph 3.2.1 and
3.2.2, the contractor shall not be entitled to additional costs or time which would have been saved had
the contractor performed those obligations.
3.2.4 Investigation of subsurface conditions on the site have been made for design purposes. The results
of such investigations are available to prospective bidders and the Contractor, and are to be
considered apart of the Contract Documents. There is no guarantee, either express or implied, that
the conditions indicated are representative of those existing throughout the site, or that unforeseen
developments may not occur. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any interpretations of
the information or extrapolations beyond the location of each individual boring or test pit
' [yon, Big] 00800 - 5 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-5
3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
3.3.4 The Contractor will establish and maintain existing lot lines, restrictions and bench marks shown on
the drawings. The Contractor shall establish and maintain all other line levels and bench marks
'
necessary for the execution of the Work, and take such steps as are necessary to prevent their
dislocation or destruction. The Contractor shall employ a professional land surveyor registered in the
State of Washington to lay out the Work and be responsible for the accuracy of same.
'
3.3.5 Contractor shall coordinate, lay out, and schedule all work sufficiently in advance of its scheduled
performance to adjust conflicts and to avoid related delays. This responsibility addresses all work,
regardless of its assignment by Contractor to a subcontractor or the requirements on different pages
'
of the plans to place the work of separate specialties (such as mechanical and electrical) within tight
spaces. The Contractor will coordinate its work and that of its subcontractors to minimize wall
penetrations and other cutting, patching or moving of previously placed work by other trades or
specialties.
3.3.6 The Contractor shall coordinate and be informed on delivery of materials of all Subcontractors.
3_4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
Supplement as follows: Contractor shall prohibit from working at a public school site, at times when
,
there is a likelihood of contact with children, any employee who has pled guilty to or been convicted
of any felony crime involving: physical neglect of a child under Chapter 9A.42 RCW; the physical
injury or death of a child under Chapter 9A.32 or 9A.36 RCW (except motor vehicle violations under
Chapter 46.61 RCW); sexual exploitation of a child under Chapter 9.68A RCW; sexual offenses under
'
Chapter 9A.44 RCW where a minor is the victim; promoting prostitution of a minor under Chapter
9A.88 RCW; the sale or purchase of a minor child under RCW 9A.64.030; or violation of similar laws
of another jurisdiction. The Contractor shall bind subcontractors to the same restriction. This
restriction is as mandated by RCW 28A.400.330. Violation of this provision shall be grounds for
immediately terminating this Contract.
3.4.4 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect may consider a formal request
'
for the substitution of the products in place of those specified only under exceptional conditions. See
Division 1 of the specifications. By making requests for substitutions, the Contractor:
3.4_4.1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product
'
and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified;
3 4_4.2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same or greater warranty for the substitution
that the Contractor would for that specified,
3.4_4.3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this
Contract, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which
'
subsequently become apparent;
3.4_4.4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making at Contractors sole cost
'
such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects; and
3.4_4.5 shall pay for all the Architect's reasonable and necessary fees in reviewing the proposed
substitution and reviewing any resulting changes to the work.
t
94.5 WAGE RATES:
3.4_5.1 The prevailing rate of wages to be paid to all workmen, laborers, or mechanics employed in
'
the performance of any part of this Contract shall be in accordance with the provisions of
Chapter 39.12 RCW, as amended. The rules and regulations of the Washington State
Department of Labor and Industries and the schedule of prevailing wage rates for the locality
,
[yeim stg] 00600 - 6 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-6
,
H
1
or localities where this Contract will be performed as determined by the Industrial Statistician
2
of the Department of Labor and Industries, are by reference made apart of this Contract as
3
though fully set forth herein.
4
5
3.4.5.2 Inasmuch as the Contractor will be held responsible for paying the prevailing wages, it is
6
imperative that all Contractors familiarize themselves with the current wage rates before
7
submitting bids based on these specifications.
Owners information on current wage rates,
8
if included herein, is as a convenience
to bidders.
9
3.4_5.3 In case any dispute arises as to what are the prevailing rates of wages for work of a similar
'10
11
nature and such dispute cannot be adjusted by the parties in interest, including labor and
12
management representatives, the matter shall be referred forarbitration to the Directorofthe
13
Department of Labor and Industries of the State and his or her decision therein shall be final
'14
and binding on all parties involved in the dispute as provided for by RCW 39.12.060 as
15
amended.
16
3.4_5.4 The Contractor and all subcontractors shall each complete and file a Statement of Intent to
'17
18
Pay Prevailing Wages on Public Contract form, prior to starting work under the Contract.
19
20
3.4.5.5 Each progress payment request submitted by a Contractor for payment on a project estimate
21
shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance with the pre -fled statement
22
or statements of intent on file with the Dept. of Labor and Industries as approved by the
23
Industrial Statistician.
'
24
25
3.4_5.6 At the conclusion of the project the Contractor and the Subcontractors shall submit affidavits
26
of wages paid to the Department of Labor and Industries, 1601 Second Avenue, Seattle,
27
Washington 98101, for certification by the Director. Contractor shall provide a copy to the
28
Owner.
29
30
3.4.6 Use of tobacco products is prohibited on all School District property.
'32
31
3_5 WARRANTY
33
34
3.5.1 Amend as follows: In the first sentence, change the phrase "quality required or permitted. .."to read
35
"... quality specified. ..." In the second to the last sentence, change the phrase "... or normal wear
36
and tear and normal usage" to read "... or normal wear and tear under normal usage."
37
■■
38
3.5.2 All work under this Contract shall be performed in a skillful and workmanlike manner. Thewarranties
39
set forth in this paragraph and elsewhere in the Contract Documents and claims relating to breach
40
thereof shall survive substantial completion, final acceptance and final payment.
41
42
3_6 TAXES
43
44
3.6.1 Supplement as follows: Taxes to be paid by Contractor include those imposed by federal, state,
45
county and city governments, excepting only real estate taxes on the property; and such taxes as
'46
applicable shall be included in the proposal sums, The state, county, and city retail sales taxes are
47
not permitted to be included in the proposal sums; the Owner shall pay sales taxes proportionately
48
with each periodic and final estimate in addition to the amount allowed on the payment certificate and
49
Contractor shall pay such taxes to the authority as required by law.
50
51
3_7 PERMITS FEES AND NOTICES
52
'53
3.7.1 Supplement as follows: The following fees and permits will be paid by the Owner and shall not be
54
included within the Contract sum.
55
The local Building Department Plan Check Fee
'56
57
Building Permit
'
[yelm stg] 00800 - 7 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-7
Building Inspection Fee
Health Department Permit
Site Development Permit
On -Site Sewer Disposal System Permit
Water System Permit
Plumbing Permit
Commercial Fire Sprinkler Permit
Mechanical Permit
Electrical Permit
All other permits, and any surcharges, and public inspection fees shall be secured by and paid by the
Contractor and included in the Contract sum.
The Contractor shall pay for any reinspections.
3_9 SUPERINTENDENT
3.9.1 Add the following supplemental information to the existing Paraaraoh 3.9.1:
"The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent, who shall be in attendance full -time at
the Project site. The superintendent shall perform strictly in a supervisory role and not in a working
(physical) role.
The superintendent shall not be replaced without the prior written consent of the Owner or Architect.
If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to the superintendent proposed by the General
Contractor, the General Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no
reasonable objection."
3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
3.10.1 Add to paragraph as follows
"Include costs in the Proposal for furnishing the Progress Schedule (Bar Chart) in the form as follows:
SCHEDULE OF WORK: The Contractor who is the apparent low bidder shall submit to the Architect
within ten days of the commencement of work a proposed bar chart illustrating his basic plan for
meeting the completion dates specified in this contract. This bar chart shall be activity-oriented
showing as nearly as can be determined the starting and completion dates of each event. This
preliminary network should show shop drawing submittals, material, delivery, installation and checkout
of each major item of work.
Significant coordination and interfacing of construction will be necessary. The bar chart shall be cost
loaded for each activity. The approved cost loaded bar chart shall be the basis for determining pay
requests throughout the project. In order to efficiently implement the major portion of these interfaces
and avoid numerous interferences, the following procedures shall be adhered to:
MAINTENANCE OF PROJECT SCHEDULE: The General Contractor shall maintain the
project bar chart schedule in current condition and shall continuously monitor the progress
of the work to assure completion of the work in compliance with the schedule.
PROGRESS REPORT: No later than 15 days after receipt of notice to proceed and prior to
the first pay request, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a copy of the time-oriented
project bar chart schedule updated to show the current status of each major bar chart activity
as of the fourth Friday of each month. This progress report shall be submitted monthly with
each pay estimate. Activities which are found to be consistently behind schedule shall be
worked expeditiously to correct the schedule and assure a timely project completion.
[yelm srg] 00800 - 8 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-8 11
PROSECUTION OF WORK: Contractorshall furnish sufficient forces, construction plant and
equipment, as may be necessary to insure the prosecution of the work, in accordance with
the approved construction schedule. If Contractor falls behind such schedule, Contractor
shall take such steps as may be necessary to improve his progress without additional cost
to Owner."
3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
3.11.2 Add the following new subparagraph: "In addition, the Contractor shall keep the approved permit set
of plans at the jobsite during construction, in good condition. Just prior to final acceptance the
Contractor shall deliver this permit set to the Owners Project Manager."
3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
312.7 Supplement Paragraph as follows:
"The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Architect and shall resubmit the required
number of corrected copies of shop drawings or new samples. Resubmittal of shop drawings or
samples necessitated by required corrections shall not be a cause for extension of time. All such
portions of the work shall be in accordance with the approved submittals."
3.13 USE OF SITE
3131 Supplement as follows: In order to minimize interference with District activities, the Contractor shall
coordinate all of his operations with and secure approval of the Owners Project Manager before using
any portion of the site.
3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
318.3 It is the intent of the indemnification paragraphs hereinabove to require the Contractor to indemnify
the named parties to the fullest extent permitted by RCW Chapter 4.24 as it now exists or is hereafter
amended. It is specifically intended that the Contractor's indemnity shall cover allegations of
concurrent negligence of indemnitor and indemnitee, their agents or employees; and that the duty to
so indemnify shall cover all costs of defense of such claims. The Contractors indemnity obligations
shall not cover allegations or adjudicated determinations that the liability arises from the sole
negligence of an indemnitee. In claims against any indemnitee by an employee of the Contractor, a
subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be
liable, the indemnification obligation hereunder shall not be limited by the Washington State workers
compensation law, RCW Title 51. The Contractor shall provide insurance covering such indemnity
obligations subject to the terms and conditions provided in Article 11 including the naming of Owner
and Architect as additional insureds upon such policy. Only to the extent necessary to provide the
indemnification of others provided hereinabove, and only to the extent an indemnification is required
by the Contract to be covered by insurance, the signing of the Contract by the Contractor shall
operate as a waiver of the Contractors immunity from suit under RCW Title 51. This waiver does not
apply to a claim made by an employee of the Contractor against only the Contractor.
ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
4.2.1 Supplement as follows: The authority of the Architect as the Owners representative is separate from
the Board's designated Project Manager as described in Article 2. The presence of the Architect or
any Architect representatives or consultants on the site, their knowledge, their acts oromissions, their
statements or silence shall not give rise to any apparent authority beyond that authority specifically
stated in the Contract Documents; nor shall such operate as a waiver of any of the requirements of
[yeim Sig] 00800 - 9 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00600-9
the Contract Documents including the requirements for any written notice required by the Contract
Documents.
4.2.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Supplement as follows: Communications
between the Contractor or subcontractor and Architect's consultants, Owner's maintenance staff or
occupants of occupied buildings shall be limited to matters of information, security arrangements, or
incidental access to occupied buildings; but in no case shall such communications relate to or
authorize changes to the Work or give rise to claims for additional work. Should any party to the
Contract believe unauthorized communications are being made by any person, such shall be reported
in writing to the Architect and to the Project Manager, the Architect, and Contractor's Superintendent.
41.12 Supplement as follows: The architect's obligations under this subparagraph shall not derogate from
architect's responsibilities under its contract to the Owner; nor shall the provisions of this
subparagraph preclude the architects receiving advise from and consulting with Owners
representatives and attorneys regarding claims and contract interpretations.
4_3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
Time Limits on Claims. Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Subject to the requirement
that the Contractor give written notice prior to proceeding to execute any work claimed to be extra or
additional, claims by the Contractor must be made by detailed written notice within twenty-one (21)
calendar days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such claim.
4.3.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Pending final
resolution of the claim or dispute including the necessary time to resolve any litigation, the Contractor
shall proceed diligently with the performance of the contract and any work directed, whether or not
the Contractor alleges: that a dispute constitutes a total breach of contract; that a dispute is beyond
the scope of the contract; or that there has been a cardinal change; or that conditions would allow the
Contractor the right to rescind. This obligation to continue work is deemed to cover all disputes
related in any way to the contract between the parties. The Contractor will incorporate this clause to
obligate its subcontractors and material men to likewise continue performance despite the pendency
of a dispute. The Owner shall during a dispute continue to make payments as such payments are
otherwise due in accordance with the terms of these contract documents.
4.3.7 Claims for Additional Time
4.3_7.1 Supplement as follows: Except as provided in Supplementary General Conditions 6.3.3,
Contractor is entitled only to an extension of time for delay.
4.3.10 Consequential Damages: Delete in its entirety.
46.11 Access to Contractor Cost Records. The Contractor's entire cost records and bid working papers for
the project shall be open to inspection and audit by representatives of the Owner during the life of the
contract and for a period of not less than three (3) years after the date of acceptance thereof. The
Contractor shall retain such records for that period. The Owner shall have the right to seek
reimbursement of any amount it determines it has overpaid to the Contractor or for payment for
materials or labor or based on the costs thereof to forces other than the Contractor. The Contractor
shall require by contract that the cost records of its subcontractors, material men and suppliers shall
be open to inspection and audit by representatives of the Owner on the same terms and conditions
as the cost records of the Contractor. If an audit is to be commenced more than sixty (60) days after
the acceptance date of the contract, the Contractor will be given reasonable notice of the time of
when such audit is to begin.
4_8 MEDIATION
Delete this section in its entirety.
lyelm stgl 00800 -f0 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -10 11
I
' 1 4.6 ARBITRATION is amended as follows: The tide "ARBITRATION" is deleted and substituted in its
2 place is 'DISPUTE RESOLUTION" as the new We of the section. Wherever in the Contract
3 Documents reference is made to "arbitration," or to "mediation the tern "dispute resolution" shall be
4 deemed to be substituted in its place.
5
'6 4.6.1 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Any controversy or claim arising out of or related
7 to the Contract, or the breach thereof, except as provided in Subparagraph 4.2.13 with respect to the
8 Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect and except for claims which have been
9 waived as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents and except for claims waived under the
10 provisions of the Contract Documents, shall be decided by court of law under the regular rules of civil
'11 procedure unless the parties hereafter mutually agree in writing to mediation or to binding arbitration.
12 This provision for litigation in place of arbitration shall be called in these Contract Documents "dispute
13 resolution." When elsewhere in the Contract Documents " arbitration" or "mediation" is used, the term
'14 "dispute resolution" shall be deemed substituted in place thereof. When the term "demand for
15 mediation or arbitration" or any phrase with similar meaning shall be used in the Contract Documents,
16 there shall be deemed substituted in the place thereof the term "commencement of litigation." Claims
17 upon which the Architect has given notice and rendered a decision as provided in Subparagraph 4.4.6
1 18 shall be subject to litigation if litigation is commenced within thirty (30) days after Contractors receipt
19 of notice; otherwise, such right to litigation of the dispute is waived. Litigation may be commenced
20 when forty-five (45) calendar days have passed after a claim has been referred to the Architect as
21 provided in Section 4.4 and no decision has been rendered.
22
23 Paragraphs 4.6.2 through 4.6.6 are deleted in their entirety.
'25
26
27
28
29
56
1 [yeim stg]00800 -11 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -11
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
5_2
AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
'30
5.2.1
Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Within ten (10) days after Owners issuance of a
31
Notice of Intent to Award Contract, Contractor shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the
32
Architect the names of all subcontractors and those suppliers who are to furnish major equipment
'
33
items or materials or equipment fabricated to a special design for the work. Such listing is in addition
34
to the listing of major subcontractors required to be submitted at the time of bid. The Architect will
35
promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner or the Architect, after due
'investigation,
36
rso
have reasonable objection to any such proposed subcontractor pen or entity. Failure
37
of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.
38
Contractor thereafter may not change the subcontractor or supplier except upon a showing of good
39
cause and upon prior written approval by Owner. Owner will not unreasonably withhold approval.
40
41
5.2.5
Add paragraph as follows:
42
"The provisions of subparagraphs 5.2.1 through 5.2.4 shall be superseded to the extent of conflicting
'43
44
provisions, if any, in: (1) the Form of Proposal, if listing of subcontractors is required therein; or (2)
45
the Affirmative Action and MBE/WBE requirements of the Owner."
46
47
48
ARTICLE 8 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
49
50
8_1
OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
51
52
6.1.1
Amend and supplement as follows: Delete the period on the last sentence and substitute asemi-
53
colon followed by "except that contractor shall have no such claim for constructions or operations
54
which are disclosed to the contractor in the bidding or contract documents."
55
1 [yeim stg]00800 -11 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -11
6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
6.2.3 Delete and substitute as follows: In the event there is more than one Contractor engaged on the
project site, each such Contractor shall be responsible to the other for damages to the Work, injury
to any person or persons, or for any loss, cost, claims or damages arising out of or in connection with
the Work required by its Contract or any loss, cost, expense, or damage caused by Contractors
neglect or failure to finish or satisfactorily complete its part of the Work within the time prescribed.
In all events, the provisions of Paragraph 3.18 shall be applicable. If, such separate Contractor sues
or initiates a proceeding against the Owner, and /or the Architect on account of any damage or delay
alleged to have been caused by a Contractor, the Owner shall notify such Contractorwho shall defend
such proceedings at his own expense, and if any judgment or award against the Owner, and /or the
Architect arses therefrom, the Contractor shall pay or satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner, and /or
the Architect for all attorneys' fees, court and other costs which the Owner, and /or the Architect have
incurred.
ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK
7_1 GENERAL
7.1.1 Supplement as follows: The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the bonding and insurance
company(s) of any changes in the Work; provided that neither the number or quality of changes nor
Contractor's failure to provide notice shall release bonding or insurance coverages.
7_2 CHANGE ORDERS
7.2.3 Add Paragraph as follows: The allowances for and limitations on overhead and profit as provided in
Paragraph 7.3 (as amended and supplemented) shall apply to Change Orders, cost proposals for
changes, and all claims for extra cost or damage.
7.2.4 Add paragraph as follows: The total sums agreed upon and inserted in the increased cost for the
Change In Work as defined in the Change Order shall constitute the total amount due the contractor
and there shall be no other claims for added casts whether for impact or other overhead or
administrative costs.
7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES- Delete the title "CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES"
and substitute the title "PROPOSAL REQUESTS" Add: Wherever In the Contract Documents
reference Is made to "Construction Change Directivelsl" the term "Proposal Request" shall be
deemed to be substituted in Its Place.
7.3.6 Delete the last sentence and all subpaagraphs and substitute the_follo>w�: The term
"reasonable allowance for overhead and profit" as used in this paragraph and elsewhere in
the Contract Documents is defined as and shall be limited to the allowances provided in the
subparagraphs to this paragraph. Change proposals shall be submitted by the Contractor
and all firstand second tier subcontractors through the Contractor on breakdown sheet fors
provided by the Architect and shall include only the following costs and allowances:
7.3_6.1 ADDITIVE CHANGES
Direct Labor Costs: This is defined as the estimated labor costs determined by
either the estimated number of craft hours and the hourly costs necessary to perform
the change in work; or the unit labor costs applied to the material quantities,
providing said unit labor costs are developed from the above craft man hours costs;
whichever is applicable, according to industry practice.
lyelm stgl 00800 - 12 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800- 12 1
The hourly costs shall be based on the following:
(1) Basic Wages: Current minimum prevailing hourly wage rates, including
vacation pay, for all labor, crew foreman, and general foreman performing
and /or directly supervising the work on the site. These rates, whichever are
applicable, are established by the following: State of Washington,
Department of Labor and Industries
(2) Fringe Benefits: Fringe benefits established by the State of Washington,
Department of Labor and Industries or contributed to labor trust funds are
itemized fringe benefits, whichever are applicable.
(3) Workman's Insurances: Direct contributions to the State of Washington as
Industrial Insurance; Medical Aid; and Supplemental Pension, by the class
and rates established by the State of Washington, Department of Labor and
Industries.
(4) Federal and State Contributions: Direct contributions required by the
Federal Insurance Compensation Act IF. 1. C.A.); Federal Unemployment Tax
Act (F. U.T.A. ); and the State Unemployment Compensation Act IS.U.C.A.).
(5) Costs incurred for compliance with the Washington Industrial Safety and
Health Act (WISHA); established as 2% of 1, 2, 3 and 4 above.
(6) Travel allowance and /or subsistence if applicable not to exceed those
established by Regional Labor Union Agreements shall be itemized,
documented with receipts, and identified separately.
b. Direct Material Costs: This is defined as an itemization of the estimated quantity of
materials necessary to perform the change in the work and the cost therefore.
These costs shall be the unit cost applied to the quantity and extended. The unit
costs shall be based on the following:
(1) The net cost after all offered or available discounts or rebates.
(2) Freight costs; express charges; or special delivery costs when applicable.
No lump sum costs will be allowed except when approved in advance by the Architect.
C. Construction Equipment Usage Costs:
(1) Rental Equipment: This is defined as an itemization of and the estimated
length of time construction equipment will be used on change order work at
the site. The rental costs applied thereof will be the rates established by the
following whichever is applicable:
(a) The current rental rates established by agreement between the
Associated General Contractors (A.G.C.) and Washington State
Department of Highways.
(b) The current rental rates established by the State of Washington,
Utilities and Transportation Commission for trucks used on
highways.
(c) The Current rental rates established by the National Electrical
Contractor's Association (N.E.C.A.) for equipment used on
electrical work.
lyelm stg1 00800 - 13 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-13
El
e.
I.
F1
(d) The current rental rates established by the Mechanical Contractors
Association for equipment used on mechanical work.
(e) If equipment is required for which a rental rate is not established in
any of the above, an agreed rental rate shall be established for that
equipment. Such rates and the use of the equipment on the work
must be approved by the Project Manager prior to performing the
work.
(f) The rates as determined above include full compensation for
furnishing all fuel, oil, lubrication, repairs, maintenance, and
insurance.
(2) Small Tools, Expendables and Consumable Supplies:
(a) These are general in nature and are defined as tools for which the
initial purchase price is under $250 and are normally furnished by
the performing contractor.
(b) The allowable rate for small tools will be as follows:
General Contractors 3% direct labor costs
Specialty Contractors 5% direct labor costs
(c) Expendables and consumable supplies directly associated with the
change in work to be itemized.
Subcontractor's Proposals: Subcontractor's proposals are to be itemized as
provided in a., b. and c. above.
Overhead and Profit by the Contractor or Subcontractor Actually Performing the
Work: A total amount, not to exceed 15% of items a., b. and c. above will be
allowed. This is to compensate such contractor for all costs not provided for in the
above allowances, including: personnel not defined in "a" above; temporary
construction facilities, home office costs; office engineering and estimating costs;
profit; plus any other cost incidental to the performance of the change in work.
Overhead and Profit by the Contractor and Subcontractors Not Actually Performing
the Work:
(1) A total amount not to exceed 8% of the total amount of subcontractors'
proposal as defined in "d" above will be allowed for all overhead and profit;
to supervise and administer the subcontractors actually performing the
change in the work; and for all other costs listed in "e" above.
(2) No direct labor by the Contractor will be allowed to be added to a
subcontractor's proposal. Contractors direct labor, if required, must be
submitted as outlined in "a' above.
Cost of Any Increase or Decrease in Premium by Insurance and Bond Caused by
the Change:
(1) Contractor's Liability Insurance;
To the above, the costs of the Contractor's Liability Insuranos may
be added, if increased.
[yelm stgl 00800- 14 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00600-14
(2) Bond,
To the above, the cost of the Contractor's Bond may be added, if
increased.
h. The costs and allowance for overhead and profit as calculated in accordance with
this paragraph shall constitute Contractor's full entitlement to compensation or
equitable adjustment for the changed work, relating thereto, or resulting therefrom.
No additional compensation shall be allowed for costs including, but not limited to,
direct, indirect, impact or ripple effects caused to labor by changes, costs of delay
or acceleration, and home office overhead.
7.3_6.2 DEDUCTIVE CHANGES
Items "a." (labor), "b" (material), "c' (equipment), "d", "a ", "f" (overhead and profit, sub) and
-g' (bond, insurance) will be itemized for changes which delete work.
7.3_6.3 ADDITIVE CHANGES AND DEDUCTIVE CHANGES TOGETHER.
a. If a change in the work involves both additive and deductive changes, the
appropriate overhead and profit amount allowed will be added to the net difference
of items "a ", "b ", "c ", "d" and W.
b. If other additive unrelated change items are included in the same change proposal,
the appropriate overhead and profit allowed is to be applied to these individual
changed items.
7.3_6.4 If the description of the change in the work is in the opinion of the Architect or Project
Manager, definitive enough for the Architect or Project Manager to determine fair
value and the total of the change does not exceed $500 no breakdown is required.
7.3_6.5 Changes between $500 and $1,500
If the description of the change in the work is, in the opinion of the Architect or Project
Manager, definitive enough for the Architect or Project Manager to determine fair value, the
breakdown shall consist of the following:
a. Lump sum labor;
b. Lump sum materials;
C. Lump sum equipment usage;
d. Appropriate overhead and profit as defined in 7.3.6 above.
7.3.7 Delete in its entirety.
7.3.9 Supplement by adding the following: In the event the Owner or Contractor do not agree with
the determination of the Architect, in any subsequent proceedings or dispute resolution, the
total compensation or credit for the changed work, relating thereto, or resulting therefrom
shall be limited to costs (plus overhead and profit) as described and limited in Paragraph
7.3.6 hereinabove as supplemented. If either the Contractor or Owner disagrees with the
Architect's determination of the change in the dollar amount or change in the Contract time,
a written notice of claim must be submitted to the Architect within twenty-one (2 1) days after
the issuance of the Architect's determination. Failure timely to submit such written notice of
claim shall operate as waiver of any right to adjustment of the Contract sum or time other
than as contained in the Architect's previously issued determination.
[yelm sryl 00800 - 15 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-15
ARTICLE 8 TIME
B_1. DEFINITIONS
81.2 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Within ten days of Owners written notification to
the Contractor of their intent to award the contract, the Contractor shall submit an executed contract,
surety bond, preliminary progress schedule, certificates of insurance, any documents required by
state or local authorities, and all other documents required by the Contract. Failure to make such a
submission shall constitute a material breach of the conditions of the bid and bid bond and, at
Owner's sole discretion, Owner may void the bid award and forfeit contractors bid bond. The Owner
shall issue a'Notice to Proceed,' which shall be the date of commencement of the work.
8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
823 Supplement as follows: After substantial completion the Contractor shall carry the work forward
expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve final completion, satisfying all requirements
necessary for the Owners acceptance of the project, within thirty (30) calendar days after substantial
completion.
8.2.4 The Contractor shall furnish such manpower, materials, facilities, and equipment and shall work such
hours, including night shifts, overtime operations and Sundays and holidays, as may be necessary
to insure the progress and completion of the Work within the time required by the Contract. If Work
actually in place falls behind the currently updated progress schedule which complies with contractual
requirements; and if it becomes apparent from the current schedule that the Work will not be
completed within the Contract Time, the Contractor agrees that he will, as necessary, take some of
all of the following actions, at no additional cost to the Owner, as required to substantially eliminate
the backlog of work:
increase the manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially eliminate in the
opinion of the Project Manager the backlog of Work,
increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day, working days per
week, or the amount of equipment, or any combination of the foregoing sufficiently to
substantially eliminate, in the opinion of the Project Manager, the backlog of Work; and,
reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrence of accomplishment of
activities.
8_3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
8.3.3 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Except as provided in this subparagraph, the
Contractor's sole remedy for delays shall be an extension of time. Except for unreasonable delays
in performance caused by the acts or omissions of the Owner or persons acting for the Owner, the
Contractor shall not be entitled to damages, extra compensation, or equitable adjustment for direct,
indirect, or impact damages for delay, including but not limited to cost of acceleration, home office
overhead or lost profits.
In the event of unreasonable delays caused by the acts or omissions of the Owner or persons acting
for the Owner, the Contractor shall be entitled to damages and equitable adjustment upon due notice
and claim as follows:
Contractor shall give written notice to the Owner and Architect that such delay is impending
or has commenced. No damage or adjustment shall be allowed for any day prior to receipt
of such notice.
lyeim sig] 00800 - 16 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00600-16 1
I
1 b. Contractor shall give timely notice of claim and proof: that the act or omission or delay was
2 unreasonable and that delay actually resulted to scheduled work which was critical to the
3 Contractor's progress.
Because of the difficulties and disputes commonly attending claims for delay, the parties
agree that the Contractor's reasonable compensation for damages or equitable adjustment
for delay, including direct, indirect or impact damages of every nature, shall be in the
liquidated sum as follows: Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the same
daily sum established for general liquidated damages due the Owner for Contractor delay in
achieving substantial completion.
ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
9.2.1 Supplement by adding the following: The schedule of values shall allocate 5% of the Contract sum
to a category which shall be entitled "Achieving Final Completion." Such sum shall cover all work and
services necessary for the Contractor to proceed from substantial completion through satisfying all
requirements for Owner acceptance, including completion of all punch list work and the requirements
contained in paragraph 9.10. No portion of such sum shall be due the Contractor until all
requirements for Owner acceptance are satisfied.
9_3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
9.3.1 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Progress payments will be made monthly for duly
certified and approved work performed during the calendar month preceding the application. Unless
the Owner notifies the Contractor that its fiscal procedures and schedule require a different submittal
date, the Contractor shall, within the first ten days of each month, submit to the Architect, with a copy
to the Owner, an itemized, notarized application for payment for work performed during the prior
calendar month on a form supplied by Owner, supported by such data substantiating the Contractor's
right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, and reflecting retainage as provided
elsewhere in the Contract. Contractor shall also provide along with this pay request their
certified payroll breakdown for the same period of time as for the pay request
CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
.4.1 Supplement as follows: The Architect shall include, in the written statement of specific reasons for
withholding certification of payment, a statement of what remedial action must be taken by the
Contractor to receive the amount for which certification is withheld. The Owner shall have until close
of business of the eighth (8th) working day after the Architect's receipt of the Payment Request in
which to provide in writing to Contractor and Architect the Owner`s own statement of reasons and
remedial action; provided that in the absence of Owner action within the stated time, the Owner shall
be deemed, as of close of business on the eighth (8th) working day, to have adopted and ratified, as
its own, the Architect's statement of reasons and remedial actions as required by RCW 39.76.011.
9_5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
9.5_1.7 Delete and substitute the following: "Unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work by the
Contractor, including but not limited to failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents."
'53 9.5_1.8 Failure or refusal of the Contractor to fully comply with requirements in the Contract
54 Documents for preparation and submission of scheduling of the Work and updates thereof;
55 failure to present affidavits pertaining to wages paid as required by statute; or failure to
56 comply with any applicable equal employment or affirmative action requirements.
' 57
' lyenn stet 00800 - 17 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00600-17
Add the following:
'
..a. Contracts for public improvements or work, other than for professional services, by the state,
or any county, city, town, district, board, or other public body, herein referred to as 'public
'
body, shall provide, and Mere shall be reserved by the public body from the moneys earned
by the contractor on estimates during the progress of the improvement or work, a sum equal
to, not more than five percent said sum to be retained by the state, county, city, town, district,
board, or other public body, as a trust fund for the protection and payment of; person or
'
persons, mechanic, subcontractor or materialman who shall perform any labor upon such
contract or the doing of said work, and all persons or subcontractors with provisions and
supplies for the carrying on of such work, and the state with respect to taxes imposed
'
pursuant to Title 82 RCW which maybe due from such contractor. Every person performing
labor or furnishing supplies toward the completion of said improvement or work shall have
a lien upon said moneys so reserved: PROVIDED, That such notice of the lien of such
claimant shall be given in the manner and within the time provided in RCW 39.08.030 as now
'
existing and in accordance with any amendments that may hereafter be made thereto:
PROVIDED FURTHER, thatthe board, council, commission, trustees, officerorbody acting
for the state, county or municipality or other public body thirty days after complefon and
'
acceptance of all contract work other than landscaping, may release and pay in full the
amounts retained during the performance of the contract (other than continuing retention of
five percent of the moneys earned for landscaping) subject to the provisions of RCW
60.28.020.
'
b. The moneys reserved under the provisions of subsection (1) of this section, at the option of
the contractor, shall be:
'
(1) Retained in a fund by the public body until thirty days following the final acceptance
of said improvement of work as completed;
'
(2) Deposited by the public body in an interest - bearing account in a bank, mutual
savings bank, or savings and loan association, not subject to withdrawal until after
the final acceptance of said improvement or work as completed, or until agreed to
,
by both parties: PROVIDED, That interest on such account shall be paitl to the
contractor;
(3) Placed in escrow with a bank or trust company by the public body until thirty days
,
following the final acceptance of said improvement or work as completed. When the
moneys reserved are to be placed in escrow, the public body shall issue a check
representing the sum of the moneys reserved payable to the bank or trust company
and the contractor jointly. Such check shall be converted into bonds and securities
'
chosen by the contractor and approved by the public body and such bonds and
securities shall be held in escrow. Interest on such bonds and securities shall be
paid to the contractor as the said interest accrues.
,
c The contractor may withhold payment of not more than five percent from the moneys earned
by any subcontractoror supplier contracted with bythe contractorto provide labor, materials,
or equipment to the public project. Whenever the contractor reserves funds earned by a
'
subcontractor or supplier, the contractor shall pay interest to the subcontractor or supplier at
a rate equal to that received by the contractor from reserved funds.
in
1
d. The contractor may submit a bond for the full amount of funds retained by the public body
a form acceptable to the public body. The public body shall release the retained funds to the
contractor within fifteen days of accepting the bond from the contractor. Whenever a public
body accepts a bond in lieu of retained funds from a contractor, the contractor shall accept
,
like bonds from any subcontractors or suppliers from which the contractor has retained funds.
The contractor shall then release the funds retained from the subcontractor or supplier to the
subcontractor or supplier within fifteen days of accepting the bond from the subcontractor or
supplier.
,
lyalm Sig] 00800 - 18 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-18
'
I
1
1
e. If the public body administering a contract, after a substantial portion of the work has been
2
completed, finds that an unreasonable delay will occur in the completion of the remaining
portion of the contract for any reason not the result of a breach thereof, it may, if the
'3
4
contractor agrees, delete from the contract the remaining work and accept as final the
5
improvement at the stage of completion then attained and make payment in proportion to the
6
amount of the work accomplished and in such case any amounts retained and accumulated
under this section shall be held for a period of thirty days following such acceptance. In the
'7
8
event that the work shall have been terminated before final completion as provided in this
9
section, the public body may thereafter enter into a new contract with the same contractor
10
to perform the remaining work or improvement for an amount equal to or less than the cost
11
of the remaining work as was provided for in the original contract without advertisement or
12
bid. The provisions of this Chapter 60.28 RCW shall be deemed exclusive and shall
13
supersede all provisions and regulations in conflict herewith"
14
15
9_6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
16
17
9.6.1 Supplement by adding the following: The Owner shall withhold as retainage a sum equal to five
'18
percent (5 %) of each such progress payment. The retainage, its management and payment shall be
19
in accordance with RCW Chapter 60.28 as they now exist or are hereafter amended.
20
21
9.6.2 Supplement by adding the following: Contractors and subcontractors are limited in the extentto which
'22
they may withhold retainage and they shall be governed by the provisions of RCW Chapter 60.28.
23
The Architect or Owner may require as a condition to issuance of a progress payment proof of
24
payments to subcontractors in accordance with the Contract Documents and applicable statutes. No
work shall commence until the Contractor has submitted for Contractor and each subcontractor an
'25
26
approved "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages." Each Application for payment shall include
27
the Contractor's statement that the prevailing wages have been paid in accordancewith the approved
28
Statements of Intent.
29
'
30
9.6.7 Delete in its entirety.
31
'33
32
9_7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
34
9.7.1 Amend by changing "7' days to "15" days in all places where it occurs in the paragraph.
35
9_8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
'36
37
38
9.8.1 Supplement as follows: No portion of the project will be considered substantially complete until each
39
of the following conditions are met: local building and fire authorities shall have issued a Certificate
'40
of Occupancy covering that portion of the Work; all of the project's parts and systems shall be
41
accessible, operable, and usable by the Owner, including site work.; the project shall be cleaned; and
42
only incidental corrective work under punch lists and final cleaning (if required) may remain for final
43
completion. The Work may not be considered substantially complete if the corrective work or punch
'44
list work, in the Architect's consultant's reasonable judgment, cannot be completed within thirty (30)
45
calendar days under conditions of Owner occupancy and without material interference with Owner
46
occupancy.
'47
48
9.8.4 Add as follows: At the time the Contractor signs the last Certificate of Substantial Completion, the
49
Contractor shall cause to be attached thereto a written list identifying each claim that is outstanding
50
and unresolved at that time. Any claim by the Contractor which is not so identified and attached to
'51
the Certificate of Substantial Completion is waived, except for: Contract sums not then due;
52
retainage; and events which may occur after the signing of the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
53
54
9.8.5 Delete the last sentence.
'
55
i
' IYelm stgl 00600 -19 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -19
9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
9.10.1 Add the following sentence
"The Architect's final Certificate for Payment shall establish the date of Final completion. If the
contractor notifies the Architect that the punch list items are completed and requests an inspection
to determine compliance, and the Architect determines that some or all the punch list items are not
completed, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs, including Architect's fee, for any future
Architect's inspections after the first inspection to determine subsequent compliance with the
Architect's punch list"
9,10.2 Supplement by adding the following: Such recoverable costs and attorney fees shall include those
expended by Owner in defending such lien claim even if Owner does not pay to discharge same. See
Division 1 for other conditions precedent to final payment.
9.10.3 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: If the School Board of Directors, after a substantial
portion of the Work has been completed, finds that an unreasonable delay will occur in the completion
of the remaining portion of the Contract for any reason not the result of a breach thereof, it may, if the
Contractor agrees, delete from the Contract the remaining work and accept as final the improvement
at the stage of completion then attained and make payment in proportion to the amount of work
accomplished. The rights of the parties and the conditions under which such action is taken shall be
governed by the provisions of RCW Chapter 60.28, as the same now exists or is hereafter amended.
9.10.4 Delete in its entirety.
9.10.6 Retainage shall not be paid until the Contractor has obtained certification or approvals required by
law, including the approval of the Department of Labor & Industries of "Affidavit of Wages Paid" and
the certification of the Washington Department of Revenue regarding taxes pursuant to RCW
60.28.060. The disposition of retainage shall be fully subject to all rights and requirements stated in
RCW Chapter 60.28. A bond for retainage or lien against retainage shall be one issued by a bonding
company licensed to do business in the State of Washington and shall have a Best's rating of A -NI I
orbetter. "Final completion," "acceptance" and "completion of all contract work" shall mean passage
of a resolution of acceptance by the School Board of Directors. Such acceptance shall be due
promptly upon the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment and Owner's receipt of
Contractor's submissions required by this Section 9.10.
9 101 Add new paragraph as follows: After completion of all contract work other than landscaping, the
Contractor may request that the Owner release and pay in full the amount retained during the
performance of the contract. Upon certification by the Architect that all contract work other than
,
landscaping is complete, and after the Contractor has made all submissions required I Paragraph
9. 10.2 as supplemented, the School Board of Directors shall pass a resolution of partial acceptance.
With regard to all contract work other than landscaping, all claimants of lien against retainage shall
file claims of lien against the retainage within forty -five (45) days after the School Board of Directors'
'
resolution of partial acceptance. Within sixty (60) days of such partial contract completion and partial
acceptance by the School Board of Directors, the Owner shall pay in full the amounts retained (other
than continuing retention of five percent [5 %] of the monies earned for landscaping) subject to the
provisions of Chapters 39.12 and 60.28 RCW and Chapter 223, 1992 Laws of Washington"
,
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
'
10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS [Note that the provisions of this section shall not apply to the extent
contractors scope of work includes removal, remediation or encapsulation of hazardous substances
disclosed in the Contract Documents.]
'
10_3.2 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed
by the Contractor
laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported
'
Iyeim stgl 00800 - 20 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-20
,
I
1 1
and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verity that it has been rendered
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS:
Paragraphs 11.1 through 11.4.10 are deleted and substituted therefor is the following:
2
harmless. The term rendered harmless as used in this section shall include removal, encapsulation,
'3
4
or otherwise appropriately shielded to protect Contractor's area of work. When the material or
substance has been rendered harmless, work in the affected area shall resume. The contract time
11,1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
5
shall be extended appropriately and the contract sum shall be adjusted as agreed by the parties or
6
as provided and limited in paragraph 7.3.6 above.
The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect him, the Owner, and the
7
32
'
8
10_3.3 Amend by deleting from the last line of the subparagraph the word "sole."
arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract, whether such operations
9
34
be by himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or
10
10.4 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: The Contractor shall not install in the Work any
'11
'35
material containing asbestos, which is defined as including: chrysotile, amosite, crocidolite, tremolite
12
asbestos, anthophyllite asbestos, actinolite asbestos, and any of these minerals that have been
.1 claims under workers or workmen's compensation, disability benefit, and similar
13
chemically treated and /or altered. In the event the Contractor reasonably believes that any specified
employee benefit acts with workmen's compensation and employers liability
material, project, equipment or appliance contains asbestos the Contractor shall immediately give
'14
15
written notice to the Architect and Owner, identifying fully: the material, project, equipment or
requirements of the state(s) having jurisdiction over any portion of the Work;
16
appliance believed to contain asbestos and the basis for the belief. The Owner at its sole
17
responsibility shall respond promptly to Contractor's notice by: determining whether asbestos is
'18
present and giving the Contractor written direction either to install the questioned material, product,
19
equipment or appliance or to install a substitute. Should the process described in this paragraph
.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any
20
cause the Contractor to incur delay or additional cost which is not the subject of a Change Order or
person other than his employees;
21
Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall give notice and files claims as provided in Article
'
22
4.
'25
26
27
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS:
Paragraphs 11.1 through 11.4.10 are deleted and substituted therefor is the following:
28
29
11,1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
30
31
The Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance as will protect him, the Owner, and the
32
Architect and their agents, representatives and employees from claims set forth below which may
33
arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract, whether such operations
34
be by himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or
by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such insurance shall include the following:
'35
36
37
.1 claims under workers or workmen's compensation, disability benefit, and similar
38
employee benefit acts with workmen's compensation and employers liability
39
insurance in an amount not less than those necessary to meet the statutory
40
requirements of the state(s) having jurisdiction over any portion of the Work;
41
42
43
.2 claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or
death of persons performing work or services or supplying materials for the Work;
44
45
.3 claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any
46
person other than his employees;
47
48
.4 claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are
49
sustained (1) by any person as a result of any offense directly or indirectly related to
50
the employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by any other person;
51
52
.5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, bemuse of injury to or destruction
53
of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and
'
54
55
.6 claims for damages bemuse of bodily injury or death of any person or property
56
damage arising out of the Ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle.
'
57
'
lyeim stg1 00800 - 21 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-21
For each policy of insurance required by this Article 11, Contractor shall provide to Owner prior to
commencement of the Work and within ten days after issuance of the Notice of Intent to Award
Contract, two copies of certificates of insurance, in forms acceptable to the Owner. Provide one copy
to Owner and one to Architect. THE OWNER MAY WITHHOLD ITS'NOTICE TO PROCEED'
AND /OR PAYMENT TO THE CONTRACTOR UNTIL SUCH CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE,
ACCEPTABLE TO THE OWNER IS RECEIVED OR THE BIDDER MAY BE DISQUALIFIED AND
THE BID REJECTED. Insurance shall be provided only by insurance carriers licensed in the state
of Washington. Each certificate shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies
will not be canceled until at least thirty (30) days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner.
Each such policy of insurance required by this Article 11 shall be endorsed to name as ADDITIONAL
INSUREDS the OWNER and ARCHITECT, their officers, agents and employees; and such policy
shall be PRIMARY and NONCONTRIBUTING to any insurance possessed or procured by the Owner
and /or Architect.
11.2 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
11_2.1 Commercial General Liability. Contractor shall procure for this project a Commercial General Liability
policy with endorsements and supplemental coverage providing at least the following coverages on
an occurrence basis:
(a) premises and operations;
(b) Owner's and Contractor's protective;
(c) products liability including completed operations;
(d) contractual liability;
(e) property damage including explosion, underground, collapse, and fire;
(f) personal injury liability;
(g) cross liability clause; and
(h) employer's stop gap.
11_2.2 Automobile Liability Coverage. Contractor shall procure for this project automobile bodily injury and
property damage insurance including the following coverages:
(a)
all owned vehicles;
(b)
non -owned automobiles; and
(c)
hired automobiles.
11.2.3 Primary Insurance Limits and Umbrella Coverage. The Commercial General Liability and Automobile
Liability policies, with the coverages described above, shall have PRIMARY COVERAGE limits of at
least One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence for bodily injury/personal injury and Five
Hundred Thousand Dollars ($500,000) for property damage. Contractor shall, in addition, provide an
UMBRELLA FORM excess insurance applicable to this project in the minimum amount of Five Million
Dollars ($5,000,000) single limit.
11.2.4 Subcontractor Insurance. Contractor shall require that each subcontractor of every baron this project
shall maintain liability coverages as described above in at least the amount of the primary coverage.
11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE
11_3.1 The Contractor shall purchase and at all times maintain until final acceptance by the School Board
such insurance as will protect as insureds the Contractor, Owner, and the Owner's representatives,
[yeim stg]00800 -22 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -22 1
agents and employees, the Architect, Engineers and their consultants, subcontractors and sub -
subcontractors from loss or damage to work or property in the course of construction, including all
machinery, materials, and supplies on the premises or in transit thereto or stored off site, and
intended to become a part of the finished Work. This insurance shall be in the form of a Builder's
Risk policy including "Builder's All -Risk Coverage," "All -Risk Installation Floater,' or equivalent and
shall provide coverage on full replacement cost, including sales tax and additional Architect's fees
made necessary by the loss. Such policy shall insure against the perils of fire, extended coverage
and physical loss or damage, including withoutduplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, earthquake,
flood, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings and debris removal, including
demolition occasioned by the enforcement of any applicable legal requirements. Contractor shall
cause such policy or policies of insurance required underthis subparagraph to be endorsed: toname
the Owner and Architect as Additional Insureds; to provide that the insurer or insurers waive any right
of subrogation against the Owner and Architect; and to make the policy PRIMARY and
NONCONTRIBUTORY to any other insurance policies. Any deductible provision in such insurance
shall not exceed $10,000, except for earthquake and flood coverages which shall be the greater of
2% of the contract or $25,000. Notwithstanding any such deductible provision, Contractor shall
remain solely liable for the full amount of any item covered by such insurance.
11_3.2 Any toss insured under subparagraph 11.3.1 is to be adjusted with the Owner and made payable to
the Owner as trustee for the insureds, as their interests may appear. The Contractor shall pay each
subcontractor a just share of any insurance monies received by the Contractor, and by appropriate
agreement, written where legally required for validity, shall require each subcontractor to make
payments to his sub - subcontractors in similar manner.
11_3.3 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages to the extent covered by
insurance obtained pursuant to this paragraph 11.3 or any other property insurance applicable to the
Work, except such rights as they may have to the proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as
trustee. The Contractor shall require, by appropriate agreement, written where legally required for
validity, similar waivers in favor of the Owner and the Contractor by subcontractors and sub -
subcontractors. With respect to the waiver rights or recovery, the term "Owner' shall be deemed to
include, to the extent covered by property insurance applicable thereto, his consultants, employees
and agents, and representatives including the Architect and his consultants, employees and agents.
The Contractor waives as against any separate Contractor described in Article 6 all rights for
damages caused by fire or other perils in the same manner as is provided above as against the
Owner.
11_3.4 If required in writing by any parry in interest, the Owner as trustee shall, upon the occurrence of an
insured loss: deposit in a separate account any money so received; and distribute it in accordance
with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with a court order or
award. If after such loss no other special agreement is made, replacement of damaged work shall
be covered by an appropriate Change Order.
11_3.5 The Owner as trustee shall have power to adjust and settle any loss with the insurers unless one of
the parties in interest shall object in writing within five (5) days after the occurrence of loss to the
Owners exercise of this power, and if such objection be made, the matter shall be decided by a court
of competent jurisdiction or as the parties in interest otherwise agree. The Owner as trustee shall,
in that case, make settlement with the insurers in accordance with the directions of such court or
arbitrators. If distribution of the insurance proceeds by arbitration is required, the arbitrators will direct
such distribution.
11.3.6 If the Owner finds it necessary to occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to substantial
completion thereof, such occupancy shall not commence prior to written notice to and consent of the
insurance company or companies providing the property insurance. This insurance shall not be
canceled or lapsed on account of such partial occupancy. Consent of the insurance company or
companies to such occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.
' lyelm stgl 00800 - 23 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-23
11_3.7 In the event Contractor neglects, refuses, orfails to provide the insurance required underthe Contract
Documents, or if such insurance is canceled for any reason, the Owner shall have the right but not
the duty to procure the same, and the cost thereof shall be deducted from monies then due or
thereafter to become due to the Contractor.
iG14•111111111113 ,161.171cIIN41KIN 77SC.1q�YL'bl.`hb9
11_5.1 Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: "The Contractor shall secure and pay for
performance and labor and material payment and maintenance bonds (a Washington Public Works
Bond fully satisfying all requirements of RC W Chapter 39.08), issued by a bonding company licensed
to transact business in the State of Washington, in statutory form. This bond and any bond offered
in lieu of retainage must be issued by a Surety Company with a Best's rating of A -Nil or better.
Liability under each of the bonds shall be: 100% of contract sum plus sales tax for (1) performance,
(2) labor and materials payment. Within ten days after the issuance of the Notice of Intent to
Award Contract, the Contractor shall deliver two copies of the bond to the Owner and one
copy to the Architect. THE OWNER MAY WITHHOLD ITS 'NOTICE TO PROCEED' AND /OR
PAYMENT TO THE CONTRACTOR UNTIL SUCH SURETY BOND IS RECEIVED OR THE BIDDER
MAY BE DISQUALIFIED AND THE BID REJECTED.
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
12.1.3 Add new paragraph as follows:
Wherever the term "Architect" is used in Sections 12.1.1 and 12.1.2, the Owner's Project Manager
shall have the same rights and powers acting through the Architect
12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
12_2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
12.2.2.1 Delete the third sentence starting with "During" and ending with "warranty."
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13.1
GOVERNING LAW
'
13_1.1
Suoplement as follows: Venue for any legal action arising from or relating to this Contract shall be
in the county where the project is located.
'
13.4
RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
13.4.1
Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: Except as limited herein or specially provided for
'
herein, the parties shall have such other duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed
or made available by the law of the State of Washington.
13.4.2
Delete in its entirety and substitute the following: The failure of any party to insist in any one or more
'
instances upon the strict performance of any one or more of the provisions of this Contract, or to
exercise any right herein contained or provided by law, shall not be construed as a waiver or
relinquishment of the performance of such provisions or rights or of the right to subsequently demand
'
such strict performance or exercise of such rights.
1
Iyeim sig1 00800 - 24 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-24
'
I
1 13.4.3 If any clause, sentence, or provision of this Contract is held as a matter of law to be void or
2 unenforceable, the remainder of the Contract shall be enforceable without such clause, sentence, or
3 provision.
13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
13_5.7 No acceptance of any Work shall be construed to result from any inspections, tests or failures to
inspect or test by the Owner, the Owner's representatives, the Architect or any other person. No
inspection, test, failure to inspect or test, or failure to discover any defect or nonconformity by the
Owner, the Owner's representatives, the Architect or any other person shall relieve the Contractor of
its responsibility for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents or impair the Owner's right
to reject defective or nonconforming items or right to avail itself of any other remedy to which the
Owner may be entitled, notwithstanding the Owner's knowledge of the defect or nonconformity, its
substantiality or the ease of its discovery.
13.7 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD.
This section including its subparagraphs is deleted in its entirety.
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR.
Delete Paragraphs 14.1.1. 14.1Z 14.1.3 and 14.1.4 in their entirety and substitute the following: The
Contractor shall have the right to terminate the Contract only under the circumstances and with the
rights and remedies provided in RCW 60.28.080.
14.2 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE
14_2.5 If action by Owner under this paragraph 14.2 upon claim, is determined to have been inappropriate,
the compensation to the Contractor resulting therefrom shall be computed pursuant to provisions of
paragraph 14.4, Termination for Convenience.
14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
14_3.2 Supplement as follows: Allowance for overhead and profit as provided in this Paragraph 14.3 shall
be limited to those allowances provided in Paragraph 7.3 as supplemented.
14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE- Delete this section in its entirety and
substitute the following:
The Owner may terminate performance of work under this contract in whole or part if it determines
that a termination is in its best interest. Termination for convenience shall be transmitted by written
notice specifying the extent of the contract work which is terminated and the effective date.
After receipt of a notice of termination and except as directed by the Owner, the Contractor shall
immediately proceed to perform the following, regardless of any delay in determining or adjusting any
amount due under this clause:
(1) Stop work as specified in the notice,
'53 (2) Place no further subcontracts or orders for materials, services or facilities except as
54 necessary to complete the continued portion of the centrack
55
'56 (3) Terminate all subcontracts to the extent they relate to the work terminated.
57
' [yelm stg] 00800 - 25 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800-25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
On termination for convenience, if the Owner and Contractor fail to agree on the whole amount to be
paid because of the termination of the work, the Contractor shall be paid the value of the work
satisfactorily completed as determined by the Architect by reference to the approved schedule of
values.
Profit on Work Performed. If it appears that the Contractor would have sustained a loss on the entire
contract had it been completed, profit may be reduced or eliminated from sums due upon work
satisfactorily completed. No profit shall be payable on the portion of the work terminated. In no case
shall the amounts paid to the Contractor for termination for convenience exceed the original contract
sum of the work plus agreed upon change orders.
Add the following new Article:
ARTICLE 15 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
15.1 All provisions to the Revised Code of Washington (RCW) are specifically included in the General
Conditions by reference, including the following (in the event of conflict between these and other
provisions of the General Conditions, these shall govern):
15_1.1 RCW Chapter 39.04: Relating to plans and specifications on work done for public bodies, estimates
of costs of the work, supplemental plans and specifications, supplemental estimates, accounts and
records of costs, engineer's certificate.
15.11 RCW Chapter 39.08: Relating to form of Contractor's bonds and liens.
15_1.3 RCW Chapter 39.12: Concerning the prevailing wage rates to be paid to labor on public works, the
certificates required by the state, the arbitration of disputes over wages, and penalties.
15_1.4 RCW Chapter 60.28: Relating to labor and materials liens and taxes and retainage.
15_1.5 RCW Chapter 39.16: Relating to resident employees on public works.
15_1.6 RCW Chapter 49.28: Relating to hours of labor.
15_1.7 RCW Chapter 18.27: Relating to registration of Contractors.
15_1.8 RCW Chapter 39.25: Relating to offshore items.
15_1.9 RCW Chapter 49.60: Relating to unfair or discriminatory practices.
15.1.10 RCW Chapter 70.92: Relating to the aged and handicapped.
15.1.11 The Americans With Disabilities Act.
15.1.12 RCW 28A.210.310: Relating to the prohibition of tobacco use on all school district
property.
151.13 SCHOOL DISTRICT POLICY "BACKGROUND CHECKS"
District contractors whose employees will have regularly scheduled unsupervised access to children
must certify in writing that they have complied with the pre - employment background check
requirements of 1992 Washington Laws Chapter 159 and that, as to employees who will be
performing services forthe District, no background check has disclosed any information suggesting
that it would be inappropriate for the employee(s) to have unsupervised access to children.
[yeim st91 00800 -26 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
00800 -26 1
I
1 1 Within two day after the issuance of the Notice of Intent to Award Contract, and before any on site
2 work commences, the Contractor shall deliver two copies of a letter stating their intent to comply with
'3 School District policy. Submit one copy of the letter to the Owner and one copy to the Architect THE
4 OWNER MAY WITHHOLD ITS NOTICE TO PROCEED' AND /OR PAYMENT TO THE
5 CONTRACTOR UNTIL SUCH LETTER IS RECEIVED.
6
7 All contractors, suppliers, and visitors who come onto school property shall be required to display an
8 identification badge on their person. This badge shall identify their company or in cases of suppliers
9 and visitors, a general visitor badge with General Contractors insignia shall be acceptable. All
10 badges to display signature of Project Superintendent.
' 11
12
13 END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITION
t
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
' lyelm slgl 00800 -27 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00800 -27
I
' SECTION 00830 -PREVAILING WAGE RATES
The following is a list of the Prevailing Wage Rates as required per RCW 39.12.022 and as furnished by the
State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries (Employment Standards Section), Prevailing Wage,
P.O. Box 44540, Olympia, Washington 98504 -4540, Telephone (360) 902 -5335, Fax (360) 902 -5300.
Section 2 of WAC 296 -127 -011 states that for all contracts, except Building Services Maintenance Contracts,
the prevailing Wage Rates which are in effect on the date when the bids by the Prime Contractorare required
t to be submitted to the Contract Awarding Public Agency are the prevailing wage rates which must be paid for
the duration of the contract.
1
1
1
1
1
1
ilyelm stg7 00830 - 1 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-1
State of Washington
Department of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage
P.O. Box 41540
Olympia, Washington 985044540
Telephone (360) 902 -5335 FAX (360) 902-53DO
THURSTON County - Effective: 9/1/2004
Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On
public works projects, workera wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of
overtime calculation requirements is provided by clicking on the benefit code.
ClaasiRcation
Prevailing
Overtime
Holiday
Note
Wage
Code
Code
Code
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$32.61
1N
5Q
BOILERMAKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$32.01
1
BRICK AND MARBLE MASONS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$39.87
1M
59
CABINET MAKERS (IN SHOP)
JOURNEY LEVEL
$13.02
1
CARPENTERS
ACOUSTICAL WORKER
$39.11
1M
AQ
BRIDGE, DOCK AND WARF CARPENTERS
$38.95
1M
5Q
CARPENTER
$38.95
M
5Q
CREOSOTED MATERIAL
$39.05
IM
5p
DRYWALL APPLICATOR
$39.63
1M
5p
FLOOR FINISHER
$39.08
1M
M
FLOOR LAYER
$39.08
1M
0
FLOOR SANDER
$39.08
1M
50
MILLWRIGHT AND MACHINE ERECTORS
$39.95
1M
0
PILEDRIVERS, DRIVING, PULLING, PLACING
COLLARS AND WELDING
$39.15
1M
5Q
SAWFILER
$39.08
1M
5Q
SHINGLER
$39.08
1M
5Q
STATIONARY POWER SAW OPERATOR
$39.08
1M
51)
STATIONARY WOODWORKING TOOLS
$39.08
1M
5p
CEMENT MASONS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$42.01
1M
5Q
DIVERS S TENDERS
DIVER
$80.62
1M
29
BA
DIVER TENDER
$41.72
M
5Q
DREDGE WORKERS
ASSISTANT ENGINEER
$39.52
1B
5P
5L
ASSISTANT MATE (DECKHAND)
$38.76
1B
52
5L
BOATMEN
$39.52
1@
Q
5L
ENGINEER WELDER
$39.57
1@
5Q
8L
LEVERMAN, HYDRAULIC
$41.04
18
gz
LL
MAINTENANCE
$38.76
13
5Q
5L
MATES
$39.52
1B
5Q
BL
OILER
$39.16
1i
5Q
LL
(yelm stgl 00830 - 2 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-2 1
Classification
Pnvelling
Overtime
Holiday Nob
Wage
Code
Code Code
DRYWALL TAPERS
JOURNEYLEVEL
$39.44
ELECTRICAL FIXTURE MAINTENANCE WORKERS
JOURNEYLEVEL
$7.16
1
ELECTRICIANS - INSIDE
CABLE SPLICER
$46.07
11G
5C
JOURNEYLEVEL
$42.98
iG
5C
LEAD COVERED CABLE SPLICER
$49.16
TG
5C
WELDER
$46.07
1G
5C
ELECTRICIANS - MOTOR SHOP
CRAFTSMAN
$15.37
2A
6C
JOURNEY LEVEL
$14.69
9
5C
ELECTRICIANS - POWERLINE CONSTRUCTION
CABLE SPLICER
$49.54
4A
5A
CERTIFIED LINE WELDER
$4515
4A
SA
GROUNDPERSON
$32.63
}P
56
HEAD GROUNDPERSON
$34.43
16
5A
HEAVY LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
$45.15
4A
5A
JACKHAMMER OPERATOR
$34.43
4A
$AA
JOURNEY LEVEL LINEPERSON
$45.15
4A
5A
LINE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
$38.37
4A
5A
POLE SPRAYER
$45.15
4A
SA
POWDERPERSON
$34.43
4A
5A
ELECTRONIC 6 TELECOMMUNICATION TECHNICIANS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$12.07
1
ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS
MECHANIC
$49.28
4A
6Q
MECHANIC IN CHARGE
$54.18
4A
6Q
FABRICATED PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS
ALL CLASSIFICATIONS
$13.50
1
FENCE ERECTORS
FENCE ERECTOR
$17.65
1
FLAGGERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$27.93
1N
SO
GLAZIERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$39.96
2E
5G
HEAT S FROST INSULATORS AND ASBESTOS WORKERS
MECHANIC
$41.93
1F
5E
HEATING EQUIPMENT MECHANICS
MECHANIC
$27.66
1
HOD CARRIERS 6 MASON TENDERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$33.09
1N
5D
INDUSTRIAL ENGINE AND MACHINE MECHANICS
MECHANIC
$15.85
1
INDUSTRIAL POWER VACUUM CLEANER
JOURNEY LEVEL
$9.07
1
INLAND BOATMEN
CAPTAIN
$35.14
1K
5B
COOK
$30.11
1K
ED
DECKHAND
$29.09
1K
5B
ENGINEER/DECKHAND
$31.66
1K
MATE, LAUNCH OPERATOR
$33.24
1K
5B
Iyelm stg]00630 -3 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00630 -3
Classification
Prevailing
Overtime
Holiday Note
Wage
Code
Code Code
INSPECTION /CLEANINGISEALING OF SEWER & WATER SYSTEMS BY REMOTE CONTROL
CLEANER OPERATOR, FOAMER OPERATOR
$9.73
1
GROUT TRUCK OPERATOR
$11.48
1
HEAD OPERATOR
$12.78
1
TECHNICIAN
$7.16
1
TV TRUCK OPERATOR
$10.53
1
INSULATION APPLICATORS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$38.95
IM
5D
IRONWORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$43.12
1B
5A
LABORERS
ASPHALT RAKER
$33.09
IN
D
BALLAST REGULATOR MACHINE
$32.81
IN
5D
BATCH WEIGHMAN
$27.93
1N
5D
BRUSH CUTTER
$32.61
iN
D
BRUSH HOG FEEDER
$32.61
lit
D
BURNERS
$32.61
1N
5D
CARPENTER TENDER
$32.61
1N
5D
CASSION WORKER
$33.45
IN
riED
CEMENT DUMPERIPAVING
$33.09
N
D
CEMENT FINISHER TENDER
$32.61
IN
5D
CHANGE - HOUSE MAN OR DRY SHACKMAN
$32.61
1N
5D
CHIPPING GUN (OVER 30 LBS)
$33.09
1N
5D
CHIPPING GUN (UNDER 30 LBS)
$32.61
IN
SD
CHOKER SETTER
$32.61
JN
D
CHUCKTENDER
$32.61
1N
5D
CLEAN -UP LABORER
$32.61
iN
5D
CONCRETE DUMPER/CHUTE OPERATOR
$33.09
?N
SD
CONCRETE FORM STRIPPER
$32.61
IN
D
CONCRETE SAW OPERATOR
$33.09
IN
D
CRUSHER FEEDER
$27.93
IN
5D
CURING LABORER
$32.61
IN
5D
DEMOLITION, WRECKING & MOVING
$32.61
iN
SD
(INCLUDING CHARRED MATERIALS)
DITCH DIGGER
$32.61
IN
5D
DIVER
$33.45
iN
5D
DRILL OPERATOR (HYDRAULIC, DIAMOND)
$33.09
1 N
5D
DRILL OPERATOR, AIRTRAC
$33.45
iN
D
DUMPMAN
$32.61
1N
5D
EPDXY TECHNICIAN
$32.61
iN
5D
EROSION CONTROL WORKER
$32.61
1N
5D
FALLERIBUCKER, CHAIN SAW
$33.09
]N
5D
FINAL DETAIL CLEANUP (i.e., dusting, vacuuming,
$25.61
IN
5D
window cleaning; NOT construction debris cleanup)
FINE GRADERS
$32.61
IN
5D
FIRE WATCH
$27.93
1NJ
5D
FORM SETTER
$32.61
IN
D
GABON BASKET BUILDER
$32.61
L
5D
GENERAL LABORER
$32.81
1N
D
GRADE CHECKER & TRANSIT PERSON
$33.09
IN
D
GRINDERS
$32.61
IN
5D
GROUT MACHINE TENDER
$32.61
L
D
GUARDRAIL ERECTOR
$32.61
]N
5D
[yelm stgl 00830 - 4 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-4 1
Classification
Prevailing
Overtime
Holiday NOW
Wage
Code
Code Code
LABORERS (continued)
HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL A
$33.45
IL1
5P
HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL B
$33.09
1Ly
?O
HAZARDOUS WASTE WORKER LEVEL C
$32.61
]N
30
HIGH SCALER
$33.45
]N
50
HOD CARRIERIMORTARMAN
$33.09
IN
5D
JACKHAMMER
$33.09
]N
4.0
LASER BEAM OPERATOR
$33.09
IN
5D
MANHOLE BUILDER- MUDMAN
$3309
3N
iD
MATERIAL YARDMAN
$32.61
IN
5D
MINER
$33.45
L
5P
NOZZLEMAN, CONCRETE PUMP, GREEN
CUTTER WHEN USING HIGH PRESSURE AIR b
$33.09
1N
SD
WATER ON CONCRETE 8 ROCK, SANDBLAST,
GUNITE, SHOTCRETE, WATER BLASTER
PAVEMENT BREAKER
$33.09
]N
3D
PILOT CAR
$27.93
IN
m
PIPE POT TENDER
$33.09
IN
m
PIPE RELINER (NOT INSERT TYPE)
$33.09
1N
5D
PIPELAYER 8 CAULKER
$33.09
1N
5D
PIPELAYER 8 CAULKER (LEAD)
$33.45
]N
SD
PIPEWRAPPER
$33.09
IN
50
POTTENDER
$32.61
IN
50
POWDERMAN
$33.45
1N
50
POWDERMAN HELPER
$32.61
IN
5D
POWERJACKS
$33.09
3N
§.D
RAILROAD SPIKE PULLER (POWER)
$33.09
3N
5D
RE- TIMBERMAN
$33.45
IN
5D
RIPRAP MAN
$32.61
3N
'20
RODDER
$33.09
JN
5D
SCAFFOLD ERECTOR
$32.61
IN
5D
SCALE PERSON
$32.61
IN
5D
SIGNALMAN
$32.61
]N
30
SLOPER (OVER 20-)
$33.09
3N
5D
SLOPER SPRAYMAN
$32.61
IN
5D
SPREADER (CLARY POWER OR SIMILAR
$33.09
TYPES)
SPREADER (CONCRETE)
$33.09
IN
50
STAKE HOPPER
$32.81
]N
5D
STOCKPILER
$32.61
1N
m
TAMPER 8 SIMILAR ELECTRIC, AIR 8 GAS
$33.09
IN
5D
TAMPER (MULTIPLE 8 SELF PROPELLED)
$33.09
IN
5D
TOOLROOM MAN (AT JOB SITE)
$32.61
IN
SD
TOPPER - TAILER
$32.61
IN
50
TRACKLABORER
$32.61
1N
5D
TRACK LINER (POWER)
$33.09
1N
5D
TRUCK SPOTTER
$32.61
IN
SO
TUGGER OPERATOR
$33.09
IN
,5p
VIBRATING SCREED (AIR, GAS, OR ELECTRIC)
$32.61
]N
SO
VIBRATOR
$33.09
IN
M
VINYL SEAMER
$32.61
IN
5D
WELDER
$32.61
1N
5D
WELL -POINT LABORER
$33.09
iN
5D
' [yelm Wg] 00830 - 5 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-5
Classification
Prevailing
Overtime
Holiday
Note
Wage
Code
Code
Code
LABORERS - UNDERGROUND SEWER & WATER
GENERALLABORER
$32.61
IN
SO
PIPE LAYER
$33.09
IN
SO
LANDSCAPE CONSTRUCTION
IRRIGATION OR LAWN SPRINKLER
$11.42
1
INSTALLERS
-
LANDSCAPEEQUIPMENTOPERATORS OR
TRUCK DRIVERS
$781
1
LANDSCAPING OR PLANTING LABORERS
$7.93
1
LATHERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$39.63
1M
SD
MACHINISTS (HYDROELECTRIC SITE WORK)
MACHINIST
$16.84
1
METAL FABRICATION (IN SHOP)
FITTER
$23.02
iR
6T
LABORER
$14.88
1R
6T
LAYEROUT
$25.07
1R
6T
MACHINE OPERATOR
$18.74
1R
6T
WELDER
$20.99
iR
61-
MODULAR BUILDINGS
CABINET ASSEMBLY
$9.98
1
ELECTRICIAN
$9.98
1
EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
$9.98
1
PLUMBER
$9.98
1
PRODUCTION WORKER
$9.75
1
TOOL MAINTENANCE
$9.98
1
UTILITY PERSON
$9.98
1
WELDER
$9.98
1
PAINTERS
JOURNEYLEVEL
$30.76
2B
5A
PLASTERERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$39.93
1R
5A
PLAYGROUND & PARK EQUIPMENT INSTALLERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$7.93
1
PLUMBERS & PIPEFITTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$44.62
1B
5A
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS
ASSISTANT ENGINEERS
$37.26
IT
SO
9L
BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (3 YD &
$39.88
IT
5D
5L
UNDER)
BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (OVER 3 YD&
$40.34
IT
5D
8L
UNDER 6 YD)
BACKHOE, EXCAVATOR, SHOVEL (6 YD AND
§40.86
IT
SD
¢L
OVER WITH ATTACHMENTS)
BACKHOES, (75 HP & UNDER)
$39.49
1T
5D
PL
BACKHOES,(OVER 75 HP)
$39.88
IT
5D
8L
BARRIER MACHINE (ZIPPER)
$39.88
IT
5D
8L
BATCH PLANT OPERATOR, CONCRETE
$39.88
TT
5D
§L
BELT LOADERS (ELEVATING TYPE)
$39.49
1T
5-D
8L
BOBCAT
$37.26
IT
5D
¢L
BROOMS
$37.26
1T
5D
BUMP CUTTER
$39.88
IT
5D
LL
CABLEWAYS
$40.34
1T
5D
$L
lyelm stg) 00830 - 6 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-6 1
Classification
Prevailing
Overtime
Holiday
Nob
Wage
Code
Code
Code
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (continued)
CHIPPER
$39.88
IT
AQ
9L
COMPRESSORS
$37.26
IT
SO
¢L
CONCRETE FINISH MACHINE - LASER SCREED
$37.26
IT
SD
@L
CONCRETE PUMPS
$39.49
1T
3`Q
¢L
CONCRETE PUMP -TRUCK MOUNT WITH BOOM
$39.88
1T
SD
LL
ATTACHMENT
CONVEYORS
$39.49
1T
5D
8L
CRANES, THRU 19 TONS, WITH ATTACHMENTS
$39.49
IT
_5_D
¢L
CRANES, 20-44 TONS, WITH ATTACHMENTS
$39.88
IT
5D
§L
CRANES, 45 TONS- 99 TONS. UNDER 150 FT
$40.34
1T
D
¢L
OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB WITH ATACHMENTS)
CRANES, 100 TONS - 199 TONS, OR 150 FT OF
$40.86
1T
5D
@L
BOOM (INCLUDING JIB WITH ATTACHMENTS)
CRANES, 200 TONS TO 300 TONS, OR 250 FT
OF BOOM (INCLUDING JIB WITH
$41.40
IT
m
QL
ATTACHMENTS)
CRANES, A- FRAME, 10 TON AND UNDER
$37.26
IT
5D
8L
CRANES, A- FRAME, OVER 10 TON
$39.49
iT
5D
8LL
CRANES, OVER 300 TONS, OR 300' OF BOOM
$41'92
1T
5Q
AL
INCLUDING JIB WITH ATTACHMENTS
CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (20-44
$39.88
IT
SO
§L
TONS)
CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (45 -99
$40.34
IT
M
§,L
TONS)
CRANES, OVERHEAD, BRIDGE TYPE (100 TONS
$40.86
1T
5D
¢L
8 OVER)
CRANES, TOWER CRANE UP TO 175' IN
$40.86
IT
m
L
HEIGHT, BASE TO BOOM
CRANES, TOWER CRANE OVER 175' IN
$41.40
1T
5D
8L
HEIGHT, BASE TO BOOM
CRUSHERS
$39.88
1T
5D
AL
DECK ENGINEER/DECK WINCHES (POWER)
$39.88
TT
5D
flL
DERRICK, BUILDING
$40.34
1T
5D
4L
DOZERS, D-9 8 UNDER
$39.49
IT
5D
EL
DRILL OILERS- AUGER TYPE, TRUCK OR
$39.49
1T
5D
9L
CRANE MOUNT
DRILLING MACHINE
$39.88
1T
5D
8L
ELEVATOR AND MANUFT, PERMANENT AND
$37.26
1T
5D
L
SHAFT -TYPE
EQUIPMENT SERVICE ENGINEER (OILER)
$39.49
1T
50
¢L
FINISHING MACHINEBIDWELL GAMACO AND
$39.88
1T
5D
@L
SIMILAR EQUIP
FORK LIFTS, (3000 LES AND OVER)
$39.49
1T
5D
@L
FORK LIFTS, (UNDER 3000 LBS)
$37.26
1T
50
¢L
GRADE ENGINEER
$39.49
1T
,5Q
gL
GRADECHECKER AND STAKEMAN
$37.26
1T
5D
QL
GUARDRAIL PUNCH
$39.88
IT
§Q
§L
HOISTS, OUTSIDE (ELEVATORS AND
$39.49
1T
§Q
gL
MANLIFTS), AIR TUGGERS
HORIZONTAL/DIRECTIONAL DRILL LOCATOR
$39.49
1T
SD
¢L
HORIZONTALIDIRECTIONAL DRILL OPERATOR
$39.88
1T
5Q
91
HYDRALIFTSBOOM TRUCKS It TON 8 UNDER)
$37.26
1T
5D
4L
[yelm stg] 00830 - 7 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-7
Classification
Plevalling
Overtime
Holiday
Nob
Wage
Coda
Code
Code
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (continued)
HYDRALIFTSBOOM TRUCKS (OVER 10 TON)
$39.49
IT
5D
8L
LOADERS, OVERHEAD (6 YO UP TO 8 YD)
$40.34
H
5D
LL
LOADERS, OVERHEAD (8 YD 8 OVER)
$40.86
IT
5D
8L
LOADERS, OVERHEAD (UNDER 6 YD), PLANT
$39.88
IT
50
9L
FEED
LOCOMOTIVES, ALL
$39.88
IT
5D
8L
MECHANICS, ALL
$40.34
iT
m
BL
MIXERS, ASPHALT PLANT
$39.88
IT
5D
8L
MOTOR PATROL GRADER (FINISHING)
$39.88
IT
5D
8L
MOTOR PATROL GRADER (NON- FINISHING)
$39.49
1T
5D
L
MUCKING MACHINE, MOLE, TUNNEL DRILL
$4034
jT
`d-Q
BL
AND /OR SHIELD
OIL DISTRIBUTORS, BLOWER DISTRIBUTION
$37.26
IT
5D
8L
AND MULCH SEEDING OPERATOR
PAVEMENT BREAKER
$37.26
IT
5D
¢L
PILEDRIVER (OTHER THAN CRANE MOUNT)
$39.88
1T
§D
$6
PLANT OILER (ASPHALT, CRUSHER)
$39.49
IT
5D
AL
POSTHOLE DIGGER, MECHANICAL
$37.26
1T
515
8L
POWER PLANT
$37.26
TT
m
8L
PUMPS, WATER
$37.26
IT
50
8L
QUAD 9, D -10, AND HD41
$40.34
TT
5D
8L
REMOTE CONTROL OPERATOR ON RUBBER
$4034
1T
A
TIRED EARTH MOVING EQUIP
RIGGER AND BELLMAN
$37.26
TT
SO
8L
ROLLAGON
$40.34
IT
5D
8L
ROLLER, OTHER THAN PLANT ROAD MIX
$37.26
IT
5D
8L
ROLLERS, PLANTMIX OR MULTILIFT
$39.49
IT
5D
6L
MATERIALS
ROTO -MILL, ROTO- GRINDER
$39.88
TT
5D
L
SAWS, CONCRETE
$39.49
IT
5D
8L
SCRAPERS - SELF PROPELLED, HARD TAIL
END DUMP, ARTICULATING OFF -ROAD
$39.88
IT
5D
8L
EQUIPMENT ( UNDER 45 YD)
SCRAPERS - SELF PROPELLED, HARD TAIL
END DUMP, ARTICULATING OFF -ROAD
$40.34
L
5D
8L
EQUIPMENT (45 YD AND OVER)
SCRAPERS, CONCRETE AND CARRY ALL
$39.49
IT
5D
8L
SCREED MAN
$39.88
IT
5D
8L
SHOTCRETE GUNITE
$37.26
u
5D
8L
SLIPFORM PAVERS
$40.34
TT
5D
AL
SPREADER, TOPSIDE OPERATOR - SLAW
$39.88
IT
5D
LL
KNOX
SUBGRADE TRIMMER
$39.88
IT
5D
8L
TOWER BUCKET ELEVATORS
$39.49
1T
5D
BL
TRACTORS, (75 HP S UNDER)
$39.49
TT
ED
BL
TRACTORS, (OVER 75 HP)
$39.88
IT
5D
8L
TRANSFER MATERIAL SERVICE MACHINE
$39.88
1T
SD
8L
TRANSPORTERS, ALL TRACK OR TRUCK TYPE
$40.34
TT
5D
8L
TRENCHING MACHINES
$39.49
IT
5D
9L
TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER ( UNDER 100
$38.49
IT
5D
8L
TON)
lyelm stgf 00830 - 8 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830- 8 '
' (yelm stgl 00830 - 9 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-9
Prevailing
Overtime
Holiday
Note
Classification
Wage
Code
Code
Code
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS (continued)
TRUCK CRANE OILER/DRIVER (100 TON 8
$39.88
IT
SD
U
OVER)
TRUCK MOUNT PORTABLE CONVEYER
$39.88
1T
,5p
8L
WHEEL TRACTORS, FARMALL TYPE
$3716
1T
SO
BL
YO YO PAY DOZER
$39.88
1T
5D
8L
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS- UNDERGROUND SEWER& WATER
(SEE POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS)
$0.00
POWER LINE CLEARANCE TREE TRIMMERS
JOURNEY LEVEL IN CHARGE
$33.06
4A
SA
SPRAY PERSON
$31.34
4A
§A
TREE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
$31.76
4A
5A
TREE TRIMMER
$29.48
4A
5A
TREE TRIMMER GROUNDPERSON
$21.94
4A
5A
REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS
MECHANIC
$26.64
1
RESIDENTIAL BRICK 8 MARBLE MASONS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$27.50
1
RESIDENTIAL CARPENTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$23.30
1
RESIDENTIAL CEMENT MASONS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$14.00
1
RESIDENTIAL DRYWALL TAPERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$18.00
1
RESIDENTIAL ELECTRICIANS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$24.58
1B
rAA
RESIDENTIAL GLAZIERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$26.84
2E
5G
RESIDENTIAL INSULATION APPLICATORS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$18.70
1
RESIDENTIAL LABORERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$9.81
1
RESIDENTIAL PAINTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$11.85
1
RESIDENTIAL PLUMBERS & PIPEFITTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$20.40
1
RESIDENTIAL REFRIGERATION & AIR CONDITIONING MECHANICS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$26.64
1
RESIDENTIAL SHEET METAL WORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP)
$3022
1.1
6L
RESIDENTIAL SOFT FLOOR LAYERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$16.00
1
RESIDENTIAL SPRINKLER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION)
JOURNEY LEVEL
$23.60
1
RESIDENTIAL TERRAZZO/TILE FINISHERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$17.00
1
ROOFERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$24.37
1
SHEET METALWORKERS
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP)
$46.74
11
S
SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (ELECTRICAL)
JOURNEY LEVEL
$18.04
1
' (yelm stgl 00830 - 9 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-9
Classification
Prevailing
Overtime
Holiday
Note
_
Wage
Code
Code
Code
SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (NON - ELECTRICAL)
JOURNEY LEVEL
$14.04
1
SOFT FLOOR LAYERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$30.78
1B
5A
SOLAR CONTROLS FOR WINDOWS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$10.31
1B
50
SPRINKLER FITTERS (FIRE PROTECTION)
JOURNEY LEVEL
$48.19
1B
5C
STAGE RIGGING MECHANICS (NON STRUCTURAL)
JOURNEY LEVEL
$13.23
1
SURVEYORS
CHAIN PERSON
$9.35
1
INSTRUMENT PERSON
$11.40
1
PARTY CHIEF
$13.40
1
TELEPHONE LINE CONSTRUCTION - OUTSIDE
CABLE SPLICER
$28.29
2B
5A
HOLE DIGGER /GROUND PERSON
$15.91
2B
5A
INSTALLER (REPAIRER)
$27.13
213
5A
JOURNEY LEVEL TELEPHONE LINEPERSON
$26.32
2B
5A
SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER I
$28.29
28
5A
SPECIAL APPARATUS INSTALLER II
$27.72
2B
5A
TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (HEAVY)
$28.29
2B
5A
TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (LIGHT)
$26.32
2B
5A
TELEVISION GROUND PERSON
$15.10
2B
5A
TELEVISION UNEPERSON /INSTALLER
$20.11
2B
5A
TELEVISION SYSTEM TECHNICIAN
$23.80
2B
5A
TELEVISION TECHNICIAN
$21.43
2B
5A
TREE TRIMMER
$26.32
2B
5A
TERRAZZO WORKERS & TILE SETTERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$37.03
iH
5A
TILE, MARBLE & TERRAZZO FINISHERS
FINISHER
$30.86
1H
SA
TRAFFIC CONTROL STRIPERS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$31.90
1K
5A
TRUCK DRIVERS
ASPHALT MIX (TO 16 YARDS)
$36.89
IT
5D
8L
ASPHALT MIX (OVER 16 YARDS)
$37.47
1T
5D
8L
DUMP TRUCK
$17.23
1
DUMP TRUCK 8 TRAILER
$17.23
1
OTHER TRUCKS
$37.47
1T
50
8L
TRANSIT MIXER
$23.29
2C
5A
WELL DRILLERS & IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLERS
IRRIGATION PUMP INSTALLER
$17.53
1
OILER
$12.44
1
WELL DRILLER
$17.68
1
[yelm stg]00830 -10 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 -10 1
' STATE OF WASHINGTON
I DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRIES
' PREVAILING WAGE
PO BOX 44540, OLYMPIA, WASHINGTON 98504 -4540
(360) 902 -5335 FAX (360) 902 -5300
I
' N O T I C E''"
' The Washington State Supreme Court ruled in Everett Concrete v Deoartment of
' )_.gbor and Industries that workers employed in the fabrication or manufacture of
Items specifically produced for public works projects are covered under Chapter
39.12 RCW. The law establishes that the applicable prevailing wages which must
be paid to laborers, workers and mechanics are the wages that have been
established for the county in which the actual physical work is performed.
Because the fabrication or manufacture is performed off -site, this may not be the
same county in which the job site is located.
Because contract awarding agencies must include the prevailing wages in their
' contract or bid specifications for all potential bidders, the off -site wages for every
county in the state must be included. This insures that manufacturers located in
other counties will be provided with the wages that apply to them.
The following is a list of work that may include the fabrication or manufacture of
items produced specifically for a public works project. This list is not intended to
' Include standard items that are always available and may be purchased on the
general market. Questions regarding whether the production of a specific item is
covered should be directed to the office of the Industrial Statistician.
Cabinet, Sash, Door and Furniture Making (wood)
' Fabricated Precast Concrete Products (Structural, Architectural and Utility
concrete)
Industrial Engine and Machine Mechanics
' Metal Fabrication (In -shop) - (Ironworkers, Boilermakers)
Modular Buildings (Including customized prefabricated housing)
Sheet Metal Work (Air ducts, ventilation systems, except round flex hose)
Sign Making and Installation (Electrical and non - electrical)
J]
lyeim stg7 00830 - 11 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-11
Shro of Washington
Department of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage
P.O. Box "540
Olympia, Washington 9850"540
Tel"hom(380) 902 -5336 FAX(360)902 -5300
CABINET MAKERS (IN SHOP) - Effective: 9/112004
Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On
public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of
overtime calculation requirements is provided by clicking on the benefit code.
[yelm stg] 00630 - 12 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830- 12 1
Prevailing
Overtime Holiday Note
Classification
Wage
Code Code Code
Counties Covered:
ADAMS, ASOTIN, BENTON, COLUMBIA, DOUGLAS, FERRY, FRANKLIN, GARFIELD, GRANT,
LINCOLN, OKANOGAN, PEND OREILLE, STEVENS, WALLA WALLA AND WHITMAN
JOURNEY LEVEL
$845
1
Counties Covered:
CHELAN
JOURNEY LEVEL
$11.95
1
Counties Covered:
CLALLAM
JOURNEY LEVEL
$14.67
1
Counties Covered:
CLARK
JOURNEY LEVEL
$23.00
1
Counties Covered:
COWLITZ
JOURNEY LEVEL
$14.84
1
Counties Covered:
GRAYS HARBOR,
ISLAND, KLICKITAT, PACIFIC, SKAMANIA AND WAHKWKUM
JOURNEY LEVEL
$13.12
1
Counties Covered:
JEFFERSON
JOURNEY LEVEL
$14.10
1
Counties Covered:
KING
JOURNEY LEVEL
$16.67
1
Counties Covered:
KITSAP
JOURNEY LEVEL
$12.53
1
Counties Covered:
KITTITAS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$14.26
1
Counties Covered:
LEWIS
JOURNEY LEVEL
$12.46
1
Counties Covered:
MASON
JOURNEY LEVEL
$11.24
1
[yelm stg] 00630 - 12 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830- 12 1
I
'
Classification
Prevailing
Overtime
Holiday Note
_
Waee
Code
Code Code
Counties Covered:
'
PIERCE
JOURNEY LEVEL
$24.76
1
Counties Covered:
SAN JUAN
JOURNEY LEVEL
$19.77
1
Counties Covered:
'
SKAGIT
JOURNEY LEVEL
$26.53
1B
5C
Counties Covered:
SNOHOMISH
JOURNEY LEVEL
$2245
2M
5C
Counties Covered:
SPOKANE
JOURNEY LEVEL
$14.75
1
Counties Covered:
THURSTON
JOURNEY LEVEL
$13.02
1
'
Counties Covered:
WHATCOM
JOURNEY LEVEL
$14.38
1
'
Counties Covered:
YAKIMA
JOURNEY LEVEL
$19.24
1
1
1
1
' lyeim stg1 00830 -13 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 -13
State of Washington
Department of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage
P.O. Box "500
Olympia, Washington 99504-0540
Telephone (360) 902 -5335 FAX (360) 902 -5300
FABRICATED PRECAST CONCRETE PRODUCTS - Effective: 9/112004
Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the houdy wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On
public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of
overtime calculation requirements is provided by clicking on the benefit code.
Classification Prevailing Overtime Holiday Note
Wage Code Code Code
Counties Covered:
ADAMS, ASOTIN, BENTON, COLUMBIA, DOUGLAS, FERRY, GARFIELD, GRANT, LINCOLN, OKANOGAN,
PEND OREILLE, STEVENS, WALLA WALLA AND WHITMAN
ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $8.96 1
Counties Covered:
CHELAN, KITTITAS, KLICKITAT AND SKAMANIA
ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $6.61 1
Counties Covered:
CLALLAM, CLARK, COWLITZ, GRAYS HARBOR, ISLAND, JEFFERSON, KITSAP, LEWIS, MASON, PACIFIC,
SAN JUAN, SKAGIT, SNOHOMISH, THURSTON AND WAHKIAKUM
ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $13.50 1
Counties Covered:
FRANKLIN
ALL CLASSIFICATIONS $11.50 1
Counties Covered:
KING
ALL CLASSIFICATIONS
$11.60
2K 6S
Counties Covered:
PIERCE
ALL CLASSIFICATIONS
$918
1
Counties Covered:
SPOKANE
ALL CLASSIFICATIONS
$20.23
1
Counties Covered:
WHATCOM
ALL CLASSIFICATIONS
$13.67
1
Counties Covered:
YAKIMA
CRAFTSMAN
$8.65
1
LABORER
$7.16
1
(yelm stg] 00830 - 14 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830- 14 1
State of Washington
Department of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage
P.O. Box 44540
Olympia, Washington 9850"540
Telephone (360) 902 -5335 FAX (360) 9(12 -5300
INDUSTRIAL ENGINE AND MACHINE MECHANICS - Effective: 9/112004
Washington Stale Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On
public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of
overtime calculation requirements is provided by clicking on the benefit code.
Claulfication Prevailing Overtime Holiday Note
Wage Code Code Code
Counties Covered:
ADAMS, ASOTIN, BENTON, CHELAN, CLALLAM, CLARK, COLUMBIA, COWLITZ, DOUGLAS, FERRY,
FRANKLIN, GARFIELD, GRANT, GRAYS HARBOR, ISLAND, JEFFERSON, KING, KITSAP, KITTITAS,
KLICKITAT, LEWIS, LINCOLN, MASON, OKANOGAN, PACIFIC, PEND OREILLE, PIERCE, SAN JUAN,
SKAGIT, SKAMANIA, SNOHOMISH, SPOKANE, STEVENS, THURSTON, WAHKIAKUM, WALLA
WALLA, WHATCOM, WHITMAN AND YAKIMA
MECHANIC $15.65 1
' Iyelm stgl 00830 - 15 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-15
State of Washington
Department of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage
P.O. Box 44540
Olympia, Washington 985044540
Telephone (360) 902 -5335 FAX(360)902 -5300
METAL FABRICATION (IN SHOP) - Effective: 9/1/2004
Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On
public works projects, workers wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of
overtime calculation requirements is provided by clicking on the benefit code.
Classification
Prevalling
Overtime
Holiday Note
Wage
Code
Code Code
Counties Covered:
ADAMS, ASOTIN, COLUMBIA, DOUGLAS, FERRY, FRANKLIN,
GARFIELD,
KITTITAS, LINCOLN,
OKANOGAN, PEND OREILLE, STEVENS, WALLA
WALLA AND
WHITMAN
FITTERANELDER
$12.76
1
LABORER
$8.13
1
MACHINE OPERATOR
$12.66
1
PAINTER
$10.20
1
Counties Covered:
BENTON
MACHINE OPERATOR
$10.53
1
PAINTER
$9.76
1
WELDER
$16.70
1
Counties Covered:
CHELAN
FITTER
$15.04
1
LABORER
$8.77
1
MACHINE OPERATOR
$9.71
1
PAINTER
$9.93
1
WELDER
$12.24
1
Counties Covered:
CLALLAM, GRAYS HARBOR,
ISLAND, JEFFERSON, LEWIS,
MASON, PACIFIC, SAN JUAN AND
SKAGIT
FITTERNJELDER
$15.16
1
LABORER
$11.13
1
MACHINE OPERATOR
$10.66
1
PAINTER
$11.41
1
Counties Covered:
CLARK
FITTER
$24.58
11
6B
LABORER
$18.08
U
68
LAYEROUT
$24.96
1J
6B
MACHINE OPERATOR
$18.63
1J
6B
PAINTER
$21.35
1.J
613
WELDER
$24.02
U
613
[yelm stg] 00830 - 16 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00630- 16 1
Classification
Prevailing
Overtime
Holiday Nob
Wage
Code
Code Code
Counties Covered:
COWLITZ
FITTER
$21.99
1B
6V
LABORER
$15.87
1B
6V
MACHINE OPERATOR
$21.99
U
6V
WELDER
$21.99
18
6V
Counties Covered:
GRANT
FITTERANELDER
$10.79
1
PAINTER
$7.45
1
Counties Covered:
KING
FITTER
$15.86
1
LABORER
$9.78
1
MACHINE OPERATOR
$13.04
1
PAINTER
$11.10
1
WELDER
$15.48
1
Counties Covered:
KITSAP
FITTER
$26.96
1
LABORER
$7.16
1
MACHINE OPERATOR
$13.83
1
WELDER
$13.83
1
Counties Covered:
KLICKITAT, SKARIANIA AND WANKIAKUM
FITTER/WELDER
$16.99
1
LABORER
$10.44
1
MACHINE OPERATOR
$17.21
1
PAINTER
$1703
1
Counties Covered:
PIERCE
FITTER
$1525
1
LABORER
$9.25
1
MACHINE OPERATOR
$13.98
1
WELDER
$13.98
1
Counties Covered:
SNOHOMISH
FITTERNVELDER
$15.38
1
LABORER
$9.79
1
MACHINE OPERATOR
$8.84
1
PAINTER
$9.98
1
Counties Covered:
SPOKANE
FITTER
$12.59
1
LABORER
$7.98
1
MACHINE OPERATOR
$13.26
1
PAINTER
$10.27
1
WELDER
$10.80
1
Iyeim sig1 00830 -17 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 -17
Classification
Prevailing
Overtime
Holiday Note
Wage
Code
Code Code
Counties Covered:
THURSTON
FITTER
$23.02
IR
6T
LABORER
$14.88
1R
6T
LAYEROUT
$25.07
IR
6T
MACHINE OPERATOR
$18.74
1R
6T
WELDER
$20.99
1R
6T
Counties Covered:
WHATCOM
FITTERANELDER
$13.81
1
LABORER
$9.00
1
MACHINE OPERATOR
$13.81
1
Counties Covered:
YAKIMA
FITTER
$12.00
1
LABORER
$10.31
1
MACHINE OPERATOR
$11.32
1
PAINTER
$12.00
1
WELDER
$11.32
1
Iyeim sig1 00830 -18 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 -18 1
State of Washington
Department of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage
P.O. So. 44560
Olympia, Washington 985044560
Telephone (360) 9025335 FAX (360) 902 -5300
MODULAR BUILDINGS - Effective: 9/1/2004
Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On
public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of
overtime calculation requirements is provided by clicking on the benefit code.
Classification
Prevailing
Overtime Holiday Note
Wage
Code Code Code
Counties Covered:
CHELAN, DOUGLAS, KITTITAS AND
YAKIMA
JOURNEY LEVEL
$14.11
1
Counties Covered:
GRAYS
HARBOR, LEWIS, MASON, PACIFIC AND THURSTON
CABINET ASSEMBLY
$9.98
1
ELECTRICIAN
$9.98
1
EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
$9.98
1
PLUMBER
$9.98
1
PRODUCTION WORKER
$9.75
1
TOOL MAINTENANCE
$9.98
1
UTILITY PERSON
$9.98
1
WELDER
$9.98
1
Counties Covered'
KING AND KITSAP
CABINET ASSEMBLY
$11.56
1
ELECTRICIAN
$11.56
1
EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE
$11.56
1
PLUMBER
$11.56
1
PRODUCTION WORKER
$9.26
1
TOOL MAINTENANCE
$11.56
1 '
UTILITY PERSON
$11.56
1
WELDER
$11.56
1
Counties Covered:
SNOHOMISH
JOURNEY LEVEL
$9.00
1.
[yelm stg] 00830 - 19 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-19
State of Washington
Department of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage
P.O. eox 44540
Olympia, Washington 98504-4540
Telephone (360) 902 -5335 FAX(360)902 -5300
SHEET METAL WORKERS - Effective: 9/1/2004
Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On
public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of
overtime calculation requirements is provided by clicking an the benefit code.
Classification Prevailing Overtime Holiday Note
Wage Code Code Code
Counties Covered:
ADAMS, ASOTIN, CHELAN, DOUGLAS, FERRY, GRANT, LINCOLN, PEND OREILLE, SPOKANE,
STEVENS AND WHITMAN
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $33.67 1B 5A
Counties Covered:
BENTON, COLUMBIA, FRANKLIN, GARFIELD, KITTITAS, WALLA WALLA AND YAKIMA
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $37.12 1B 5A
Counties Covered:
CLALLAM, COWLITZ, GRAYS HARBOR, KING, KITSAP, MASON, PACIFIC, PIERCE, SNOHOMISH,
THURSTON AND WAHKIAKUM
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $46.74 iJ 6L
Counties Covered:
CLARK AND SKAMANIA
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $42.38 1B 5A
Counties Covered:
ISLAND
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $23.11 1
Counties Covered:
JEFFERSON
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $33.53 1
Counties Covered:
KLICKITAT
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $23.29 1
Counties Covered:
LEWIS
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $23.81 1
Counties Covered:
OKANOGAN
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $37.53 1
Counties Covered:
SAN JUAN, SKAGIT AND WHATCOM
JOURNEY LEVEL (FIELD OR SHOP) $39.65 1E 58
(yelm stgl 00830 - 20 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-20 1
State of Washington
Department of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage
P.O. Box 44540
Olympia, Washington 98504-4540
Telephone (360) 9025335 FAX (360) 902 -5300
SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (ELECTRICAL) - Effective: 9/1/2004
Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On
public works projects, workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of
overtime calculation requirements is provided by clicking on the benefit code.
Classification
Prevailing
Overtime Holiday Note
Wage
Code Code Code
Counties Covered:
ADAMS,
FERRY, LINCOLN, PEND OREILLE, SPOKANE,
STEVENS AND WHITMAN
JOURNEY LEVEL
$13.91
1
Counties Covered:
CHELAN, DOUGLAS, GRANT AND OKANOGAN
JOURNEY LEVEL
$39.65
1E 5B
Counties Covered:
CLALLAM AND JEFFERSON
JOURNEY LEVEL
$19.29
1
Counties Covered:
CLARK
JOURNEY LEVEL
$19.27
1
Counties Covered:
COWLITZ AND WAHKIAKUM
JOURNEY LEVEL
$16.88
1
Counties Covered:
GRAYS HARBOR, LEWIS, MASON, PACIFIC AND THURSTON
JOURNEY LEVEL
$18.04
1
Counties Covered:
ISLAND, SKAGIT AND WHATCOM
JOURNEY LEVEL
$16.03
1
Counties Covered:
KING
SIGN INSTALLER
$23.36
1
SIGN MAKER
$16.84
1
Counties Covered:
KITSAP
JOURNEY LEVEL
$20.58
1
Counties Covered;
KLICKITAT AND SKAMANIA
JOURNEY LEVEL
$16.83
1
Counties Covered:
PIERCE AND SNOHOMISH
JOURNEY LEVEL
$26.17
1
Countlea Covered:
SANJUAN
JOURNEY LEVEL
$9.75
1R
[yelm stg] 00830 - 21 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-21
Stale of Washington
Department of Labor and Industries
Prevailing Wage
P.O. Bax 44540
Olympia, Washington 985044540
Telephone (360) 902-5335 FAX (360) 902 -5300
SIGN MAKERS & INSTALLERS (NON - ELECTRICAL) - Effective: 9/112004
Washington State Prevailing Wage Rates for Public Works Contracts
The PREVAILING WAGES listed here include both the hourly wage rate and the hourly rate of fringe benefits. On
public works projects. workers' wage and benefit rates must add to not less than this total. A brief description of
overtime calculation requirements is provided by clicking on the benefit code.
lyelm stg)00830 -22 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 -22 1
Prevailing Overtime Holiday Note
Classlficadon
Wage Code Code Code
Counties Covered:
ADAMS,
FERRY, LINCOLN, PEND OREILLE, STEVENS AND WHITMAN
JOURNEYLEVEL
$13.91 1
Counties Covered:
ASOTIN, BENTON, COLUMBIA, FRANKLIN, GARFIELD, GRANT, KITTITAS, WALLA WALLA AND
YAKIMA
JOURNEYLEVEL
$14.65 1
Counties Covered:
CHELAN, DOUGLAS AND OKANOGAN
JOURNEY LEVEL
$16.14 1
Counties Covered:
CLALLAM AND JEFFERSON
JOURNEY LEVEL
$12.15 1
Counties Covered:
CLARK
JOURNEY LEVEL
$31.23 1M 5D
Counties Covered:
COWLITZ AND WAHKIAKUM
JOURNEY LEVEL
$1674 1
Counties Covered:
GRAYS HARBOR, MASON AND PACIFIC
JOURNEY LEVEL
$18.04 1
Counties Covered:
ISLAND AND WHATCOM
JOURNEY LEVEL
$21 1
Counties Covered:
KING
SIGN INSTALLER
$17.31 1
SIGN MAKER
$15.61 1
Counties Covered:
KITSAP
JOURNEY LEVEL
$9.27 1
Counties Covered:
KLICKITAT AND SKAMANIA
JOURNEY LEVEL
$16.63 1
Counties Covered:
LEWIS, SKAGIT AND SNOHOMISH
JOURNEY LEVEL
532.61 IN 5D
lyelm stg)00830 -22 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 -22 1
I
'
Classification
Prevailing
Overtime Holiday Note
Wage
Code Code Code
'
Counties Covered:
PIERCE
JOURNEY LEVEL
$15.31
1
Counties Covered:
'
SANJUAN
JOURNEY LEVEL
$9.75
1
Counties Covered:
'
SPOKANE
JOURNEY LEVEL
$8.00
1
Counties Covered:
THURSTON
'
JOURNEY LEVEL
$14.04
1
1
1
1
1
1
t[yelm stg7 00830 - 23 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-23
BENEFIT CODE KEY - EFFECTIVE 09 -01 -04
..................... ......................................................... ...............................
OVERTIME CODES
OVERTIME CALCULATIONS ARE BASED ON THE HOURLY RATE ACTUALLY PAID TO THE WORKER. ON
PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS, THE HOURLY RATE MUST BE NOT LESS THAN THE PREVAILING RATE OF WAGE
MINUS THE HOURLY RATE OF THE COST OF FRINGE BENEFITS ACTUALLY PROVIDED FOR THE WORKER.
ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE
PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TAMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
A ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL ALSO BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE,
HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
B. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TAMES THE HOURLY RATE
OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE.
C ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
D. THE FOIST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAYS OF A FIVE - EIGHT HOUR WORK WEEK AND THE FIRST EIGHT
(8) HOURS WORKED ON A FIFTH CALENDAR DAY, EXCLUDING SUNDAY, M A FOUR - TEN HOUR
SCHEDULE, SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TAMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS
WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY ON SATURDAY; ALL HOURS WORKED M EXCESS OF
EIGHT (8) HOURS IN A FIFTH CALENDAR WEEKDAY OF A FOUR - TEN HOUR SCHEDULE; ALL HOURS
WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN (10) HOURS PER DAY MONDAY THROUGH FRIDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED
ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAD) AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
E. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF 10 PER DAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
THE FOIST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TAMES THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS
WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
F. THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TAMES THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS
WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAD) AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT THREE TIMES THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE.
G. THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND THE FIRST TEN (10) HOURS WORKED ON A
FFTTJ CALENDAR WEEKDAY IN A FOUR - TEN HOUR SCHEDULE, SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF
TAMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF TEN (10) HOURS PER DAY
MONDAY THROUGH SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID
AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
H. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT
WEATHER CONDITIONS OR EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE
HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE
THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
1. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE. WORK PERFORMED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. WORK
PERFORMED ON A HOLIDAY SHALL BE PAID ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THEIR HOURLY RATE FOR
ACTUAL HOURS WORKED PLUS EIGHT (8) HOURS OF STRAIGHT TIME FOR THE HOLIDAY.
J. THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON SATURDAY, AND ALL HOURS
WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
K. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAD) AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TOMES THE
HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORLD ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE.
L. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT THANKSGIVING DAY AND
CHRISTMAS DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TAMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL
HOURS WORKED ON THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE
HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
M. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS IF WORK IS LOST DUE TO INCLEMENT
WEATHER CONDITIONS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL
HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
N. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS) SHALL. BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF
TAMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID
AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
P. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS (EXCEPT MAKEUP DAYS) AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE
AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID
AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
Q. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TAMES THE HOURLY RATE
OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT CHRISTMAS DAY) SHALL BE PAID
AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON CHRISTMAS DAY SHALL BE PAID AT
TWO AND ONEHALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
(yelm stg]00830 -24 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 -24 1
B=rit Code Key - 2
R. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE.
T. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, EXCEPT MAKE -UP DAYS, SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF
TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED AFTER 6:OOPM SATURDAY TO 6:OOAM MONDAY
AND ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
U. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE
OF WAGE ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT
TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON LABOR DAY SHALL BE PAID AT
THREE TAMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
W. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS (EXCEPT MAKE -UP DAYS) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE
AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID
AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE
PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TATF_S THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE,
A. THE FIRST SIX (6) HOURS ON SATURDAY SHALL BE PAN AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED M EXCESS OF SIX (6) HOURS ON SATURDAY AND ALL HOURS
WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
B. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE.
C. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TAMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
D. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TNES THE
HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT
STRAIGHT TIME M ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS
ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF T04ES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
E. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS OR HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAD) AT ONE AND
ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS OR ON LABOR DAY
SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE,
F. THE FIRST EIGHT (8) HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT THE STRAIGHT HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE IN ADDD70N TO THE HOLIDAY PAY. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS ON
HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
G. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAY SHALL BE PAN AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL
HOURS WORKED ON PAN HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE
OF WAGE INCLUDING HOLIDAY PAY,
H. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE
OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF
WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY
RATE OF WAGE M ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY.
1. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (EXCEPT LABOR DAY) SHALL BE PAID AT ONE AND
ONE-HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND ON LABOR DAY
SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
J. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS SHALL BE PAN AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL
HOURS WORKED ON PAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAN AT TWO AND ONE -HALF TIMES THE HOURLY RATE
OF WAGE, INCLUDING THE HOLIDAY PAY. ALL HOURS WORKED ON UNPAID HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT
TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
K. ALL HOURS WORKED ON HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT TWO TIMES THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE IN
ADDITION TO THE HOLIDAY PAY.
M. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAN AT DOUBLE THE
HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
0. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAN AT ONE AND ON &HALF TIMES THE
HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
A. ALL HOURS WORKED IN EXCESS OF EIGHT (8) HOURS PER DAY OR FORTY (40) HOURS PER WEEK SHALL BE
PAN AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE. ALL HOURS WORKED ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND
HOLIDAYS SHALL BE PAID AT DOUBLE THE HOURLY RATE OF WAGE.
HOLIDAY CODES
5. A. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,
FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7).
B. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,
FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
C. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY,
THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
D. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,
THE FRIDAY AND SATURDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
lyeim etg) 00830 - 25 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-25
Benefit Code Key - 3
E. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEARS DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY,
PRESIDENIUL ELECTION DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND
CHRISTMAS DAY (9).
G. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAU. DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,
THE LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7).
H. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY
AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS (6).
1. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEARS DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,
AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6).
N. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY,
VETERANS' DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY
(9).
O. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHINGTON'S BIRTHDAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY,
THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6).
P. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,
FRIDAY AND SATURDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS, AND CHRISTMAS
DAY (9).
Q. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING
DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (6).
R PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING
DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, ONE -HALF DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY.
(7112).
S. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR
DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7).
T. PAID HOLIDAYS: SEVEN (7) PAID HOLIDAYS.
V. PAID HOLIDAYS: SIX (6) PAID HOLIDAYS.
W. PAID HOLIDAYS: NINE (9) PAID HOLIDAYS.
X. HOLIDAYS: AFTER 320 HOURS - NEW YEAR'S DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY. AFTER 2080
HOURS - NEW YEAR'S DAY, WASHHNGTONS BIRTHDAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR
DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY AND A FLOATING HOLIDAY (8).
Y. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, PRESIDENTIAL
ELECTION DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY FOLLOWING THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS
DAY (8).
Z. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, VETERANS DAY,
THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
A. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR
DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
B. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S EVE DAY, NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR
DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS EVE DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY. (9)
C HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY,
THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORK DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS
DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9).
D. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR
DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, TIM DAY BEFORE
OR THIN DAY AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY (9).
H. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MARTIN LITIVER KING IR DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY,
LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY M.
1. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEARS DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING
DAY, FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (7).
L. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORLU. DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY,
THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORKING DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY, AND
CHRISTMAS DAY. (8)
Q. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, VETERAN'S DAY
THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY AND CHRISTMAS DAY. UNPAID HOLIDAY;
PRESIDENTS' DAY.
S. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING
DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS EVE DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (8).
T. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS' DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR
DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE LAST WORKING DAY BEFORE
CHRISTMAS DAY, AND CHRISTMAS DAY (9).
U. HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORLLL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY,
LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, THE FRIDAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, THE DAY BEFORE
CHRISTMAS DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY (9).
V. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING
DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS EVE DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, EMPLOYEES BIRTHDAY,
AND ONE DAY OF THIN EMPLOYEE'S CHOICE 00).
[yelm stg)00830 -26 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830 -26 1
Beaefil Cade Key - N
W. PAD) HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS DAY, MEMORIAL DAY,
INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING DAY, CHRISTMAS
DAY, DAY BEFORE CHRISTMAS DAY (10).
X. PAID HOLIDAYS: NEW YEAR'S DAY, DAY BEFORE OR AFTER NEW YEAR'S DAY, PRESIDENTS DAY,
MEMORIAL DAY, INDEPENDENCE DAY, LABOR DAY, THANKSGIVING DAY, DAY AFTER THANKSGIVING
DAY, CHRISTMAS DAY, DAY BEFORE OR AFTER CHRISTMAS DAY, EMPLOYEE'S BIRTHDAY (11).
NOTE CODES
A. THE STANDBY RATE OF PAY FOR DIVERS SHALL BE ONE -HALF TIMES THE DIVERS RATE OF PAY. IN
ADDITION TO THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO
DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET OR MORE:
OVER 50 TO I - SI.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET
OVER 1W TO 175'. $2.25 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET
OVER 175' TO 250'- $5.50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 175 FEET
OVER 250' - DIVERS MAY NAME THEIR OWN PRICE, PROVIDED IT IS NO LESS THAN THE SCALE LISTED
FOR 250 FEET
C. THE STANDBY RATE OF PAY FOR DIVERS SHALL BE ON&HALF TIMES THE DIVERS RATE OF PAY. IN
ADDITION TO THE HOURLY WAGE AND FRINGE BENEFITS, THE FOLLOWING DEPTH PREMIUMS APPLY TO
DEPTHS OF FIFTY FEET OR MORE:
OVER 50' TO I - $1.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 50 FEET
OVER 100' TO 150'- $1.50 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 100 FEET
OVER 150' TO 200'- $2.00 PER FOOT FOR EACH FOOT OVER 150 FEET
OVER 200'- DIVERS MAY NAME THEIR OWN PRICE
D. WORKERS WORKING WITH SUPPLIED AIR ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE AN ADDITIONAL $1.00 PER
HOUR.
L. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS - LEVEL A:
50.75, LEVEL B: 50.50, AND LEVEL C: $0.25.
M. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS: LEVELS A 8
B: $1.00, LEVELS C k D: $0.50.
N. WORKERS ON HAZMAT PROJECTS RECEIVE ADDITIONAL HOURLY PREMIUMS AS FOLLOWS - LEVEL A:
$1.00, LEVEL B: $0.75, LEVEL C: $0.50, AND LEVEL D: 50.25.
END OF SECTION 00830
' jyeim stgj 00830 - 27 PREVAILING WAGE RATES 00830-27
I
1
SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF THE WORK/SPECIAL CONDITIONS
'
1
PART 1-GENERAL
I"I. slgl
2
SUMMARY OF THE WORK/SPECIAL CONDITIONS
'
3
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
6
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
'7
8
9
10
BUILDING CODES
'
11
12
In the past the Uniform Building Code (UBC) was used in the design of all projects up to the beginning of
13
2004. In January 2004, the State of Washington adopted the new International Building Code (IBC) which
will now be used for all future projects within this state. In the event that a reference to the UBC is found within
'14
15
this Project Manual, please disregard.
16
17
18
SUMMARY
19
20
The Work consists of construction of a wood storage building approximately 206' x 60'.
'21
22
The Work will be constructed under a single prime contract.
23
24
At the completion of the proiect the Contractor will be responsible for having the existing site amenities, i.e.
'25
grass areas, concretewalks, curbing, asphaltpaving, etc., in condition equal to or betterthan original condition
26
at the beginning of project. Burden of proof of "original condition" is the responsibility of the Contractor. This
27
could be in the form of photographs or video tape. A copy of these will be turned over to the Architect prior
to the beginning of construction. If this does not happen then the Architect's decision as to "original condition"
'28
29
will govern.
30
31
32
RELATED SECTIONS
33
34
Section 01330 "Submittal Procedure' for CAD Drawing Availability.
35
36
37
TIME OF COMPLETION
38
39
The work of this contract shall be commenced on the date of written notice to proceed or immediately after
40
the Agreement is signed whichever is earlier, and shall be substantially completed on or before March 31,
41
2005, with final completion on or before 30 days thereafter.
'
42
43
44
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
45
46
Foreach calendarday afterthe sate fixed for substantial completion, that the work remains uncompleted, the
47
Contractor shall pay the Owner the sum of $50.00 per day as fixed and agreed liquidated damages, but not
48
as a penalty . Should an extension of time be granted the Contractor, he shall indemnify and save harmless
'
49
50
the Owner for any loss to any other contractor caused by such extension of time.
1
'
I"I. slgl
01010 -1
SUMMARY OF THE WORK/SPECIAL CONDITIONS
01010 -1
Separate Contract: The Owner, under separate contract, will be removing and /or installing new materials and
equipment at the site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.
Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under those contracts may be carried out smoothly,
without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
General: During the construction period the Contractor shall have full use of the premises for construction
operations, including use of the site as noted in the following paragraphs. The Contractors use of the
premises also maybe limited by the Owners right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions
of the Project.
Use of the Site Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within
contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated.
Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available
to the Owner, the Owners employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas
for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for
storage of materials and equipment on -site.
Full Owner Occupancy: The Owner will occupy the adjacent site and existing building during the entire
construction period. Cooperate with the Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and
facilitate owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with the Owners operations.
Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in
completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere
with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute
acceptance of the total Work.
Upon occupancy, the Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied
portions of the building.
Certificate of Occupancy: Shall be furnished to Architect for transmittal to Owner before application for final
payment and prior to Owners occupancy. (See Div. 1 Section, Project Closeout). Shall be issued by duly
authorized building officials stating that the work complies with provisions of the applicable building code.
Contractor is responsible to contact and coordinate with building officials to review the work for Certificate of
Occupancy approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3- EXECUTION
END OF SECTION 01010
[yeim stg] 01010-2 SUMMARY OF THE WORK/SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01010-2 '
SECTION 01030 - ALTERNATES
PART 1— GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates.
DEFINITIONS
Definifion: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner
decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed, or in the
products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to
incorporate the Alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum,
PROCEDURES
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that
Work into the Project.
Include as part of each aftemate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items
incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate.
Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the
status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later
consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other Work of this Contract.
Schedule : A "Schedule of Alternates' is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced
in the Schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the Work described under each
alternate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
' lyeim stg7 01030-1 ALTERNATES 01030-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
Ahemate Bids
General: Each bidder shall state in his bid, in the spaces provided therefor in the applicable proposal form,
his proposal sums for adding to, or deducting from the Base Bid work, for the applicable contract. Failure to
submit proposals on all alternates described may be cause for rejecting the bidder's entire proposal.
Alternate Bid A -1 (Sectional Overhead Garage Doors): Provide doors in locations as indicated on drawings.
Alternate Bid A -2 (Portion of Building): Provide all building components as described on drawings and in
specifications for the building between Grid lines "L" and "Q ".
Base Bid: Provide concrete floor slab, concrete footings, rough -in plumbing, and T1 -11 siding on wall
at Grid line "L ". Attach siding with galvanized screws as shown on drawings.
END OF SECTION 01030
[,im srgl 01030-2
ALTERNATES
01030-2 1
SECTION 01095- REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS
PART) - GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
DEFINITIONS
General: Basic contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract
"ArchitectlOwner ": The word "Architect," as used herein, shall mean "Erickson McGovern, P.LLc ", 120 South
131st Street, Tacoma, Washington 98444, Tel: 253 -531 -0206, Fax: 253 - 531 -9197. The word "Owner" as
used herein shall mean "Yelm Community Schools District No. 2."
"He. Him, His, Himself, Man ": When these words or any otherterm referring to the masculine gender is used
in this specification it shall be understood to include the equivalent feminine gender term, i.e. "she," "her,"
"herself," "woman ".
"Indicated': The term "indicated" refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the Drawings, or
other paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the Contract Documents.
Terms such as "shown," "noted;' "scheduled," and "specified" are used to help the reader locate the
reference. Location is not limited.
"Directed ": Terms such as " directed, '. requested," "authorized; "selected," "approved," "required," and
"permitted" mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases.
"Approved ": The term "approved," when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's
submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the
Conditions of the Contract.
"Or Approved" (For Substitutions): The term "or approved" as used in reference to the required approval of
"substitute" manufacturers or products which are not listed in their respective specification section under
PART 2— PRODUCTS, Manufacturers, shall submitto the Architect for approval a minimum of ten days prior
to bid date. For further detail of substitutions prior to bids see A.I.A. Document A701, INSTRUCTIONS TO
BIDDERS, Paragraphs 3.3, f, 3.3.2, and 3.3.3. Copies of this A.I.A. Document A701 may be examined at the
office of the Architect or may be purchased directly from the American Institute of Architects, 1201 Pacific
Avenue, Fountain Court Level, Suite C -4, Tacoma, WA 98402. Telephone: (253) 627 -4006.
After the contract is signed, approval of Substitutions will be made only in exceptional cases where the
Contractor submits evidence satisfactory to the Architect that, through no fault of his own, specified or
otherwise approved items cannot be obtained in time to avoid delay to the work. In any case, substitutions
are subject to the approval of the Architect.
"Regulations ": The term "regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by
authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry
that control performance of the Work.
"Furnish ": The term "furnish" means supply and deliver to the Project Site, ready for unloading, unpacking,
assembly, installation, and similar operations.
lyeim stgl 01095-1 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-1
"Install ": The term "install" describes operations at the Project Site including the actual unloading, unpacking,
assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning,
and similar operations.
"Provide ": The term "provide" means to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
"Installer' An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee,
subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation,
erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they
are engaged to perform.
The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having a minimum of 5 previous
projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements
indicated, and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Thisrequirement
shall prevail unless noted otherwise within individual sections.
Trades: Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be
performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as
"carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of
the corresponding generic name.
"Pro act Site" is the space available to the Contractor for performing construction activities, either exclusively
or in conjunction, with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project Site is
shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project
is to be built.
"Testing Agencies ": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or
tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those
inspections or tests.
SUBMITTALS
Permits. Licenses. and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,
judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established in conjunction with compliance with
standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work.
Shoo drawings: All submittals received by the Architect from the Contractor shall be numbered sequentially
for the purpose of tracking these items throughout the construction process.
Zero Percent Asbestos: The Contractor shall provide a letter certifying zero percent asbestos as described
under MISCELLANEOUS STANDARDS of this section. This shall be submitted as a part of the
"Miscellaneous Record Submittals" required in Section 01700 - Project Closeout.
SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION
Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on CSI's 16-
Division format and MasterFormat's numbering system.
Arrangement of Sections and Divisions of these Specifications into trade headings conforms roughly
to customary subcontracting practices and may not be consecutively numbered. They are used for
convenience only. The Architect is not bound to define the limits of any subcontractor, and will not
enter into disputes between the Contractor and his employees, including subcontractors.
lyelm stg] 01095-2 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-2
I
1
1
Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions regarding the style of language and the
2
intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances.
3
These conventions are explained as follows:
4
5
Divisions and Sections included are listed in the "Table of Contents' together with the number of
6
pages in each Division. Each bidder shall be responsible for checking his copy of the Project Manual
7
with the Table of Contents, prior to bidding, to be sure that it is complete.
8
9
Abbreviated Language Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is
'
10
11
abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not
stated, shall be interpolated as the sense requires. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and
12
plural words interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents
13
indicates.
14
15
Streamlined Languages The Specifications generally use the imperative mood and streamlined
16
language. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor.
17
18
At certain locations in the Text, subjective language is used for clarity to describe responsibilities that
must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor or by others when so noted.
19
20
The words "shall be" are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.
21
'
22
23
MISCELLANEOUS STANDARDS
24
25
Conflicts: In the case of conflict between the following paragraphs and the "A.I.A. General Conditions' and
26
the "Supplementary Conditions," the following paragraphs of the "Reference Standards and Definitions" shall
27
govern ,
'28
29
Drua Free, Tobacco Free and Smoke Free Workplace: The contractor shall comply with all applicable drug
30
free workplace and smoke free workplace requirements. All use of tobacco products on District property is
31
prohibited by RCW 28A.210.310,
32
33
This policy is applicable to all District employees, students, District volunteers, outside contractors and the
34
general public.
'35
36
Rules and Regulations: The General Contractor, in entering into a contract for his work agrees that he shall
37
be solely responsible for conformance, by those in his employ and by his subcontractor and their employees
38
and by others directly or indirectly connected with the work under his contract, with the State of Washington
39
Department of Labor and Industries, Division of Safety "General Safety Standards" and "Safety Standards for
40
Construction Work' for ladders, scaffolding, staging, runways, hoists and construction elevators, temporary
41
lighting and temporary power outlets and their wiring and for use of all vehicles and construction processes
42
and equipment, and other safety rules and regulations required therein including protection of workmen in
43
excavations.
44
45
Permits, Fees, Licenses, Inspections, Utility Charges. and Connection Fees: The Owner will pay for all fees
'46
and costs for the aforementioned items as necessary for the completion of this contract.
47
48
See Section 00800, Supplementary Conditions, Article 3.7, for listing of fees and permits to be paid
'
49
50
by Owner.
51
Schedule of Values: The General Contractor shall prepare a Schedule of Values as listed in the
52
Supplementary Conditions, Paragraph 9.2, and submit to the Architect within 30 days after date of Letter of
53
Intent or 7 days prior to submittal of initial Application for Payment, whichever is the least time of the two.
'
54
55
See Supplementary Conditions, Article 9, Paragraph 9.2.1.
'
56
57
List of Subcontractors and Suppliers: See Supplementary Conditions, Article 5, Paragraph 5.2.1.
'
beim n91 01095-3 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-3
Number of Specified Items Required: Wherever in these Specifications an article, device, or piece of
equipment is referred to in the singular number, such reference shall include as many such articles as are
shown on Drawings or required to complete the installation.
General Color Selection Note: In any and all sections of these specifications, any color selection relating to
any materials, products, painted surfaces, etc. is for establishing a basis for bidding and may be changed to
a different color, yet remaining in same price range.
Zero Percent Asbestos: The General Contractor shall, during the construction period, be responsible for the
verification of all new materials and products supplied and installed within the limits of his contractual
responsibilities to contain 0% asbestos. In the event that the project is a remodel of an existing structure or
is a remodel and addition of new building area, the General Contractor will be responsible only for the
verification of the new materials and products installed within the limits of his contract.
Before the issuance of the final Payment the General Contractor shall furnish the Owner a signed
statement certifying the 0% asbestos containment as stated above. (See SUBMITTALS this
Section.)
Cutting and Patching: The General Contractor and the Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors shall each
be responsible for their own cutting, associated removal and replacement of all materials to do theirwork, and
the patching back in of the substrate material to receive the final finish. (The only exception would be areas
of concrete Floor slabs as noted on the Architectural Drawings in which the General Contractor will only cut
the existing slab and pour new concrete after the Mechanical and /or Electrical Subcontrector(s) have
completed their portion of the work.) Substrate materials shall be of same type of material or of a material
equal to or better than the existing material removed as to physical characteristics as judged by the Architect.
Substrate material shall be installed to accommodate finished surface alignment. All final finishing work shall
match existing adjacent surfaces and shall be done by the General Contractor.
"Final finish" refers to the surface treatment which has an influence on the final appearance as compared to
the existing adjacent surfaces; i.e., wall taping and texturing, tile, vinyl wall covering, painting, concrete surface
finishes and all other finishes as applicable.
For cutting and patching of exterior concrete or asphalt surfaces, the trade responsible fordoing the work shall
also be responsible for the cutting and patching of said materials. See also "Utility Excavation" in SECTION
02200. The finish patching materials shall be of the same materials, finishes and thickness as existing and
shall align flush with existing surfaces after curing and or compaction.
Hours of Construction: In order to minimize noise impacts to neighboring residential areas, construction and
related activities shall be limited to the hours between 8:00 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. Construction activities may
be permitted before 8:00 a.m. or after4:30 p.m. if it can be determined that these activities would not generate
noise levels exceeding 45 dBA at the property lines of the proposal. Any construction activities proposed
before 8:00 a.m. or after 4:30 p.m. must be approved by the Thurston County Building Department prior to
being allowed.
Slab Moisture Content: Because of the adhesives used to install the scheduled floor coverings over the
concrete floor slabs is sensitive to elevated moisture vapor emission and pH levels, the contractor shall, as
soon as possible, take the actions necessary to bring these slabs into the acceptable levels, thereby avoiding
unnecessary delays in the installation of the floor finishes.
Dust Control During Construction: To minimize dust and resulting impacts to neighboring residential areas,
site watering will occur during site development. The site shall be watered as often as is necessary to prevent
dust from being generated and traveling onto neighboring properties. Site watering will continue until all
exposed soils have been covered through hydroseeding or other appropriate method.
Job Housecleanina /Disposal of Rubbish: The Contractor shall remove from the site all rubbish and debris
resulting from work under his contract. Keep building and site in a neat and orderly condition at all stages of
the work.
tyeim stg] 01095-4 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-4
i
1 1 Public Works Statutory Provisions: The Contractor shall comply with the following statutory provisions:
1. RCW 39.12 relating to prevailing wages on public works. The Contractor on or before the date of
commencement of work shall file a statement under oath with the Owner and with the Director of
Labor and Industries certifying the rate of hourly wage and fringe benefits paid and to be paid each
classification of laborers, workmen or mechanics employed upon the work by the contractors or
subcontractors, which shall be not less than the prevailing rate of wage. Such statement and any
supplemental statements which may be necessary shall be filed in accordance with the practices and
procedures required by the Department of Labor and Industries.
The Department of Labor and Industries requires the payment of a $25.00 fee with each "Statement
of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages' fors and "Affidavit of Wages Paid" fors. This fee or fees are
to be included in the contract price.
2. RCW 49.28 relating to hours of labor.
3. RCW 49.60 relating to discrimination.
4. RCW 39.08 relating to contractors bond.
5. RCW 18.27 relating to registration of contractors.
6. RCW 70.94 relating to Puget Sound Air Pollution Control Agency.
7. RCW 70.92 relating to provisions for the aged and physically handicapped.
8. RCW 28A.85 relating to affirmative action.
9. RCW 39.04 relating to plans and specifications on work done for public bodies, estimates of costs
of the work, supplemental plans and specifications, supplemental estimates, accounts and records
of costs, engineers certificate.
10. RCW 60.28 relating to labor and material liens and taxes and retainage.
Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,
applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into
the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract
Documents by reference.
Publication Dates: Comply with the standards in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents.
Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with 2 or more standards is specified and the standards
establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most
stringent requirement. Refer to the Architect before proceeding for a decision on requirements that are
different but apparently equal, and where it is uncertain which requirement is the most stringent.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the
minimum acceptable. The actual installation may comply exactlywith the minimum quantity or quality
specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these
requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context
of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding.
Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with
the Contract Documents.
Ilyelm stgi 01095-5 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-5
Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, the Contractor
(yeim stg) 01095-5 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095- 6
shall obtain copies directly from the publication source.
Abbreviations
and Names: Trade association names and titles
of general standards are frequently
abbreviated. The following
acronyms or abbreviations, as referenced in
the Contract Documents, are defined
to mean
the associated names. Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but are not
assured,
to be accurate and up -to -date as of the date of the Contract
Documents.
ACI
American Concrete Institute
P.O. Box 9094
Farmington Hills, MI 48333.9094
(248) 848 -3700
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
II West 42nd St., 13th Floor
New York, NY 10036
(212) 6424900
ARMA
Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Assoc.
6000 Executive Dr., Suite 201
Rockville, MD 20852 -3803
(301) 231 -9050
ASTM
American Society for Testing and Materials
1916 Race St.
Philadelphia, PA 19103 -1187
(610) 832 -9500
AWI
Architectural Woodwork Institute
P.O. Box 1550
13924 Braddock Rd., No. 100
Centerville, VA 22020
(703) 222 -1100
FM
Factory Mutual Systems
1151 Boston - Providence Turnpike
P.O. Box 9102
Norwood, MA 02062
(617) 762 -4300
GA
Gypsum Association
810 First St., NE, Suite 510
Washington, DC 20002
(202) 289 -5440
NFPA
National Fire Protection Assoc.
One Batterymarch Park
P.O. Box 9101
(617) 770 -3000
Quincy, MA 02269 -9101
(800) 3443555
NRCA
National Roofing Contractors Assoc.
10255 W. Higgins Rd., Suite 600
Rosemont, IL 60018 -5607
(708) 299 -9070
SDI
Steel Door Institute
30200 Detroit Rd.
Cleveland, OH 44145
(440) 899 -0010
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
333 Pfingsten Rd.
Northbrook, IL 60062
(847) 272 -8800
(yeim stg) 01095-5 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095- 6
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
P.O. Box 23145
Portland, OR 97281 (503) 639 -0651
WWPA Western Wood Products Assoc.
Yeon Building
522 SW 5th Ave.
Portland, OR 97204 -2122 (503) 224 -3930
Federal Govemment Artencies. Names and titles of federal government standard- or Specification- producing
agencies are often abbreviated. The following acronyms or abbreviations referenced in the Contract
Documents indicate names of standard- or Specification - producing agencies of the federal government.
Names and addresses are subject to change and are believed, but are not assured, to be accurate and up -to-
date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
CS Commercial Standard
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
401 M St., SW
Washington, DC 20460
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
(U. S. Department of Labor)
200 Constitution Ave., NW
Washington, DC 20210
PS Product Standard of NBS
(U.S. Department of Commerce)
Government Printing Office
Washington, DC 20402
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01095
(202) 783 -3238
(202) 382 -2090
(202) 21MO91
(202) 783 -3238
' [yen, sty) 01095 - 7 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01095-7
SECTION 01200 — PROJECT
PART 1- GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project meetings, including, but not
limited to, the following:
Preconstruction conferences.
Progress meetings.
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
The Architect will schedule a ore - construction conference and organizational meeting after execution of the
Agreement and prior to commencement of construction activities. The purpose of the meeting is to review
responsibilities and personnel assignments.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of the Owner, Architect, and their consultants; the Contractor and its
superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the
conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with the Project and authorized to conclude
matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following
Tentative construction schedule.
Critical work sequencing.
Designation of responsible personnel.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of Contract Documents.
Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
Preparation of record documents.
Use of the premises.
Parking availability.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
Security.
Housekeeping.
Working hours.
Selection of weekly progress meeting day.
[yelm stg] 01200 - 1 PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-1
The Architect will be responsible to conduct the meetings and record the minutes. The distribution of the
minutes will be to the Owner, General Contractor, and the Architects consultants.
Attendees: Those required to be in attendance will be the Owner and Architect Representatives, General
Contractor's Superintendent, Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors' Representatives and any other
subcontractor or supplier currently involved in the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review other items of
significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to the status of the
Project.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine where
each activity is in relation to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, whether on time or ahead or
behind schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to
insure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
Review the present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
Interface requirements.
Time.
Sequences.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off -site fabrication problems.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and services.
Hours of work.
Hazards and risks.
Housekeeping.
Quality and work standards.
Change Orders.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
3 -week oroiected work schedule- In addition to the Contractor's Construction Schedule, at each
Progress Meeting the Contractor shall provide a 3 -week projected work schedule identifying specific
as- planned construction activities at specific areas of the project. This schedule shall also include
the percentage complete of each identified work activity, any coordinated work activities by outside
utilities and the Owner, and planned major material deliveries.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
END OF SECTION 01200
lyeim srgl 01200 - 2 PROJECT MEETINGS 01200-2 '
I
1
SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
1
PART 1- GENERAL
2
3
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
6
Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract, including Generaland Supplementary Conditions and other
7
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
8
9
10
SUMMARY
11
12
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product
13
Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
'14
15
Related Sections include the following:
16
17
Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" for Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other
18
miscellaneous submittals.
19
20
Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" (System Demonstration and Certification;
21
Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials; Warranties).
'22
23
Division 2 throuoh 16 Sections for submittals as required per each separate section.
24
25
26
DEFINITIONS
27
28
Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.
29
1
30
Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submittals maybe
31
rejected for not complying with requirements.
'
32
33
34
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
35
CAD Drawing Availability: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings are available from the Architect and associated
'36
37
Engineers for Subcontractors use in preparation of their submittals. These drawings will be provided in
38
"AutoCad" drawing format utilizing Release 14 or newer virsion. A charge of $50.00 per drawing sheet will
39
be assessed and the Electronic Information Disclaimer form, following at the end of this section, shall be
140
signed by the Subcontractor using the drawings for their submittal preparation. The signed disclaimer form
41
along with the fee must be delivered to the Architect prior to the release of any electronic drawings.
42
43
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activi ties.
'
44
45
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related
46
activities that require sequential activity.
'47
48
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will
49
not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.
50
51
Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other
52
submittals until related submittals are received.
53
54
lyeim stg1 01330 - 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-1
Processino Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time
for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.
Initial Review: Allow (7) seven days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise
Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be
transmitted directly to Architect's Structural, Mechanical, and Electrical consultants, provide duplicate
copy of transmittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to
Contractor.
Resubmittal Review: Allow [4] four days for processing each resubmittal.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough
in advance of the Work to permit processing.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
All submittals shall be numbered sequentially.
Resubmittals shall retain original number followed by letter (i.e., A.. B.. C).
Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
Pro)act name.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Deviations: Prior to distribution to subcontractors and / or suppliers, General Contractor shall highlight,
encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes
noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit
each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals without review when received from
sources other than Contractor.
On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information,
requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and
deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minorvariations and limitations.
Include the same label information as the related submittal.
Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the
Contract Documents.
tyeim stgl 01330 - 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-2
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,
installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities.
Show distribution on transmittal forms.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection
with construction.
PART2- PRODUCTS
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
When possible, edge bind multiple sheet shop drawings and /or other loose leaf submittals for easier
handling and filing. Edge bind in appropriate sized three -ring binders, report covers, etc. Edge bind
drawings as usual. Provide submittal identification, as noted in these specifications, on the spine of
the binders and /or the face of the report covers.
Product Data. Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product
or equipment.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable
for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
43
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
1
Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
2
Standard color charts.
3
Project name.
4
Date.
5
Destination (To:).
6
Source (From:).
7
Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
1
8
Category and type of submittal.
9
Submittal purpose and description. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.
10
Remarks.
11
Signature of transmitter.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,
installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities.
Show distribution on transmittal forms.
Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection
with construction.
PART2- PRODUCTS
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
When possible, edge bind multiple sheet shop drawings and /or other loose leaf submittals for easier
handling and filing. Edge bind in appropriate sized three -ring binders, report covers, etc. Edge bind
drawings as usual. Provide submittal identification, as noted in these specifications, on the spine of
the binders and /or the face of the report covers.
Product Data. Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product
or equipment.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable
for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
43
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
44
45
Manufacturers product specifications.
Manufacturers installation instructions.
46
Standard color charts.
47
Manufacturers catalog cuts.
48
Wiring diagrams showing factory- installed wiring.
49
Printed performance curves.
50
Operational range diagrams.
51
Mill reports.
1
52
Standard product operating and maintenance manuals.
53
Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
54
Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
55
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
56
Notation of coordination requirements.
57
58
Number of Copies: Submit three (3) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect
59
will return one (1) copy. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
'
60
["i. arq) 01330 - 3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330.3
Shoo Drawings: Prepare Project- specifcinformation, drewnaccuratelytoscale. Do not base Shop Drawings
on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:
Dimensions.
Identification of products.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
Roughing -in and setting diagrams.
Wiring diagrams showing field- installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring.
Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
Templates and patterns.
Schedules.
Design calculations.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer - installed and field - installed wiring.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full -size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on
sheets at least 8 -1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000
mm).
Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows:
The Architect will require 4 copies; two for the Owner, one for the Architect and one for their
consultant. (i.e. Structural, Mechanical, Electrical)
The total number of submittals will be 4 copies + °x" number of copies for the contractors
use.
Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following:
Samples for Verification: Submit full -size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same
material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with
the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected.
Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated
components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials;
swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent
testing and inspection.
Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities
indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on
unexposed side that includes the following:
Generic description of Sample.
Product name or name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattem, and texture for a final check of these characteristics
with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual
component as delivered and installed.
If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the product
represented by a Sample, submit at least three (3) sets of paired units that show approximate
limits of the variations.
lyelm stgl 01330 - 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-4
11
1 Refer to individual Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate
2 workmanship, fabrication techniques, details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar
3 construction characteristics.
5 Number of Samples for Verification: Submit two(2) sets of Samples. Architect will retain one (1)
6 Sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project
1 7 Record Sample.
8
9 Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques,
10 connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine
final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification
Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condifion at time of use.
Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are
the property of Contractor.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with the following requirements:
Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in order by dates required by construction
schedule.
Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Article 5 of "Supplementary Conditions ".
Subcontract List: Comply with requirements in Para. 9.2 of the General Conditions.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
Number of Copies: Submit two (2) copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect
will not return copies.
41 Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity
42 responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or
43 other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.
44
45 Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Control."
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in "Section 00800 - Supplementary
Conditions."
50 Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or
1 51 person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of
52 architects and owners, and other information specified.
Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies
with requirements.
57 Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with
58 requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification( WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record
59 (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.
[yelm stg] 01330 - 5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-5
InstallerCerfificates: Preparewritten statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies
■
with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project.
Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that
'
manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.
Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material
complies with requirements.
Material Test Reports'. Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.
,
Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for
compliance with performance requirements.
,
Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard
form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include
written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form,
indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product
,
is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies
with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a
qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal
maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout
Procedures."
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design
'
criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other
performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name
and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.
,
Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's
recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include
name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as
applicable:
'
Preparation of substrates.
Required substrate tolerances.
Sequence of installation or erection.
Required installation tolerances.
Required adjustments.
Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
'
[yeimstg101330 -6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330 -6
,
Manufacturers Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory- authorized service
representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:
Name, address, and telephone number of factory- authorized service representative making report.
Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.
Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.
Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if
not, what corrective action was taken.
Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies
with requirements.
Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.
Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or
bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of
deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect, Architectwill not
review this information but will return it with no action taken.
PART 3- EXECUTION
Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field
dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include name of reviewer, date of
Contractors approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for
compliance with the Contract Documents.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractors approval stamp and will return them
without action.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications
required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp
appropriately to indicate action taken.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it
if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.
END OF SECTION 01330
Ilye" still 01330 - 7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01330-7
ELECTRONIC INFORMATION DISCLAIMER
ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.L.L.C. agrees to provide electronic information to
(recipient) for (project), the electronic
information identified as: , subject to the following terms and conditions,
Possession of the electronic information is evidence of recipient's acceptance of, and agreement with, these
restrictions:
1. Due to the potential that electronic information can be modified unintentionally or otherwise, ERICKSON
MCGOVERN, P.L.L.0 reserves the right to remove all indices of its ownership, name, and / or involvement
from electronic information not in its possession.
' 2. The use of this electronic information is restricted to the original site and projectforwhich itwas prepared.
The information is proprietary and is to be used only as an aid toward the successful completion of this
project by the recipient person and /orcompany identified below. ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.L.L.c. has
' provided the electronic information solely for your convenience. This does not eliminate or reduce your
responsibility to verify any and all information relevant to your work and responsibility on this project.
Recipient shall have 14 days from receipt of the electronic information to verify compatibility, readability
and appropriateness for use; ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.L.L.C. shall not be responsible for translation
' errors and does not agree to maintain the electronic information beyond this time period, nor to translate
or reconfigure the electronic information. If errors or discrepancies are discovered, please notify our office
in writing immediately. Drawings shall not be interpreted to be true scale documents of the proposed
work, nor shall they be utilized for fabrication unless written approval is first obtained by ERICKSON
' MCGOVERN, P.L..c. If the electronic information is being altered as part of an effort to generate as -built
drawings, ERICKSON MCGOVERN, PL.LC. accepts no liability and /or responsibility for the accuracy of
such as -built documents. Material prepared from the electronic information shall not be used for other
projects, or be transferred to any other party or entity for use on this or other projects. Reuse or
reproduction of the electronic information, data or documents prepared from, by or with this electronic
information for any other purpose or party for which the material was not strictly intended, is prohibited,
as ERICKSON MCGOVERN, PL.Lc. retains all copyright and other legal interest in the material. In
addition, all drawing information contained in the electronic information including, but not limited to, symbol
libraries, blocks, details, etc. may not be reproduced, sold, distributed or utilized in any form on any other
project or by anyone else.
3. In addition to the other conditions and restrictions contained in this Agreement, use of the electronic
information is specially limited to the following:
4. Recipient recognizes that information stored on electronic information, including, but not limited to, a
computer disk prepared by ERICKSON MCGOVERN, PLL.c., may not be 100% compatible with their own
computer system due to differences in computer hardware and software, or may be subject to translation
errors . In addition, recipient recognizes that designs, plans and data stored on electronic information,
including but not limited to a computer disk, may be subject to undetectable alteration and /or
uncontrollable deterioration. If, for any reason, a conflict occurs between information contained in the
electronic information and stamped, signed documents, the information on signed or stamped documents
shall govern.
5. In light of the foregoing, the recipient recognizes and acknowledges that the use of such electronic
information will be at their sole risk and without any liability or legal exposure to ERICKSON MCGOVERN,
PL.Lc. No warranties of any nature, whether express or implied, shall attach to the electronic information
or the information contained thereon. Furthermore, recipient hereby releases and shall, to the fullest
extent permitted by law, defend, indemnity and hold harmless ERICKSON MCGOVERN, PL LC. from any
and all claims, damages, losses and expenses ( "Claims ") including attorney's fees arising out, or resulting
from the use of such electronic information, including, but not limited to, Claims involving the
completeness or accuracy of any data or information contained therein.
Electronic Information Disclaimer Page f of 2
1
ELECTRONIC INFORMATION DISCLAIMER
6. Notwithstanding ERICKSON MCGOVERN,P.i.i.c's agreement to provide electronic information pursuant
to this Agreement, nothing shall be construed to create contractual privity or benefit between recipient and
ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.i.L.c except as is necessary for ERICKSON MCGOVERN, PL.Lc to enforce
these express, limited terms and conditions.
7. Use of any information or data in the accompanying electronic information signifies your acceptance of
the above statements without exceptions and /or modifications.
Date:
Recipient Signature
name
Electronic Information Disclaimer
Page 2 of 2
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
1
PART 1- GENERAL
2
13
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
6
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
7
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
8
9
10
SUMMARY
'
11
12
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality- control services.
13
Quality- control services include inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by an
'14
is
independent testing laboratory. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.
16
17
18
Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated.
These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with Contract Document
19
requirements.
20
21
Requirements of this Section relate to customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of
22
standard products.
23
24
Speck quality- control requirements for individual construction activities are specified inthe Sections
1
25
that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard
26
products.
27
Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality- control procedures
'28
29
that facilitate compliance with Contract Document requirements.
30
31
'32
RESPONSIBILITIES
33
34
Owner Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated the Owner shall be responsible for the selection of the
independent testing laboratory from firms submitting proposals to perform the inspections, tests, and other
'35
36
quality- control services as specified.
37
38
Cost: The cost for inspections and testing as specified in this section shall be paid by the Owner.
39
40
General Contractor: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services,
41
and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the Architect and testing laboratory not less
than 24 hours in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Contractor responsibilities include,
'42
43
but are not limited to, the following:
44
45
Provide access to the Work.
46
47
Furnish incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and tests.
48
49
Provide facilities for storage and curing of test samples.
'
S0
51
Provide the agency with a preliminary design mix proposed for use for materials mixes that require
52
control by the testing agency.
53
'
54
Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.
[yelm stg] 01400 - 1 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400-1
Testing Laboratory Responsibilities: The testing laboratory shall engage a qualified special inspector who
shall observe thework assigned forconformance with the approved design drawings and specifications, and
make tests required by the International Building Code, Section 1704, and other requirements for special
inspections required by Codes and Ordinances for local County and /or City agencies.
The special inspector is not authorized to release, revoke, after, or enlarge requirements of the
Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.
The special inspector shall not perform any duties of the Contractor
The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official, the Engineer and
Architect of record, and other designated persons.
All discrepancies shall be brought to the immediate attention of the contractor for correction, then, if
uncorrected, to the proper design authority and to the building official.
FINAL REPORT. The special inspector shall submit a final signed report stating whether the work
requiring special inspection was, to the best of the inspectors knowledge, in conformance with the
approved plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions of the Building Code,
under which this project was designed, and as adopted by Thurston County,
COUNTY INSPECTIONS. These requirements for special inspection do not relieve the contractors
responsibility to schedule inspections by the county building inspector before concealing any work.
Retesting: The Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections, tests, or other quality-
control services prove unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with Contract Document requirements,
regardless of whether the original test was Contractors responsibility.
The cost of retesting construction, revised or replaced by the Contractor, is the Contractor's
responsibility where required tests performed on original construction indicated noncompliance with
Contract Document requirements.
Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of
delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate
inspections and tests.
The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar
activities.
SUBMITTALS
The independent testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection, test, or similar
service to the Architect, Structural Engineer, Contractor and Building Official.
Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited
to, the following'.
Date of issue.
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making the inspection or test.
lyelm stg] 01400-2 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
01400 -2 1
I
1
Designation of the Work and test method.
2
'3
4
Identification of product and Specification Section.
5
Complete inspection or test data.
6
Test results and an interpretation of test results.
'7
B
9
Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.
10
11
Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with
12
Contract Document requirements.
13
14
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
'
15
16
Recommendations on retesting.
17
18
19
QUALITY ASSURANCE
20
21
Qualifications for Service Agencies. Engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent
22
testing laboratories, that are prequalified as complying with WABO requirements and that specialize in the
23
types of inspections and tests to be performed.
24
25
Each independent inspection and testing agency engaged on the Project shall be authorized by
26
authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the state where the Project is located.
27
'
28
29
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
30
31
32
PART 3- EXECUTION
33
34
35
DETAILED REQUIREMENTS (GENERAL WORK CONTRACT)
'
36
37
Structural Concrete: Perform tests to concrete as required under "Quality Control' paragraph of
38
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
39
40
Bolts Installed in Concrete: Inspection and observation during the placement of concrete or epoxy around bolts
41
in accordance with IBC Section 17, Table 1704.4, Row 3.
'43
42
Reinforcing Steel: Inspection of placement of reinforcing steel as required per IBC Section 17, Table 1704 4.
44
Row 1.
45
46
Plywood Shear Wall and Plywood Diaphragm Nailing: Periodic visual nailing inspections.
47
48
Inspecting agency will report observations promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.
49
50
51
1
I[yeim stg] 01400-3 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES 01400-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
General: Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged
construction and restore substrates and finishes.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality- control service activities, and protect repaired construction.
Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for
inspection, testing, or similar services.
END OF SECTION 01400
lyeimstgl 01400 -4 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES
01400-4 1
d
i SECTION 01500 - CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
'
1
PART 1-GENERAL
2
'
3
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
6
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
'7
8
9
10
SUMMARY
'
11
12
This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary
13
utilities, support facilities, and security and protection.
'14
15
Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
16
17
Water service and distribution.
18
19
Temporary electric power and light.
20
21
Temporary heat.
'
22
23
Temporary toilets.
24
25
Drinking water.
26
27
Temporary site drainage.
'29
28
Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
30
31
Field offices and storage sheds.
32
33
Access road.
34
35
Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following:
36
37
Temporary fire protection.
38
Miscellaneous temporary requirements include, but are not limited to, the following:
'39
40
41
Dust control.
42
43
Pollution control.
44
45
46
SUBMITTALS
47
48
Temporary Utilities: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed
49
on temporary utilities.
'
50
51
Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of the date established for commencement of the
52
Work, submit a schedule indicating implementation and termination of each temporary utility.
53
'
54
lyelm stgl 01500-1 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction including, but not limited to, the following:
Building code requirements.
Environmental protection regulations.
Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition
Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition,' and
NECA "National Electric Code ".
Temporary Utilities: Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each
temporary utility. At the earliest feasible time, when acceptable to the Owner, change over from use of
temporary service to use of permanent service.
Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe
and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload
facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire - prevention measures. Do not allow
hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions, or public nuisances to develop or persist on -site.
PART2- PRODUCTS
MATERIALS
General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged,
previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
Water: Provide potable water approved by local health authorities.
EQUIPMENT
General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged,
previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended.
Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another
recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed.
Field Office Building: Provide substantial weathertight office building with wooden stairs and 5 -foot by 5 -foot
platformwith guardrails and handrails meeting applicable building codes, located on premises where directed.
Include one room of approximately 120 square feet for Architect- Contractor use. Provide for joint use of
telephone and facsimile machine with Contractor's superintendent. Provide wood floor above ground, floor
with cylinder lock, and glazed windows. Equip with shelving, plan rack, plan table, stools and chairs, as
required for normal job administration. Provide adequate heat, electric light, and janitor service. Remove
building from site on completion of contract, or sooner if desired.
Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self - contained, single- occupant toilet units of the chemical type. Provide
units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass- fiber- reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent
material.
lyelm stgl 01500 - 2 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-2
Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand - carried, portable, UL- rated, Class Afire extinguishers for temporary offices
and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand - carried, portable, UL- rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical
extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA - recommended classes for the exposures.
Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by
location and class of fire exposure.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Use qualified Personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Loratefacilities where theywill serve the Project
adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities
as required.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not
remove until facilities are no longer needed or as directed by Architect.
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to install temporary service or connect to existing
service. Comply with company recommendations.
Arrange with company and existing users for a time when service can be interrupted, if necessary,
to make connections for temporary services.
Water for Construction Purposes: Contractor shall furnish water for construction.
Temporary Electrical Liahtina 6 Power The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing of temporary power.
Lighting and electrical power shall be provided in all spaces of the building(s). Temporary lighting intensity
shall be sufficient to allow construction, finishing and inspection to be accomplished without the addition of
supplemented lighting. Temporary lighting wiring shall be installed overhead, not with cords strung on floor.
Provide a minimum of (1) duplex receptacle for temporary power for every 1,000 sq. ft. of floor area. Care
shall be exercised in the installation of power cords such that cords are run overhead across corridors,
walkways and other heavy traffic areas. Remove temporary lighting and power materials and equipment and
their connections at Final Completion or sooner if approved or directed.
All costs relating to the supplying and installing of all equipment and materials necessary for the distribution
of temporary lighting and power shall be paid by the Electrical Subcontractor.
Temporary Heat: Temporary heat shall be provided by the General Contractor to protect materials and
equipment from dampness and cold as well as for building dry-out. The heating equipment designed for the
building shall NOT be used for this purpose. The General Contractor shall provide vented, self contained, LP-
gas, electric, or fuel -oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control and such units shall be fire safe. Use
of gasoline- buming space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited. All costs for
temporary heating shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall not allow any fan -driven
supply or exhaust device to be operated during construction without the specific approval of the Architect and
the Mechanical Engineer. See technical divisions for temperatures required for work of the various trades.
Toilets: Install self - contained toilet units for all those connected with the work. Locate where directed when
work is started; keep in sanitary condition. Remove when directed by Architect and disinfect the premises.
Drinking -Water Facilities: Provide in not less than two locations, for all those connected with the work,
containerized, tap- dispenser, bottled -water drinking -water units, including paper supply.
[veim stg] 01500-3 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-3
Temporary Site Drainage: Provide and maintain temporary ditches around site to keep water away from the
buildings and /or site improvement work. When final grading has been completed, fill temporary ditches and
compact fill material in manner specified under Division 2 for compaction of fills.
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
Locate field offices and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access.
Remove support facility from site on completion of contract, or sooner if directed.
Access Road: Contractor to provide and maintain on -site access road as required for delivery of materials
to building and /or material storage area on site. Strip sod and gravel surface of road as indicated on drawings
to support the required temporary loads; remove gravel where interfering with finish grading, seeding, sodding
or planting or other site improvements.
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire- protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and
maintain temporary fire- protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and
controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers' and NFPA 241
'Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations,' or follow the requirements
of the authority having jurisdiction, whichever is most restrictive.
Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than
one extinguisher on each floor.
Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers and other access routes for fighting fires.
Securi : Contractor is responsible for security of Construction Areas and its contents during construction
when not otherwise occupied by the Owner.
Dust Control: Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from
dispersing into the atmosphere.
Pollution Control: Provide methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water or
atmosphere. Allow no discharge of noxious substances from construction operations.
TERMINATION AND REMOVAL
Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary
facility when the need has ended. All surfaces, both exterior and interior, which have been damaged or
deteriorated due to the temporary facilities, shall be repaired or restored to the original condition, or better than
their condition was, prior to the installation of the temporary facility.
END OF SECTION 01500
1y im stg] 01500 - 4 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500-4 11
SECTION 01510- SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS
Following is a list of Drawings, and the same are hereby made a part of the contract:
A1.0
SITE PLAN
A2.0
FLOOR PLAN
A2.1
ROOF PLAN & DETAILS
A3.0
ELEVATIONS
S2.0
FOUNDATION PLAN AND FLOOR FRAMING PLAN
S3.0
ROOF FRAMING PLAN
S4.0
STRUCTURAL DETAILS
S5.0
STRUCTURAL DETAILS
M1.0 MECHANICAL PLANS
E1.0 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN AND ELECTRICAL LEGEND
E2.1 ELECTRICAL LIGHTING I POWER PLAN
LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE AND PANEL SCHEDULE
Prior to bidding, check Drawing Set used to make sure that all Drawings listed above are included in the
Set. Failure to do so shall not be considered a cause for extra compensation.
END OF SECTION 01510
' [wim stg] 01510 - i SCHEDULE OF DRAWINGS 01510-1
i
ISECTION 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
2
3
'
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
6
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other
7
Division -1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
8
9
10
SUMMARY
'
11
12
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project closeout, including but not
13
limited to:
14
15
Inspection procedures (Substantial /Final Completion)
16
17
18
Project Record Document submittal (Record Drawings and Specifications, Record Product Data, and
Miscellaneous Record Submittals)
19
20
Submittal of Material Safety Data Sheets
21
22
Final cleaning
23
'
24
25
Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:
26
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures"
27
28
Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data ". (System Demonstration and Certification;
29
Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials; Warranties)
30
'
31
32
Division 2 throuoh 16 Sections for specific construction activity closeout requirements.
33
34
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
35
36
Preliminary
Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion, complete
37
the
following. List exceptions in the request.
38
'39
In the Application for Payment that coincides with, orfirst follows, the date Substantial Completion is
40
claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.
41
Include supporting documentation for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a
42
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
43
44
If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of
45
incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.
46
'
47
Advise Owner of pending insurance change -over requirements.
48
'49
50
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and
similar documents,
51
52
Obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services
53
and utilities; include temporary occupancy permits, operating certificates and similar releases.
54
'
lyeim stgl 01700 - 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700-1
Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals. (See Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance
Data)
Submit record drawings, record specifications, record product data and miscellaneous record
submittals as listed under "RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS" paragraph of this section.
Submit material safety data sheets (MSDS).
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items.
Make final change -over of permanent locks and transmit keys to the Owner. Advise the Owner's
personnel of change -over in security provisions.
Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of the Owner's operating and maintenance
personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilities from the site, along with
construction tools, mock -ups, and similarelements. (See Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance
Data).
Complete final clean up requirements, including touch -up painting. Touch -up and otherwise repair
and restore marred exposed finishes.
Submit Certificate of Occupancy. See SECTION 01010 -SUMMARY OF THE WORK /SPECIAL
CONDITIONS.
Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection
or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial
Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected
before the certificate will be issued.
The Architeclwill repeat inspection when requested and assured thatthe Work has been substantially
completed. All repeat inspections, after the initial contractor - requested inspection, shall be paid for
by the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Any reinspection charges will be deducted from
the Contractor's Pay Request.
Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance.
FINAL ACCEPTANCE
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final
payment, complete the following:
Submit final list of all subcontractors with their trade heading and equipment suppliers with equipment
furnished. Give names, addresses, and phone numbers.
Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously
submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations
where required.
Submit a copy of the Architect's final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that
each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance, and the list has been endorsed
and dated by the Architect.
Submit affidavit of payrolls, bills for materials and equipment. A.I.A. Form G706. See
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, 9.10.2.
[yelm stg] 01700 - 2 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700-2 1
Submit affidavit of release of liens. A.I.A. Form G 706A. See SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS,
9.10.2.
Submit affidavit of wages paid. See SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, 9.10.2.
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.
Submit signed statement certifying the 0% asbestos containment of all new materials and products
supplied and installed within the project limits of contractual responsibilities. See Section 01095 -
Reference Standards and Definitions.
Reinsoection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including
inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been
delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect.
Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise
the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required
for final acceptance.
If necessary, reinspection will be repeated. All repeat inspections, after the initial contractor- requested
inspection, shall be paid for by the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Any reinspection
charges will be deducted from the Contractor's Pay Request.
RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS ON ELECTRONIC MEDIA
General: For use in the development of the record documents, but not to be used for construction purposes,
provide a separate and complete set of photo - copied (Xerography) drawings for the exclusive use of daily
mark -ups of all contract revisions. The satisfactory maintenance of this set throughout construction is a
requirement and will be reviewed prior to the progress payment approval. Protect this set from deterioration
and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location.
Electronic Media shall be described as computer generated drawings on a CD with a format compatible with
Auto Cad 2002.
Record Drawings (As Builts): The Contractor shall provide one complete set of "as built' drawings on
electronic media and also one complete full size set of drawings via the photo- copying process (Xerography).
The Architect will provide the Contractor with all drawings on discs as necessary for the Contractor
to develop a complete set of as -built drawings.
Any variations from the original drawings which may occur during the "Project" construction process
shall be recorded on the electronic media and shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall include,
but not be limited to, the following:
In addition it shall be possible, using these drawings, to correctly and easily locate, identify
and establish sizes of all piping, directions and the like, as well as other features of work
which will be concealed underground and /or in the finished building.
Locations of underground work shall be established by dimensions to column lines or walls, locating
all turns, etc., and by properly referenced centerline or invert elevations and rates of fall.
The following requirements apply to all record drawings on the electronic media:
They shall be maintained at the Contractors expense.
' lyeim stgl 01700-3 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700-3
All such drawing work done shall be done carefully and neatly by a competent draftsman and inform
approved by the Architect.
Additional drawings shall be provided as necessary for clarification.
They shall be kept up-to -date during the entire course of the work and shall be available on request
for examination by the Architect and, when necessary, to establish clearances for other parts of the
work.
All change order changes will be incorporated unless covered by a "change order drawing" (not on
electronic media) and issued by the Architect, in which case a reference note will be made on the
Record Drawings.
All addenda changes will be incorporated.
These record drawings must be finished complete and delivered to the Architect prior to the final
payment. Acceptance of as- builts are subject to the Architect's approval.
Record Specifications: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, and one copy
of other written construction documents such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed forth
during construction. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in
comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. Give particular attention to substitutions,
selection of options and similar information on elements that are concealed or cannot otherwise be readily
discerned later by direct observation. Note related record drawing information and Product Data.
Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's records.
Record Product Data Maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark these documents to show
significant variations in actual Work performed in comparison with information submitted. Include variations
in products delivered to the site, and from the manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations.
Give particular attention to concealed products and portions of the Work which cannot otherwise be readily
discerned later by direct observation. Note related Change Orders and mark -up of record drawings and
Specifications.
Upon completion of mark -up, submit complete set of record Product Data to the Architect for the
Owners records.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous
record- keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the
date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly
identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owners
records.
MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS 1MSDS
'
As required per WAC 296 -62- 05413 -1 the General Contractor shall supply to the Owner all MSDS sheets for
all materials as applicable to this project. Provide table of contents in front of binder indicating the breakdown
of sheets into C.S.I. divisions with further breakdown into sections. Assemble in binder with spline clearly
marked.
'
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
'
lyelm stgj 01700-4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700,4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
Operating and Maintenance Instructions: See Section 01730 - Operations and Maintenance Data.
FINAL CLEANING
General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section
"Definitions and Standards ".
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit
to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with
manufacturer's instructions.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for Certification of
Substantial Completion.
The location of this required cleaning shall be limited to those areas and spaces where work of this
project has been preformed and spaces used by the Contractor in the execution of this work. This
is inclusive of both the exterior and interior of the building.
The residual construction dust should be cleaned with a vacuum containing a High Efficiency
Particulate Air (HEPA) filter and /or damp mopped. This includes, but is not limited to, the dust on the
floors, window sills, duct surfaces, tables, and chairs.
Remove stains; wash and polish all glass inside and outside. This work shall be done by
persons skilled and equipped for such work.
Remove foreign matter, marks, stains, foreign paint, fingerprints, soil and dirt from (and have
in a polished condition where applicable) the following:
Painted, decorated and stained work.
All hardware, fixtures and incorporated equipment.
All finished surfaces and metal surfaces, whether interior or exterior, including all
exposed interior concrete slabs.
All doors and windows.
Use only the cleaning materials and equipment which are compatible with the surfaces being
cleaned.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication and other
substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.
Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and other foreign
substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills and other foreign
deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to a smooth even - textured
surface.
Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during
construction.
lyeim stg] 01700-5 PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01700-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do
not bum waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's property. Do not discharge
volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove from the site and dispose of in a
lawful manner all rubbish and debris resulting from work under this contract.
Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the
Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.
END OF SECTION 01700
lyelm stg] 01700 - 6
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01700-6
,
I
'
SECTION 01730- OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
2
3
'
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
6
Drawingsand general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditionsand Division -1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
'7
8
9
10
SUMMARY
'
11
12
This Section includes the fallowing:
13
14
Submittal of Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
'
15
16
Systems Demonstration and Certification (Sample Form).
17
18
Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials (Sample Form).
19
20
Warranties (Sample Form).
21
22
Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
'
23
24
Division 1 Section "Suoolementary Conditions of the Contract ".
25
26
Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures'.
27
28
Division 1 Section "Project Closeout ".
29
'30
31
SUBMITTALS
32
33
At substantial completion, submit one (1) preliminary set for review.
'
34
35
Within two (2) weeks after Architect's review is complete, submit three (3) sets complete with all information.
36
Architect recommends that Contractor starts O &M manuals during the product review process.
'37
38
39
40
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
'41
42
Product data for
43
44
Mechanical equipment and controls - Division 15
45
'
46
Electrical equipment and controls - Division 16
47
48
Architectural Work: All other trade work as specified.
'
49
50
Volumes bound in 8 -1/2 x 11 inch three -ring binder with durable plastic covers.
51
52
Provide a separate volume for architectural, mechanical and electrical trades, with a table of contents and
'53
index tabs for each volume. Coordinate with Architectural, Mechanical, and Electrical specification sections.
54
55
At the beginning of each volume, provide directory listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of:
56
Architect, Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors and Material Suppliers.
57
'
Lvaim stgl 01730 - 1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-1
Following the directory, provide for each installer of equipment that requires regular maintenanceto meetwith
the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not
experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturers represen tatives. Schedule these instruction
times all for the same day and verify with Owner. Include a detailed review of the following items:
Maintenance manuals.
Shop Drawings and Product Data.
Operating instructions.
Control sequence.
Maintenance Instructions for equipment and systems.
Maintenance Instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials
and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
Spare parts and materials.
Tools.
Lubricants.
Fuels.
Hazards.
System Demonstration Certification.
Warranties and bonds.
Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.
As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:
Start-up.
Shutdown.
Emergency operations.
Noise and vibration adjustments.
Safety procedures.
Economy and efficiency adjustments.
Effective energy utilization.
Prior to final inspection. Demonstrate operation of each system to Architect, Engineer and Owner.
Instruct Owners personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and systems, using the
operation and maintenance data as the basis of instructions.
Certification that Owners personnel have been instructed in operation, adjustment and maintenance of
equipment and systems, in substantially the following form:
(Owner)
(Address)
Gentlemen:
RE: (Project)
We, as representatives / personnel for the (Owner), would like to attest to the fact that a '
representative of (subcontractor) has given us an orientation on the operation and maintenance of
the (product) for the (Project).
Owner
Owner
Subcontractor
Date
Date
Date
lyelm srgl 01730 - 2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1
1
1
01730 -2 '
Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual
Specification Sections. In addition to that used for construction of work.
Coordinate with Owner, deliver to project site and obtain receipt prior to final payment.
Provide receipts for materials furnished to the Owner in substantially the following form:
(Owner) RE: (Project)
(Address)
Gentlemen:
We, as representatives / personnel for the (Owner), would like to attest to the fact that the below
stated materials were furnished for future maintenance needs by a representative of (Contractor /
Subcontractor) for the (Project).
Owner Date
Owner Date
General / Subcontractor
WARRANTIES
Warranties are to be included and bound in the appropriate sections of Architectural, Mechanical and
Electrical volumes.
Written warranty addressed to the Owner, covering the entire work for one -year period, or as specially noted,
from date noted in General conditions. Letter to be substantially as follows:
(Owner) RE: (Project)
(Address)
Gentlemen:
I (We), the undersigned, do hereby warrant for a period of one year, or as specially noted, from the
( 1 all work performed under the terms of the Contract Documents. I (We) will
remedy at my (our) expense any defects appearing during that period due to poor or defective
materials and / orworkmanship and will pay for any damage resulting from occurrence of said defects
or the correction of same.
The following subcontractors performed or furnished materials subject to the one -year warranty as
stated above.
Subcontract Finn Name
(Masonry work) (John Doe Company)
(Lathing and plastering) (Smith & Smith Co.)
Etc., listing all subcontracts and firm names.
This warranty shall not be interpreted as holding the Contractor responsible for normal wear or any
deterioration of the work due to normal wear or abuse of the work by the Owner.
Very tmly yours.
Contractor
[yelm stg] 0f 730 - 3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730-3
For products or trades where separate or additional warranties are required, submit letter from each
subcontractor or material supplier, countersigned by the Contractor, covering all portions of the work
incorporated in the project under agreement between Contractorand said subcontractorforthe periods of time
specified beginning from date noted in general Conditions. Letters to be substantially as follows:
(Owner) RE: (Project)
(Address)
Gentlemen:
We, as Subcontractor and Contractor, do hereby warrant for a period of ( ) year(s) from the date
noted in General Conditions ( ) that portion of the work incorporated in the
project by (subcontractor) as described below:
(Specification Section Number, Title and Applicable Work)
We will remedy at our expense any defects appearing during that period due to poor or defective
materials and I orworkmanship and will pay for any damage resulting from occurrence of said defects
of the correction of same.
This warranty shall not be interpreted as holding the Contractor responsible for normal wear or any
deterioration of the work due to abuse of the work by the Owner.
Very truly yours,
Subcontractor
Contractor
PART 2- PRODUCTS
(Not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
(Not used)
END OF SECTION 01730
lyeim stgl 01730 - 4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
1
1
01730 -4 '
I
' SECTION 03300- CAST•IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1
1
PART 1 -GENERAL
2
'3
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
6
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division
7
1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
8
9
10
SUMMARY
`
11
12
This Section specifies
cast -in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement
procedures, and finishes.
'13
14
15
Precast concrete is specified in other Division 3 Sections.
16
Slab base course for support of building slabs is included as part of this work.
'17
18
19
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
20
21
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint fillers and sealants.
22
23
I25
24
SUBMITTALS
26
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
27
Sections.
'28
29
Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
30
admixtures, fibrous reinforcement, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds,
31
32
dry-shake finish materials, and others as requested by Architect.
33
Shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP-66
34
(88), "ACI Detailing Manual," showing barschedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement
of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.
'35
36
37
Samples of materials as requested by Architect, including names, sources, and descriptions.
'38
39
Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Amhitect. Materials
40
certificates shall
be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with
41
or exceeds specified requirements.
Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride con tent
42
complies with specification
requirements.
43
44
45
' [yelm srgl 03300 - 1 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards, except
where more stringent requirements are shown or specified:
ACI 301 -89, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings ".
ACI SP- 16 -89, "Field Reference Manual ".
ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ".
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice.
PART2- PRODUCTS
FORM MATERIALS
Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal- framed plywood faced, or other acceptable
panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable
sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings.
Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Providelumber
dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.
Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form - coating compounds with a maximum VOC of 350
g/I that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent
treatments of concrete surfaces.
Form Ties: Factory- fabricated, adjustable- length, removable or snap -off metal form ties, designed to prevent
forth deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer
than 1 -1/2 inches to exposed surface.
Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 -inch diameter in concrete surface.
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcing Bars . ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.
Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold -drawn steel.
Welded Wire Fabri c ASTM At 85, welded steel wire fabric.
Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615 /A 615 M, Grade 60, plain steel bars, cut bars true to length with ends square
and free of burrs.
Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire - Dar -type supports complying with CRSI
specifications.
For slabs -on- grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not
support chair legs.
lyelm stgl 03300 - 2 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2
For exposed - to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide
supports with legs that are plastic protected (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI,
Class 2).
CONCRETE MATERIALS
Portland Cement. ASTM C 150, Type II or Type 1 -II.
Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect
Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source
for exposed concrete.
For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling- causing
deleterious substances.
Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 but that special tests or actual service have shown
to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to Architect.
Water: Clean and potable
Admixture. General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.
RELATED MATERIALS
Waterstops: Provideflat, dumbbell -type or centerbulb -type waterstops at construction joints and otherjoints
as indicated. Size to suit joints.
Slab Base Course: Use coarse aggregate, WSDOT 9- 03.1(3)C, Grading No. 5, with the following proportions:
Sieve Size
Percent Passing
3/4"
80-100
3/8"
10 -40
#4
0 -4
Level base material between screeds to 1/4 inch in 10 feet then compact to specified density. Keep smooth
and level during all operations including concrete placement.
Vapor Retarder: Provide vapor retarder cover over granular base material, below all interior concrete slabs
on grade. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154,
as follows:
Water - resistant barrier consisting of plastic extrusion manufactured from virgin polyolefin resins.
Product: "Moistop Ultra A" by Fortifiber Building System Group. 15 mil.
" Stego Wrap" by Stego Industries. 10 mil.
"Vapor Block" by Raven Industries. 10 mil.
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES
See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings.
I(yeim sigl 03300 - 3 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3
ADMD(TURE
See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings.
Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
Add all ingredients including all admixtures at the batch plant during the mixing time with the weights
recorded on the delivery ticket. This includes all Cement, Aggregate, Water, and Admixtures.
When air temperature is between 65 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and
delivery time from 1 -1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg
C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3- EXECUTION
GENERAL
Mix, Place, Vibrate. Finish and Cure concrete per ACI 301.
Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor retarders/barrier, and other related materials with
placement of forms and reinforcing steel.
FORMS
General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static and
dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so
concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain
formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with ACI 347.
Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location,
grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways,
recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts,
and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly buhjoints and
provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush
plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined
surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only Kerf wood inserts for forming
keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.
Provide temporary openings for clean -outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is inaccessible
before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent
loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.
Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips
fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades.
Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately
place and securely support items built into forms.
tyeim stgl 03300 - 4 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-4
Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Removechips,
wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing
concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.
Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required
elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike -off
templates or compacting -type screeds.
SLAB BASE COURSE
General: Drainage course consists of placement of crushed gravel material, in layer of 4" thickness, over
subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs.
PI? acino: Place base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness, conforming to
indicated cross - section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for compacting material during
placement operations. Compact to 95 percent maximum dry density.
VAPOR RETARDERIBARRIER INSTALLATION
General: Following leveling and tamping of drainage course for slabs on grade place vapor retarder /barrier
sheeting with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.
Lao joints 6 inches and seal vapor barrier joints with manufacturers' recommended mastic and pressure -
sensitive tape. Carry up vertical surfaces a minimum of 4 ".
PLACING REINFORCEMENT
General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing
Bars;' for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified.
Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor retarder barrier during reinforcement placement and concreting
operations. Repair damages before placing concrete.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond
with concrete.
Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing
by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect.
Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and
securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations.
Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and
lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
JOINTS
Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so as not to
impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect.
Provide keyways at least 1 -1/2 inches deep in construction joints between walls and footings. Bulkheads
designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs.
lyelm stgl 03300 - 5 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5
Place construction ioints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction
joints except as otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements.
Waterstoos: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated. Install waterstops to forth continuous
diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of
Work. Field- fabricate joints in waterstops according to manufacturers printed instructions.
Isolation Joints in Slabs -on- Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs -on-ground at points of contact between
slabs -on -ground and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other
locations as indicated.
Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants ".
Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs -on- Ground: Construct contraction joints in slabs -on- ground in square
pattern spaced at 16' o.c. maximum in 4" thick slabs and 20' o.c. maximum in 6" thick slabs or to pattern as
shown on drawings. If joint pattern not shown, provide Drawings for Architect's approval, showing joints not
exceeding 16 feet in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column
centerlines, half bays, third bays).
Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strip into fresh
concrete in straight lines until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round
on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris.
Zip Strips are not allowed.
Saw cut joints in concrete, at each control joint location, as soon as the slab will support the weight
of the saw and operator without disturbing the final finish. Normally 2 hours maximum after final
finishing or 150 psi. Joints to be 1/8 inch wide and 1/4 slab depth saw cut.
If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 16 feet in either direction and located to
conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays).
Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants ".
Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies atjoints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat
one -half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS
General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work
that is attached to or supported by wst -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and
directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto.
Equipment Anchor Bolts: Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to templates at correct elevations,
complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.
lyelm etgl 03300 - 6 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6
General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low -VOC, form - coating compound
before placing reinforcement,
Do not allow excess form- coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in -place
concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's
instructions.
Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust - stained steel formwork is not acceptable.
CONCRETEPLACEMENT
Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items
to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades
in setting such work.
General: Comply with ACI 314, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as
specified.
Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in
a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer
while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand - spading,
rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures forconsolidation of concrete complying with ACI
309.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdrew vibrators vertically at
uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators
to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators
into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to
time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other
embedded items without causing mix to segregate.
Placino Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of
construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed.
Consolidate slab concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement, other embedded items and into comers.
Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull Boats or derbies to
smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing
operations,
Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
Cold- Weather Placing: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and
aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and
not more than 80 deg F (27deg C) at point of placement.
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen
subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
belm still 03300 -7 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300 -7
Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical
accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
Hot -Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of
concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as specified.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 deg
F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature
provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen
to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
Cover reinforcing steel with water - soaked burlap if 0 becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will
not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete.
Cool Placing environment as follows: Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before
concrete is placed. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
Use water - reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other
adverse placing conditions, when acceptable to Architect.
Rouah - Formed Finish: Provide a rough - formed finish on formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in
the finished Work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted
by form - facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched, and fins and other
projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to
formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue
final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.
MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES
Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed to view and slab surfaces to be
covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film finish coating system.
After Floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling
when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete
surface by final hand - troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance,
and with surface leveled to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4 inch in 10 feet when checked with a 10 -foot
straightedge, ACI 301 Class B. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied
floor covering system.
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS
Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless
otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein
specified, to blend with in -place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required
to complete work.
lyelm srgl 03300 - 8 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8
General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive mid or hot temperatures. In
hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations
with an evaporation - control material. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding
and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.
Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing.
Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.
Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing, by
moisture- retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified.
Provide moisture curing by following methods
Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water.
Use continuous water -fog spray.
Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water, and
keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges,
with 4 -inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.
Provide moisture - retaining cover curing as follows:
Cover concrete surfaces with moisture - retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest
practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or
adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and
waterproof tape.
Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed interior slabs and to exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as
follows:
Apply curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are
complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in
continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat
areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating
and repair damage during curing period.
Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials
applied directly to concrete.
Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs,
and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place forfull curing period or until forms are removed.
If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.
Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces,
by application of appropriate curing method.
Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture- retaining cover, unless
otherwise directed.
berm stgf 03300 - 9 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-9
REMOVING FORMS
General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar
parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours
after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form- removal operations,
and provided curing and protection operations are maintained.
Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements,
may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design
minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in -place concrete
by testing field -cured specimens representative of concrete location or members.
Form - facino material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have
been arranged to permit removal of form- facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.
REUSE OF FORMS
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged
form- facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form- coating compound as
specified for new formwork.
When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and
laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and securejointtoavoid offsets. Do not use "patched "fors
for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect.
Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing
forms, when acceptable to Architect.
Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2 -1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16
mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets. voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and
bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts
perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the
area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.
For surfaces exposed -to -view, blend white portland cement and standard Portland cement so that,
when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location
to verity mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and
strike -off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
Repair Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be
repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls,
air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fns and other projections on surface, and stains and other
discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out for tie holes, fill with dry-pack mortar, or
precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the concrete's
durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.
lyeim sigl 03300 - 10 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 10
I
1 Repair Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify
2 surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test
3 unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having required
4 slope.
Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability. Surface
defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or
completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spelling, popouts, honeycomb, rock
pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.
Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend
into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to
Architect.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by
cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and
expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 -inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in
contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials
to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend
with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top
of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned
concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place dry-pack before bonding agent has dried. Compact
dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for
at least 72 hours.
Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using specified epoxy
adhesive and mortar.
Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.
General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports. Testing
laboratory shall furnish all equipment for taking samples and testing.
Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following, as directed
by Architect.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94.
Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of
concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.
Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete;
ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each
type of air - entrained concrete.
54 Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 10643est hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F
55 (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of
56 compressive strength specimens.
' 57
' [yelm stgl 03300 - 11 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-11
Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each
compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
laboratory-cured test specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yds.
plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. more than the first 25 cu. yds. of each concrete class
placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and
one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.
When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of concrete,
conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are
used.
Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready Mix Producer, and Contractor
within 24 hours aftertests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name
and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location
of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and
materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 -day tests and 28 -day tests.
Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in -place concrete when test results indicate
specked concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by
Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying
with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable
concrete is verified.
END OF SECTION 03300
[yeim stgl 03300 - 12 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03300-12 1
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 -GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes the following:
Framing with dimension lumber.
Wood furring, grounds, nailers, and blocking.
Sheathing.
Subflooring.
Undedayment.
Caulking and sealant to limit infiltration.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
Division 6 Section "Prefabricated Wood Trusses."
Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not
specified in another Section.
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers" for sealant materials and application.
DEFINITIONS
Rouoh Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise
specified.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
Product Data for the following products:
Underlayment.
Weather- resistive barriers.
Metal framing anchors.
[yelm stg] 06100-1 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-1
Material certificates for dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate
species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the American Lumber Standards
Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.
Wood treatment data as follows, including chemical treatment manufacturefs instructions for handling,
storing, installing, and finishing treated materials:
For each type of preservative- treated wood Product, include certification by treating plant stating type
of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and
compliance with applicable standards.
For waterbome- treated products, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was
reduced to levels indicated before shipment to Project site.
For fire- retardant - treated wood products, include certification by treating plant that treated materials
comply with specified standard and other requirements as well as data relative to bending strength,
stiffness, and fastener - holding capacities of treated materials.
Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating and interpreting test results relative
to compliance of fire- retardant- treated wood products with requirements indicated.
Warranty of chemical treatment manufacturer for each type of treatment.
Research or evaluation reports of the model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
that evidence the following products' compliance with building code in effect for Project.
Weather- resistive barriers.
Metal framing anchors.
Fire- retardant - treated wood.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Single -Source Responsibility for Fire - Retardant- Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fire- retardant- treated
wood product from one source and by a single producer.
DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING
Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack
lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary
coverings.
For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each
bundle to provide air circulation.
PART2- PRODUCTS
LUMBER, GENERAL
Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard;' and with applicable
grading rules of inspection agencies cerfified by ALSC's Board of Review.
lyelm stgl 06100-2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 1
I
1 1 Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
2 following:
WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
W WPA - Western Wood Products Association.
Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency
evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,
moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, oromit
grade stamps and provide grade - compliance certificates issued by inspection agency.
Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content
specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2 -inch nominal
(38 -mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated.
General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative treated or is specified to be treated, comply
with applicable requirements of AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood). Mark each treated item with
the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review.
Corrosion Properties: Preservative treated wood in contact with carbon steel, galvanized steel,
aluminum, copper and red brass shall exhibit corrosion rates less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) per year
when tested in accordance with Fed. Spec. MIL -L- 19140, Paragraph 4.6.5.2.
Do not use chemicals containing chromium or arsenic.
For exposed items indicated to receive stained finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed
through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.
Pressure treat aboveground items with waterbome preservatives to a minimum retention of 0.25lb/cu. ft. (4.0
kg /cu. m). After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture content of 19 and 15 percent,
respectively. Treat indicated items and the following:
All wood members exposed to view requiring a preservative treatment shall receive a non - incised
pressure treatment to refusal.
Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in
connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with
masonry or concrete.
Wood framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade (i.e. joists and beams)..
Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth.
56 Pressure treat wood members in contact with around or freshwater with waterborne preservatives to a
57 minimum retention of 0.40 lb /cu. ft. (6.4 kg /cu. m).
' L"irn sig] 06100 - 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3
Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment, where possible. If cut after treatment, apply field
treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying
and discard damaged or defective pieces.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or
approved:
Wood Preservative - Treated Materials:
Arch Wood Protection (Natural Select)
Chemical Specialties, Inc. (Preserve)
Pr ct: Fire retardant chemical shall provide protection against termites and fungal decay, shall be
registered for use as a wood preservative by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), shall comply
with formulation FR -1 of the current edition of AWPA Standard P17, and shall be free of halogens, sulfates
and ammonium phosphate. Treated wood shall have a flamespread of less than 25 when tested in an
extended 30 minute tunnel test in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL 723. Identify fire- retardant-
treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL; U.S. Testing; Timber Products Inspection, Inc.;
or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Corrosion Properties: Fire retardant treated wood in contact with carbon steel, galvanized steel,
aluminum, copper and red brass shall exhibit corrosion rates less than 1 mil (0.025 mm) per year
when tested in accordance with Fed. Spec. MIL -L- 19140, Paragraph 4.6.5.2.
Testing: Testing on fire performance, strength and corrosion properties of fire retardant treated wood
shall be recognized by issuance of a National Evaluation Services Report.
Fire Retardant Treatment: Manufacturers solution for fire retardant treatment of wood.
Lumber Treatment Standard: Comply with AWPA Standard C20, current edition, and Appendix Hof
AWPA Use Category System.
Plywood Treatment Standard: Comply with AWPA Standard C27, current edition, and Appendix H
of AWPA Use Category System..
Interior Type A (High Temperature): For interior locations, use chemical formulation that produces treated
lumber and plywood with the following properties under conditions present after installation:
Bending strength, stiffness, and fastener - holding capacities are not reduced belowvalues published
by manufacturer of chemical formulation under elevated temperature and humidity conditions
simulating Installed conditions when tested by a qualified independent testing agency.
No form of degradation occurs due to acid hydrolysis or other causes related to treatment.
Contact with treated wood does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.
Exterior Type Use for exterior locations and where indicated.
Inspect each Piece of treated lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces.
[yelm Sig] 06100 - 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4
I
1 1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or
2 approved:
Fire - Retardant- Treated Materials Interior Type A:
Arch Wood Protection (Drycon)
Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.
Fire - Retardant - Treated Materials Exterior Type:
Arch Wood Protection (FRX)
Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.
General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the ALSC National Grading Rule(NGR)
provisions of the inspection agency indicated.
For light framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide) provide the following grade and species:
"Standard" grade
For structural light framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 2 to 4 inches wide), provide the following grade and species:
See Structural Notes
For structural framing (2 to 4 inches thick, 5 inches and wider), provide the following grade and species:
See Structural Notes
For exposed framing lumber provide material complying with the following requirements:
Definition: Exposed framing refers to dimension lumber that is not concealed by other construction
and is indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, i.e. exposed backing for fascia and rake boards.
radio : Material hand - selected at factory from lumber of species and grade indicated below that
complies with "Appearance" grade requirements of ALSC National Grading Rule; issue inspection
certificate of inspection agency for selected material.
For exposed decking, 2 x6 Hem -Fir, Select Structural Grade per WCLIB Std. Grading Rules
No. 17, Pg. 77, Par. 124 -a. Run thru tongue and groove decking pattern. End matched.
For miscellaneous wood trim not included as standing or running trim use Douglas Fir
Industrial Clear "C Industrial' MG per WCLIB No. 17, Pg. 111, Par, 151 -c.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop equipment curbs
and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping, and similar members.
Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown.
55 Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative
56 treatment.
57
I(yelm stg) 06100 - 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-5
Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGRS of any
species. For board -size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or W WPA; No. 2 grade
per SPIB; or Standard grade per NLGA, WCLIB or W WPA of any species.
WOOD -BASED STRUCTURAL -USE PANELS, GENERAL
Structural -Use Panel Standards: Shall be plywood or Oriented Strand Board (OSB). Plywood shall comply
with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" and OSB shall comply with PS 2,
"Performance Standards For Wood -Based Structural -Use Panels ". The framework of PS 1 -95 also allows for
(PRP) Performance Rated Panels.
The following independent grading agencies certify that their member mills are meeting or exceeding the
requirements of PS 1 -95.
(APA) American Plywood Association will carry a "PRP #106 (APA)" stamp. The Engineered Wood
Association "Performance Standard and Policies for Structural Use Panels," Form No. E445.
(PSI /PTL) Professional Service Industries /Pacific Testing Laboratories shall carry a "PRP #231
(PSI /PTL)" stamp.
Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory- marked with PRP trademark of the above
testing laboratories evidencing compliance with grade requirements.
CONCEALED, PERFORMANCE -RATED STRUCTURAL -USE PANELS
General: Where structural use panels are indicated for the following concealed types of applications, provide
APA Performance -Rated Panels of Exposure Durability Classification and Span Rating per Structural Notes
on Drawings.
Wall Sheathing: (Plywood or OSB)
Roof Sheathing: (Plywood Only)
STRUCTURAL -USE PANELS FOR BACKING
Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire - retardant- treated
plywood panels with grade, C -D Plugged Exposure 1, in thickness indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, not
less than 15/32 inch (11.9 mm) thick.
Building Wrap:
Polyethylene sheet, 0.0061 inch thick, formed by spinning continuous strands of fine high density
polyethylene interconnected fibers and bonding them together by heat and pressure; with a moisture
vapor transmission rate of 400 grams /sq. meter /24 firs, per ASTM E 96, procedure B; flame spread
and smoke developed ratings of 5 and 10 per ASTM E 84.
Woven oolvolefin sheet, 0.005 inch thick, with a moisture vapor transmission rate of 70 grams/sq.
meter /24 hrs. per ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and a flame spread not exceeding 25 per ASTM E 84.
[yelm stg] 06100 - 6 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 6
i
1
1
Products. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved:
" Tvvek Housewrap," Fibers Department, Du Pont Company.
"R-Wrap," Simplex Products Division, Anthony Industries, Inc.
Door and Window Penetration Flashing:
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved:
Tvvek Flex Wrap: Is made from a synthetic rubber adhesive and a laminate of polyethylene
film, elastic fiber, synthetic rubber adhesive, polyurethane adhesive, and a top sheet of flash
spunbonded high density polyethylene fibers.
Vvcor Plus: As manufactured by Grace Construction Products, provide Vycer Plus, a self -
adhered flashing composed of two waterproofing materials - rubberized asphalt and cross -
laminated polyethylene.
FASTENERS
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article
for material and manufacture.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity,
provide fasteners with a hot -dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of Type 304 stainless steel.
Nails Wire Brads and Staples: FS FF -N -105.
Power- Driven Fasteners: CABO NER -272.
Wood Screws: ASME 818.6.1.
Lag Bolts: ASME 818.2.1. (ASME B1 8.2.3.13M)
Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563
(ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.
METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity, type, and size indicated and as
follows:
Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code research or evaluation
reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of
metal framing anchors for application indicated with building code in effect for Project.
Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis, and demonstrated by
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M,
Z180) coating designation; structural, commercial, or lock- forming quality, as standard with manufacturer for
type of anchor indicated.
Ibean ug] 06100 - 7 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-7
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Water - Repellent Preservative: NWWDA - tested and - accepted formulation containing 3- iodo-2- propynyl butyl
carbonate (IPBC) as its active ingredient.
PART 3- EXECUTION
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too small to use with
minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.
Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of
furring, milers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction.
AppN field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative - treated lumber and plywood.
Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with
the following:
CABO NER -272 for power - driven staples, P- nails, and allied fasteners.
Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer.
"Table 2304.9.1 — Fastening Schedule" of the (IBC) International Building Code.
Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of
size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish
materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as
required.
Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless -steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground
contact, or in area of high relative humidity.
Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS. BLOCKING. AND SLEEPERS
Install wood grounds, nailers. blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or
attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and level of attached work.
Coordinate locations with other work involved.
Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. Build Into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchorto formwork before
concrete placement.
Install permanent grounds of dressed, preservative- treated, key - beveled lumber not less than 1 -1/2 inches
(38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove
temporary grounds when no longer required.
lyelm stgl 06100 - 8 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-8
General: Arrange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow
face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm
actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs; except single top plate may be used for non -load- bearing
partitions. Nail or anchor plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated.
Construct corners and intersections with 3 or more studs. Provide miscellaneous blocking and framing as
shown and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
Blocking /backing for the termination of facing materials (i.e. gypsum drywall MOO etc.): At intersections of
vertical and horizontal framing and at inside comers of partition framing provide miscellaneous blocking as
required for the backing and attachment of vertical and horizontal facing materials. This is to include all
locations of requiring blocking /backing, either exposed or hidden.
Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width
of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs.
For non -load- bearing partitions, provide double -jamb studs with headers not less than 4 -inch nominal
(89 -mm actual) depth for openings 36 inches (900 mm) and less in width, and not less than 6 -inch
nominal (140 -mm actual) depth for wider openings.
For load- bearing walls, provide double -jamb studs for openings 72 inches (1800 mm) and less in
width, and triple -jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth shown or, if not shown, as
recommended by AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction."
For all mechanical openings within framed walls, the General Contractor shall frame in such openings and
shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor to determine all sizes and locations.
Fire Blocking: Provide from materials and thickness, as required in Chapter 717.2 of the (IBC) International
Building Code, members of same width as wall or partition at the following locations:
In concealed spaces of stud walls and partitions, including furred spaces, at the ceiling and Floor
levels and at 10 -foot intervals both vertical and horizontal. See also Section 717.2.2 of the (IBC)
International Building Code.
At all interconnections between concealed vertical and horizontal spaces such as occur at soffits,
drop ceilings and cove ceilings.
In concealed spaces between stairstringers at the top and bottom of the run and between studs along
and in line with the run of stairs if the walls under the stairs are unfinished.
'53 In openings around vents, pipes, ducts, chimneys, fireplaces and similar openings which afford a
54 passage for fire at ceiling and floor levels, with noncombustible materials.
55
56
' 57
' lyelm stgl 06100-9 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-9
'
1
WOOD FURRING
2
Install
Plumb and level with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance
'3
4
of finish
work.
5
Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install 1 -by -3 -inch nominal- (19-by -63 -mm actual -) size furring at 24
'6
7
inches (610 mm) o.c., horizontally and vertically. Select furring with no knots capable of producing bent -over
6
nails and damage to paneling.
9
10
'
11
WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING
General: Arrange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow
face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm
actual) thickness whose widths equal that of studs; except single top plate may be used for non -load- bearing
partitions. Nail or anchor plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated.
Construct corners and intersections with 3 or more studs. Provide miscellaneous blocking and framing as
shown and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
Blocking /backing for the termination of facing materials (i.e. gypsum drywall MOO etc.): At intersections of
vertical and horizontal framing and at inside comers of partition framing provide miscellaneous blocking as
required for the backing and attachment of vertical and horizontal facing materials. This is to include all
locations of requiring blocking /backing, either exposed or hidden.
Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width
of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs.
For non -load- bearing partitions, provide double -jamb studs with headers not less than 4 -inch nominal
(89 -mm actual) depth for openings 36 inches (900 mm) and less in width, and not less than 6 -inch
nominal (140 -mm actual) depth for wider openings.
For load- bearing walls, provide double -jamb studs for openings 72 inches (1800 mm) and less in
width, and triple -jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth shown or, if not shown, as
recommended by AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction."
For all mechanical openings within framed walls, the General Contractor shall frame in such openings and
shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor to determine all sizes and locations.
Fire Blocking: Provide from materials and thickness, as required in Chapter 717.2 of the (IBC) International
Building Code, members of same width as wall or partition at the following locations:
In concealed spaces of stud walls and partitions, including furred spaces, at the ceiling and Floor
levels and at 10 -foot intervals both vertical and horizontal. See also Section 717.2.2 of the (IBC)
International Building Code.
At all interconnections between concealed vertical and horizontal spaces such as occur at soffits,
drop ceilings and cove ceilings.
In concealed spaces between stairstringers at the top and bottom of the run and between studs along
and in line with the run of stairs if the walls under the stairs are unfinished.
'53 In openings around vents, pipes, ducts, chimneys, fireplaces and similar openings which afford a
54 passage for fire at ceiling and floor levels, with noncombustible materials.
55
56
' 57
' lyelm stgl 06100-9 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-9
FLOOR JOIST FRAMING
General: Install floor joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1 -12
inches (38 mm) of bearing on wood or metal. Attach floor joists as follows:
Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors.
Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as shown or, if not shown, by
using metal joist hangers.
Fire Cuts: At joists built into masonry, bevel cut ends 3 inches (76 mm) and do not embed more than 4 inches
(102 mm).
Frame ooeninas with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers
where span of header exceeds 48 inches (1200 mm).
Do not notch in middle third of foists; limit notches to 1/6 depth ofjoist, 1/3 at ends. Do not bore holes larger
than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate closer than 2 inches (50 mm) from top or bottom.
Provide solid blocking of 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual) thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless
nailed to header or band.
Lao members framing from opposite sides of beams, girders, or partitions not less than 4 inches (102 mm)
or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2 -inch nominal (38 -mm actual)
thickness by depth of joist over supports.
Under iamb studs at openings, provide solid blocking between joist.
Provide bndoing of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches (2438 mm) o.c., between joists
Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel cut 1 -by-4 -inch nominal- (19- by -89 -mm actual -) size
lumber, double- crossed and nailed both ends to joists.
Solid wood bridging 2 inches thick by depth of joist, end nailed to joist
Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturefs written instructions.
RAFTER AND CEILING JOIST FRAMING
Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for
floorjoists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.
Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists perpendicular to
rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to firstjoist or anchor
with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1 -by -8 -inch nominal- (19- by- 184 -mm actual -) size or
2 -by4 -inch nominal- (38- by -89 -mm actual -) size stringers spaced 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c.
crosswise over main ceiling joists.
Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal framing anchors. Double rafters to form
headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut
at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers.
At valleys, provide double - valley rafters of size shown or, if not shown, of same thickness as regular
rafters and 2 inches (50 mm) deeper. Bevel ends ofjack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters.
[yelm atg] 06100 - f 0 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 10
1 At hips, provide hip rafter of size shown or, if not shown, of same thickness as regular rafters and 2
2 inches (50 mm) deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip rafter.
Provide collar beams (ties) as shown or, if not shown, provide 1 -by-6-inch nominal- (19 -by- 140 -mm actual -)
size boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. Locate below
ridge member, at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to Tit roof slope and nail to rafters.
For rated and non -rated assemblies including but not limited to the following:
Ceiling, floor ceiling, roof, roof ceiling, and any other locations indicated or shown on the drawings.
When framing members are to receive a layer or multiple layers of plywood, etc. in exposed and concealed
conditions, and their spacing is greater than 24 inches o.c., the contractor shall apply 2 x stripping at spacings
indicated below.
Space stripping at 16" o.c. max: Apply material with long axis parallel to stripping.
Apply solid blocking between stripping atvertical surfaces and at all opening, i.e. vents, access panels, lights,
etc.
INSTALLATION OF STRUCTURAL-USE PANELS
General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30, "APA
Design /Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural -use panels and applications
indicated.
Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
Subfloorino: Nail to framing.
Sheathing: Nail to framing.
Plywood Backing Panels: Nail to supports.
(BUILDING WRAP)
Cover sheathing with building wrap as follows:
Appiv to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Door and Window Penetration Flashing: Apply as detailed on drawings and as recommended by flashing
manufacturer.
CAULKING AND SEALING
The following openings in the building shall be caulked or otherwise sealed to limit infiltration:
Around door and window casings and rough openings.
56 2. Between exterior wall soleplates and structural floor.
' 57
Ilitelm stg] 06100-11 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
3. At openings for plumbing, electricity, gas lines and ductwork in exterior walls, floor and
ceiling.
4. Where walls and ceiling meet exposed beams and masonry facing.
5. Around interior attic access panels.
6. At the mudsill and in addition to normal sill sealer in conditioned basements.
7. At all other openings in exterior building envelope.
See Section 07900 for the appropriate sealers.
General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to preform tests and observations and to submit reports
as required per Section 01400 - quality Control Services.
Observation for quality control will include the following:
Nailing of plywood diaphragms: Periodic observations.
Nailing of plywood shear walls: Periodic observations.
END OF SECTION 06100
[yelm stgl 06100 - 12
ROUGH CARPENTRY
06100-12
E
' SECTION 06192 - PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
1
PART 1- GENERAL
2
'3
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
'6
7
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
8
9
10
SUMMARY
11
12
Extent and configuration of prefabricated wood trusses is indicated on drawings.
13
14
Types of prefabricated wood trusses include:
15
16
Monophch trusses.
17
'
18
19
DEFINITIONS
20
'21
Prefabricated wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal plate connected members which
22
are fabricated from dimension lumber and which have been cut and assembled prior to delivery to the project
23
site.
24
'
25
26
SUBMITTALS
27
28
Product Data:
Submit fabricator's technical data covering lumber, metal plates, hardware, fabrication process,
29
treatment (if
any), handling and erection.
30
31
32
Shoo Drawing s: Submit shop drawings showing species, sizes and stress grades of lumberto be used: pitch,
span, camber, configuration and spacing for each type of truss required; type, size, material, finish, design
33
values, location of metal connector plates; and bearing and anchorage details.
34
To the extent engineering design considerations are indicated as fabricators responsibility, submit
'35
36
design analysis and test reports indicating loading, section modulus, assumed allowable stress,
37
stress diagrams and calculations, and similar information needed for analysis and to ensure that
38
trusses comply with requirements.
39
40
Shop drawings will be signed and stamped by a structural engineer licensed to practice in the
41
jurisdiction where trusses will be installed.
42
43
Provide Certificate of Conformance from an independenttestmg laboratoryora licensed professional engineer
44
certifying that they have inspected the finished trusses and that all trusses are constructed in conformance
45
46
with the truss design drawings.
47
48
QUALITY ASSURANCE
'49
50
TPI Standards: Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following Truss Plate
51
Institute (TPI) publications:
52
'53
"Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses ".
54
[yeim stB] 06192- 1 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06192-1
Design by Manufacturer: Trusses shall be designed by Connector- plate manufacturer to support all
superimposed dead and live loads indicated, with design approved and certified by a structural engineer
licensed to practice in the jurisdiction where trusses will be installed.
Fabricator's Qualifications: Provide trusses by a firm which has a record of successfully fabricating trusses
similar to type indicated and which complies with the following requirements for quality control:
Fabricator participates in TPI "Quality Assurance Inspection Program" as a licensee authorized to
apply TPI marks to trusses.
Single Source Responsibility for Connector Plates: Provide metal connector plates from a single
manufacturer.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Handle and store trusses with care, and in accordance with manufacturers instructions and TPI
recommendations to avoid damage from bending, overturning or other cause for which truss is not designed
to resistor endure.
Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on -site storage and to avoid delaying work of other
trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
PART2- PRODUCTS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering metal connector
plates which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.
Clary Corporation.
Gang Nail Systems, Inc.
Hydro -Air Engineering, Inc.
Inter -Lock Steel Co., Inc.
Link -Wood Construction Systems.
Lumbermate Company.
Robbins Manufacturing Co.
The Panel -Clip Company.
Tee -Lok Corp.
Truss Connectors of America.
Truswal Systems Corp.
FASTENERS AND ANCHORAGES
Provide size, type, material and finish indicated for nails, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and other anchoring
devices.
lyelm stgl 06192 - 2 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06192 - 2 1
I
1
1
FABRICATION
2
3
Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles and sizes to produce close fitting joints with wood -to -wood
1
4
bearing in assembled units.
5
6
Fabricate metal connectorID ates to size, configuration, thickness and anchorage details required for types
1
7
of joint designs indicated.
8
9
Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and
10
accuracy of assembly with close fitting joints. Position members to produce design camber indicated.
1
11
12
Connect truss members by means of metal connector plates accurately located and securely fastened to each
13
side of wood members by means indicated or approved.
1
14
15
16
PART 3- EXECUTION
17
1
18
19
INSTALLATION
1
20
21
General: Erect and brace trusses to comply with recommendations of manufacturer and the Truss Plate
22
Institute.
23
24
Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical (plumb) and parallel to each other, located accurately at design
1
25
spacings indicated.
26
27
Hoist units in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, applied at
1
28
designated lift points as recommended by fabricator, exercising care not to damage truss members orjoints
29
by out -of -plane bending or other causes.
30
1
31
32
Provide temporary bracing as required to maintain trusses plumb, parallel and in location indicated, until
permanent bracing is installed.
33
34
Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated.
35
1
36
Ins II permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain design spacing, withstand
37
live and dead loads including lateral loads, and to comply with other indicated requirements.
1
38
39
Do not cut or remove truss members.
40
41
1
42
END OF SECTION 06192
1
i
1
1
1 (yelm stg106192 -3 PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 06192.3
I
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY
1
PART 1- GENERAL
2
3
'
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
6
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions
1
7
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
8
9
10
SUMMARY
11
12
This Section includes the following:
13
14
Exterior standing and running trim.
15
16
Interior standing and running trim.
'
17
18
Siding board type.
19
20
Plywood siding,
21
'
22
Plywood soffit.
23
'
24
25
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
26
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry ° for the installation of plywood over wood stripping.
27
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed
'28
29
to view.
30
'
31
32
Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for structural wood decking and framing exposed to view.
33
Division 9 Section "Painting' for priming and back priming of finish carpentry.
34
Definition: Finish carpentry includes carpentry work which is exposed to view, is non - structural, and which
'35
36
is not specified as part of other sections.
37
36
39
SUBMITTALS
40
41
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
42
Specification Sections.
'
43
44
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each Rem of
45
factory- fabricated siding and paneling.
46
47
Samples: Submit the following samples for each species and cut or pattern of finish carpentry.
48
'
49
50
Standing and Running Trim. Fascia and Rake Boards. Two foot long by full board width or molding
width, finished on one side and one edge.
51
52
Plywood Siding: 2' -0" X 2' -0" of specified thickness.
'
53
'
lyeim srgj 06200 -1 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -1
Shoo Drawings: Submit shop drawings with large scale details of all required trim and all Architectural
Woodwork.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency identification:
except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certficate that material has
been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on a concealed surface .
DELIVERY. STORAGE AND HANDLING
Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact
with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and
around stacks and under temporary coverings.
Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements specified for
installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where
environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas.
PRIMING
Work of this Section shall be primed prior to installation as work of Section 09900 - Painting. Coating with
specified materials and under specified conditions may be applied either on site or off site, at Contractors
option. Provide space and heat for priming and storage while prime coats are drying. Painter subcontractor
shall make an adequate quantity of priming material, of applicable types, available to carpenters for priming
job site cut ends and /or edges as the installation work proceeds.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed and
weatherproof, wet -work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and will
maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels through the remainder of construction period.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior finish carpentry only when existing and forecasted
weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturers recommendations and
warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied without exposure to rain, snow,
or dampness.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Warren :
Special Pro act Warranty for Sidino: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer and Installer
agreeing to repair or replace siding that fails in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of siding
beyond normal weathering. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights
the Owner may have against the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
Warranty Period for Factory- Aoolied Finish: 5 years after date of Final Completion.
Warranty Period for Siding (Excluding Finish): 25 years after date of Final Completion.
Lye. sxg106200 -2 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 -2
i
'
1
PART2- PRODUCTS
2
i3
4
MATERIAL STANDARDS
5
Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard;' for lumber and with
i6
7
applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee Board
8
of Review.
9
10
Woodworking Standard: Where indicated for a specific product comply with specified provision of the
11
following:
12
13
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards'.
i
14
15
Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
16
following:
'17
18
NHLA - National Hardwood Lumber Association.
19
20
WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
i
21
22
W WPA - Western Wood Products Association.
23
24
Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection agency
25
evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,
26
moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
27
For exposed lumber, furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece, or
i28
29
omit grade stamps entirely and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection
30
agency.
i32
31
Glued-up Lumber Standard: Comply with PS56.
33
34
Softwood Plywood: Comply with DOC PSI, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood."
35
1
36
37
MATERIALS
'38
39
General.
40
41
Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed or worked and
dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS 20 or to actual sizes and
'42
43
pattern as shown, unless otherwise indicated.
44
'46
45
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and manufacturer's
recommendations for moisture content of finish carpentry and relative humidity conditions existing duringtime
47
of fabrication and in installation areas.
48
49
Lumber for Transparent Finish Stained or Clear): Use pieces made of solid lumber stock.
'
50
51
Lumber for Painted Finish: At Contractor's option, use pieces which are either glued -up lumber or made of
52
solid lumber stock.
'
53
54
For exterior finish carpentry work use glued -up lumber complying with PS 56 for "wet use" and certified so by
55
respective grading and inspecting agency for species and product indicated.
56
'
57
'
[yeim stg] 06200 - 3 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-3
Exterior Finish Carpentry:
Fascia/Rake Boards and Trim (Ply -Trim): For trim in form of boards and worked products, provide lumber
complying with the following requirements including those of the grading agency listed with species.
Product: Ply -Trim as manufactured by Ply -Trim or approved. (1- 8001545 -4454)
Material: Manufactured from high grade exterior plywood with both edges plugged and sealed and
one face sealed and primed.
Texture: Sealed and primed face to be covered with proprietary overlay and pressed to form a
deeply embossed wood grain surface. Both edges to be smooth.
Warranty: Productcarries a 20 -year limited warranty against delamination orstructural failure ofthe
substrate.
Plywood Siding: APA Rated 303 Series
Tvoe: 303 OC (clear) Texture 1 -11
Type: 303- 18-SIW Texture 1 -11
Exposure Durability: Exterior
Thickness: 19/32'
Face: Rough -sawn and unsanded with grooves 1/4" deep by 3/8" wide, spaced at 8" o.c.
Edge: Shiplapped
Miscellaneous Materials:
Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of the type, size, material and
finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed where possible, and
complying with applicable Federal Specifications.
Where finish carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative humidity, provide fasteners
and anchorages with a hot - dipped zinc coating (ASTM A 153).
Screens for Soffit Vents: Provide wire cloth, 18 x 14 mesh of 0.009 diameter stainless steel wire, complying
with FS RR -W -365, Type VII; with black epoxy coating on wire. Paint out exposed framing members flat black
so as not to be seen. Contact: McNichols Co. (800) 237 -3820.
Flashing: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing
materials installed in finish carpentry.
Horizontal Joint Flashing for Siding: Preformed and preprimed galvanized steel Z- shaped flashing.
Sealants: Comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants' for materials required for sealing
siding work.
[yelm stgl 06200 - 4 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-4 1
i
1
i
1
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation, for
a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer.
Prime and backprime, prior to installation, as work of Division 9 - Section 09900, lumber on the exterior of the
building which is to be left exposed.
INSTALLATION. GENERAL
Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately
seasoned, or too small to fabricate with properjointing arrangements.
Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.
Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where
required for alignment.
Scribe and cut finish carpentry to ft adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by
manufacturer.
Anchor finish carpentry work with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required
for a complete installation. Except where pref nished matching fasteners heads are required, use
fine finishing nail for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with colored caulking compound,
and matching final finish where transparent is indicated.
Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm) for plumb and level. Install adjoining
finish carpentry with 1132 -inch (0.8 -mm) maximum offset for flush installafion and 1/16 -inch (1.5-
mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.
Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and running trim
and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed surfaces of
trim and rails.
Finish according to specified requirements.
Refer to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of finish carpentry.
' Iyeim stgl 06200 - 5 FW /SH CARPENTRY 06200-5
FASCIAIRAKE BOARDS AND TRIM (PLY -TRIM
Install using methods and materials per manufacturer's latest recommendations. Use full - length pieces from
maximum lengths of material manufactured. Stagger joints in adjacent and related fascia, rake boards and
trim pieces. Cope at returns and miter at corners to produce tight- fitting joints with full - surface contact
throughout length ofjoint. Use scarf joints for end- to-end joints.
SIDING INSTALLATION
General: Install siding to comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements
Plywood Siding: Install panels with edges overframing or blocking. Nail at6- inch (150 -mm) intervals at panel
perimeter and 12 -inch (300 -mm) intervals at intermediate supports, unless manufacturer recommends other
intervals. Leave 1/16 -inch (1.5 -mm) gap between adjacent panels, unless otherwise recommended by panel
manufacturer. Leave 1/8 -inch (3 -mm) gap at perimeter and openings, unless otherwise recommended by
panel manufacturer.
Seal butt joints at inside and outside corners and at trim locations.
nstall continuous metal flashing at horizontal panel joints with 118 -inch (3 -mm) expansion gap.
ADJUSTING
Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual defects. Where
not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
CLEANING
Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory- applied finishes to restore
damaged or soiled areas.
PROTECTION
Provide final Protection and maintain conditions thatensure finish carpentry is withoutdamage ordelerioradon
at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 06200
beam sig) 06200 - 6 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200 - 6 '
' SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
Lvelm stgl 07160-1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-1
1
PART 1 — GENERAL
2
3
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
t6
7
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
8
9
10
SUMMARY
11
12
This Section includes the following:
13
14
Cold- applied, asphalt emulsion dampproofing.
15
16
17
SUBMITTALS
'
18
19
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
20
Specification Sections.
21
'
22
Product data for each type of product specified, including data substantiating that materials comply with
23
requirements for each dampproofing material specified. Include recommended method of application,
24
recommended primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and recommended protection course.
1
25
26
Certification by dampproofing manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations
27
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
28
'
29
30
QUALITY ASSURANCE
'32
31
Installer Qualffcations: Engage an experienced lnstallerwho has completed bituminous dampproofing similar
33
in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in- service
34
performance.
35
1
36
Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from one source and by
37
a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials only as recommended by manufacturer of primary
38
materials.
39
40
41
PROJECT CONDITIONS
'42
43
Substrate: Proceed with dampproofing only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been
44
completed.
45
46
Weather Limitations:
Proceed with dampproofing only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will
47
permit work
to be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations and warranty requirements.
48
49
50
Ventilation:
ventilation
Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces. Maintain
until dampproofing has thoroughly cured.
51
52
'
53
Lvelm stgl 07160-1 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-1
PART 2— PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may
be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or
approved:
Cold - Applied. Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing:
ChemRex, Inc.; Sonneborn Building Products Div.
Euclid Chemical Co.
Karnak Chemical Corporation.
Koppers Industries, Inc.
Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc.
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
General: Provide products recommended by manufacturer for designated application.
Odor Elimination: For interior and concealed -in -wall uses, provide type of bituminous dampproofing
material warranted by manufacturer to be substantially odor free after drying for 24 hours under
normal conditions.
Cold- Applied, Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofinc: Asphalt -based emulsions recommended bythe manufacturer
for dampproofng use when applied according to the manufacturer's instructions.
Spray Grade: Emulsified asphalt, prepared with mineral-colloid emulsifying agents without fibrous
reinforcement, complying with ASTM D 1227, Type III.
PART 3 — EXECUTION
PREPARATION
Clean substrate of projections and substances detrimental to work; comply with recommendations of prime
materials manufacturer.
Install cant strips and similar accessories as shown and as recommended by prime materials manufacturer
even though not shown.
Protection of Other Work: Do not allow liquid and mastic compounds to enter and clog drains and conductors.
Prevent spillage and migration onto other surfaces ofwork by masking or otherwise protecting adjoining work.
INSTALLATION. GENERAL
Comply with manufacturer's recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated and
where Project conditions require extra precautions to ensure satisfactory performance of work.
lyeim stgl 07160 -2 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160 -2
Application: Apply dampproofing to the following surfaces.
Exterior, below -grade surfaces of exterior concrete or masonry walls in contact with earth or other
backfll.
Outside surface of interior concrete walls which are enclosing interior space. Dampproof to height
of adjacent earth.
Back side of concrete or masonry retaining walls to prevent percolating of water through the wall.
Where indicated on the Drawings.
Cold- Applied Asphalt Damorroofno: For exterior surfaces, provide emulsified asphalt dampproofing
materials.
Bituminous Cant Strips: Install 2 -by -2 -inch (50- by- 50 -mm) cant strip of bituminous grout at base of vertical
dampproofing where it meets horizontal surface.
Apply vertical dampproofinc down walls from finished -grade line to top of footing, extend overtop of footing,
and down a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) over outside face of footing. Extend 12 inches (300 mm) onto
intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when the Project is
completed.
COLD - APPLIED. ASPHALT EMULSION DAMPPROOFING
Sgrav Grade: Brush or spray apply a coat of asphalt emulsion dampproofing at a rate of 4 to 5 gal. /100 sq.
ft., depending on substrate texture, to produce a uniform, dry-film thickness of not less than 15 mils. Apply
in 2 coats, if necessary, to obtain required thickness, allowing time for complete drying between coats.
PROTECTION AND CLEANING
Protect exterior, below -grade dampproofing membrane from damage until backfll is completed. Remove
overspray and spilled materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.
END OF SECTION 07160
I[yelm stg] 07160 - 3 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 07160-3
i
SECTION 07311 — ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART 1- GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
This Section includes asphalt shingles for steep roofs.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
Division 6 Section "Rough Caroentrv' for wood sheathing and framing.
SUBMITTALS
General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections.
Product data for each type of product specified, including details of construction relative to materials,
dimensions of individual components, profiles, textures, and colors.
Samples for verification in the form of 2 full -size units of each type of asphalt shingle indicated showing the
full range of variations expected in these characteristics.
Letter of Certification for rigid insulation as required in Quality Assurance article.
[General Contractor shall submit letter from shingle manufacturer verifying that the roofing contractor is on
their list of approved installers.]
Fire - Test - Response Classification: Where products with a fire- test - response classification are specified,
provide asphalt shingles identical to those tested according to ASTM E 108 or UL 790 and listed by UL or
another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify each bundle of
asphaltshingles with appropriate markings indicating fire- test - response classification of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
Wind - Resistance- TestChamcteristics: Wherewind - resistantasphalt shingles are indicated, provide products
identical to those tested according to ASTM D 3161 or UL 997 and passed. Identify each bundle of asphalt
shingles with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
Comply with the National Roofing Contractors Association 'The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual"
unless indicated otherwise.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer ( "Roofer') to perform shingle roofing work who has
specialized in the installation of roofing systems similar to that required for this project. Installer must also be
a member in good standing with the State and National Roofing Contractors Association,
belm stg] 07311 - 1 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-1
DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened bundles, rolls or containers, with labels intact
Handle and store materials at Project site to prevent water damage, staining, or other physical damage. Store
roll goods on end. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for job -site storage, handling, and
protection.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other
sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for handling,
storage, and protection during installation.
Protect plastic insulation as follows
Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.
Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project site ahead
of installation time.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Substrate: Proceed with shingle work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been
completed.
Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing asphalt shingles only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturers recommendations and warranty
requirements, and when substrate is completely dry.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Warranty
General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by manufacturer agreeing to pay for repair or
replacement of asphalt shingles that fail in materials or manufacturing defects within the specified
warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of asphalt
shingles beyond normal weathering (and guarantee against blow -off in winds of up to 100 MPH),
Warranty Period: Manufacturers standard but not less than 40 years after date of
Substantial Completion.
Installation Warranty: Contractor shall provide a signed 2 -year warranty on installation.
[yeim sigj 07311 - 2 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311 - 2 1
I
1
1
Extra Materials:
2
3
Furnish extra materials described belowthat match products installed, are packaged with protective
4
covering for storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
5
6
Furnish 4 squares (37.16 sq. m) coverage of asphalt shingles, identical to those to be
7
installed, in unbroken bundles.
8
9
10
11
PART 2- PRODUCTS
12
13
ASPHALT SHINGLES
14
'
15
Square -Tab Fiberglass Stno Shinoles, UL Class A: Mineral - surfaced, self - sealing, 3 -tab, fiberglass - based,
16
strip asphalt shingles, complying with ASTM D 3462. Provide shingles with a Class A ire- test - response
17
18
classification that pass the wind - resistance -test requirements of ASTM D 3161.
19
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following or approved:
20
21
XT -30; CertainTeed
22
Royal Sovereign; GAF
23
SG -25; Pabco
24
25
Dura -Seal 204; Malarkey
'Malarkey "Alaskan"
26
27
'100 MPH Wind Warranty
28
'
29
Color: As selected by Architect.
30
31
32
ACCESSORIES
33
34
Ice and Water Guard: Provide SBS modified rubberized asphalt material reinforced to withstand puncture and
35
severestress. Membrane to be tacky on one side (with release film) to provide good bonding to the substrate.
'
36
37
Manufacturer:
38
39
Protecto Wrap's "Rainproof'
40
Mirai Miradri WIP 100
41
Grace "Ice and Water Shield"
42
43
Provide at the following locations, unless noted otherwise on drawings:
44
45
Eaves: Install from lower outer edge of eave up to the line of the inside face of outside wall.
46
47
Roof to Side Wall: Prior to installation of roofing or siding install minimum height of 8 inches
48
onto wall and 10 inches out onto roof sheathing.
49
50
Roof Penetrations: At all penetrations provide fora minimum of 8 inches on vertical surfaces
51
and a minimum of 10 inches out onto roof sheathing.
52
53
Felt Underlavment: Type I, 36 -inch- (914 -mm -) wide, asphalt- saturated unperforated organic felt, complying
54
with ASTM D 226 (No. 15) or ASTM D 4869.
55
56
SBS Underlavment: SBS fiberglass base sheet, complying with ASTM D 4601 - 91 Type II, 39 -318" wide,
'
57
approximately 36 lbs. /square. Parting agent both sides. Manufacturer similar to Malarkey 501, UDL.
Iyelm stg] 07311 - 3 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-3
Asphalt Plastic Cement: For hand tabbing shingles provide nonasbestos fbrated asphalt plastic cement
(flashing cement), complying with ASTM D 4586, Type II.
Nails: Hot -dip galvanized steel, 11 gage, 0.120 -inch- (3 -mm -) diameter barbed shank, sharp - pointed,
conventional roofing nails with a minimum 3/8 -inch- (9.5 -mm -) diameter head and of sufficient length to
penetrate 314 inch (19 mm) into solid decking or at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) through plywood sheathing.
Use electroplated galvanized nails when nailing shingles through the ice and water guard.
Where nails are in contact with flashing, prevent galvanic action by providing nails made from the
same metal as that of the flashing.
Nails (For Nailing SBS Base Sheet): Provide (simplex) round cap roofing nails similar to GRIP TITE as
manufactured by Hoffler Wire Products Co., Inc. 11 gauge annular threaded nails with 1" diameter 20 gauge
flat cap.
Wood Edge Nailers: At roof eaves and rakes provide treated wood nailer units of thickness equal to the rigid
insulation and complying with requirements of "Rough Carpentry" section of these specifications.
Plywood Nailer Over Insulation: Provide 5/8 inch thick APA Rated Sheathing with durability classification of
Exposure 1.
Anchors: Shall be screw type anchors. Minimum penetration shall be 1-1/4" into 2 x 6 decking or5 /8 "beyond
the plywood sheathing.
Ridge Vent: Provide "Premier" as manufactured by Northwest Building Products or approved. Phone 1 -800-
521 -9920. Made from polypropylene and will provide 18 sq. in. /lin. foot of net -free ventilation. It will have
multi -sets of horizontal interior baffles.
Use same product for venting shed roof at vertical wall.
Snowguards: Provide and install Model #40 half -round snowguards as manufactured by Vermont Slate &
Copper Services, Inc. (802 - 253 -0831. To be fabricated from 24 ga. galvalume and finished with Kynar 500.
Color as selected by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine substrate for compliance with requirements for substrates, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting performance of asphalt shingles. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Cover knotholes or other minor
voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with noncorrosive roofing nails.
Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. Do not install
roofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof sheathing have been installed and
are securely fastened against movement.
[yelm stg] 07311 - 4 ASPHALT SHINGLES 07311-4
1
1
INSTALLATION
2
General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations but not less than those
'3
4
recommended by "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual."
5
Fasten asphalt shingles to roof sheathing by hand nailing.
'6
7
8
Ice and Water Guard:
9
Preparation: Remove all dirt, dust or foreign substances that would be detrimental to the adhesion
'10
11
of the membrane to the roof deck.
12
13
Installation: Pull release paper from bottom of membrane while rolling out on deck. Press and roll
'14
membrane in place to assure full adherence to the deck. When joints occur, provide 6" laps at ends
15
and 31W laps at sides. Lay lap joints in shingle fashion to shed water.
16
17
Felt Underlavment on Roof Sheathing: When roof pitch is 4 inches per foot or more, apply one layer of felt
18
underlayment horizontally over entire surface of roof sheathing, lapping succeeding courses a minimum of
19
2 inches, end laps a minimum of 4 inches, and hips and valleys a minimum of 6 inches. Fasten felt with
20
sufficient number of roofing nails or noncorrosive staples to hold underlayment in place until application of
21
shingles.
22
23
SIBS Base Sheet Underlavment on Roof Sheathing: When roof pitch is 4 inches per foot or more, apply one
24
layer of SBS base sheet horizontally over entire surface of roof sheathing, lapping
succeeding courses a
25
minimum of 2 inches, end laps a minimum of 4 inches, and hips and valleys a minimum
of 6 inches. Fasten
26
felt with sufficient number of roofing nails or noncorrosive staples to hold underlayment in place until
27
application of shingles.
28
29
In areas of roof where 2 x 6 decking is exposed on the inside of the building, exercise care to use full depth
30
of decking and yet not allow the fasteners to break through and become exposed on the inside.
'32
31
Flashing: Install metal hashing and trim as indicated and according to details and recommendations of the
33
Asphalt Roofing" section of "The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual,"
34
Snowguards: Install three (3) rows of snowguards on the third, fifth and seventh rows of shingles from the
'35
36
eaves up. Horizontal spacing is 24" o.c. with each row staggered 12" from adjacent row. Place in proper
37
location horizontally with end of strap on roof deck. Anchor through end of strip with two nails or screws of
38
compatible materials (non - corrosive) into roof deck.
39
40
Install asphalt shingles, beginning at roofs lower edge, with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted asphalt
41
shingles with tabs removed and overhanging the eaves 3/4 ". Fasten asphalt shingles in the desired weather
exposure pattern; use number of fasteners per shingle as recommended by manufacturer. Use vertical and
'42
43
horizontal chalk lines to ensure straight coursing.
44
45
Cut and fit asphalt shingles at valleys, ridges, and edges to provide maximum weather protection.
46
Provide same weather exposure at ridges as specified for roof. Lap asphalt shingles at ridges to
47
shed water away from direction of prevailing wind.
48
'
49
50
Use fasteners at ridges of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified.
51
Install asphalt shingles, beginning at roofs lower edge, with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted asphalt
52
shingles with tabs removed and overhanging the eaves 3/4 ". Fasten asphalt shingles in the desired weather
exposure pattern; hand tabbed and using number of fasteners per shingle as recommended by manufacturer
'53
54
to satisfy the 100 MPH wind blow -off guarantee.
55
56
57
When hand tabbing, place the cement as near to the bottom of the shingle tab as possible without exposure
when tab is pressed into cement .
lyelm stgl 07311 - 5 ASPHALT SH(NGLES 07311-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Comply with installation details and recommendations of shingle manufacturer and NRCA Steep Roofing
Manual.
Ridge Vents: Install ridge vents according to manufacturers instructions.
ADJUSTING
Reolace any damaged materials installed under this Section with new materials that meet specified
requirements.
END OF SECTION 07311
[yelm stg] 07311 - 6
ASPHALT SHINGLES
07311-6
iI
Ilyeim stg] 07900 - 1 JOINT SEALERS 07900-1
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS
1
PART 1- GENERAL
2
'3
4
RELATED DOCUMENT
5
6
Drawingsand general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
7
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
8
9
10
SUMMARY
11
12
Extent of each form and type ofjoint sealer is indicated on drawings. If not indicated, provide the properjoint
13
sealer from the selection below.
14
15
This Section includes joint sealers for the following locations:
16
17
Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below.
18
19
Joints between different materials listed above
20
Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows
21
Other joints as indicated
22
23
Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces as indicated below:
24
25
Perimeterjoints of exterior openings where indicated
26
Perimeter joints
between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows
27
Other joints as indicated
28
'
29
Related Sections:
30
'31
32
Division 3 Section "Cast -In -Place Concrete' for sealing of expansion joints in concrete slabs.
33
Division 6 Section "Rough Caroentrv"for sealing of joints to limit infiltration.
34
35
36
SYSTEM PERFORMANCES
37
Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight
'38
39
continuous seal without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
40
41
SUBMITTALS
'42
43
44
Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint
45
46
preparation and joint sealer application.
47
48
Ilyeim stg] 07900 - 1 JOINT SEALERS 07900-1
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single
manufacturer for each different product required.
DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about
manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period foruse, pot life, curing time, and mixing
instructions for multicomponent materials.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers'recommendations to prevent their deterioration
or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions:
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer
manufacturers.
When joint substrates are wet due to rein, frost, condensation or other causes.
Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths are less than
allowed byjoint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.
Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants capable of
interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
Sequence installation of joint sealers to occur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after completion of
waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Guarantee.
Contractor shall guarantee his sealant installation to provide a watertight and weathertight application
for a period of five years.
Contractor shall also provide a written warranty signed by sealant manufacturer guaranteeing his /her
product against defects or failures for a period of five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
MATERIALS GENERAL
Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one
another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
[yeim srg] 07900 - 2 JOWT SEALERS 07900-2
I
11
2
3
4
5
6
'7
8
9
10
' 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
118
19
20
'21
22
23
24
' 25
25
27
28
29
30
31
'32
33
34
35
' 36
37
38
39
40
41
42
' 43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's standard colors.
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
Elastomedc Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of
base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for Type,
Grade, Class, and Uses.
Multi -Part Nonsaa Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with the
following requirements for Uses:
Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
Multi -Part Nonsaa Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with the
following requirements for Uses:
Uses T, M. G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved.
Multi -Part Nonsaa Urethane Sealant for Use NT:
"Chem -Calk 500 ", Bostik Construction Products Div.
"Vulkem 922" Mameco International, Inc.
"Dinatrol II Pecora Corp.
"Permapol RC -2 "; Polymeric Systems Inc.
"Sikaflex -2c NS "; Bike Corp.
"Sonolastic NP 2 "; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products Inc.
Multi -Part Nonsaa Urethane Sealant for Use T:
"Vulkem 227" Mameco International, Inc.
"Dynatred "; Pecora Corp.
"PSI 270" Polymeric Systems Inc.
"THC- 901 ", Tremco Inc.
"SL -2'; Sonneborn Building Products Div., Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc.
MISCELLANEOUS JOINT SEALANTS
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,
nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic rubber sealant recommended forsealing interior concealed joints to reduce
transmission of airborne sound.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved:
Acoustical Sealants for Concealed oints:
"BA -98"; Pecora Corp.
"Tremco Acoustical Sealant". Tremco Inc.
iheim stg] 07900 - 3 JOINT SEALERS 07900-3
JOINT SEALANT BACKING
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are non - staining; are compatible with joint
substrates, seatents, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant
manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
Plastic Foam Joint - Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible,
nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below; nonabsorbent to water and gas; and of size, shape and
density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
Closed -cell polyethylene foam, unless otherwise indicated, subject to approval of sealant
manufacturer, for cold- applied sealants only.
Bond - Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where
such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self- adhesive tape where applicable.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to
joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealer- substrate tests and field tests.
Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to
manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent
nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant
adhesion or in- service performance.
Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for
joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not
proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with
recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements:
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer,
including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant
adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; oldjoint sealers; oil; grease; waterproofing; water
repellents; water; surface dirt, and frost.
Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate
surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these
methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers.
Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing outjoints
with oil -free compressed air.
jyeim stg] 07900-4 JOINT SEALERS 07900-4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile; and other nonporous surfaces
by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or
leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer
based on preconstruction joint sealer - substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint
sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage
or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which
otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to
remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS
General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of joint
sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.
Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint
sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated.
Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:
Install joint- fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position
required to produce the cross - secfional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative tojointwidths
which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
Do not leave gaps between ends of joint - fillers.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint - fillers.
Remove absorbent joint - fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and
replace with dry material.
Install bond breaker tape between sealants andjoint - fillers, compression seals or back ofjoints where
adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure.
Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and
fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing
uniform, cross - sectional shapes and depths relative tojoint widths which allow optimum sealant movement
capability.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning of curing begins,
tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint.
Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant
manufacturer.
Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 6A in ASTM C 962, unless otherwise indicated.
1yelm stgl 07900 - 5 JOINT SEALERS 07900-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
CLEANING
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur.
PROTECTION
Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from
damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut
out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to
product joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 07900
lyelm stg] 07900 - 6
JOINTSEALERS
07900- 6 1
I
SECTION 08111- STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
1
PART 1- GENERAL
2
3
'
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
6
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division
1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
'7
8
9
10
11
SUMMARY
12
This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance with SDI Recommended Standards:
13
14
Doors: Flush, hollow or composite construction standard steel doors for interior and exterior
15
locations.
16
17
18
Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, mullions, interior glazed panels, and
other interior and exterior openings of following type:
19
20
Welded unit type
21
'
22
Assemblies: Provide standard steel door and frame assemblies as required for the following:
23
24
Thermal rated (insulated)
'25
26
Provide factory primed doom and frames to be field painted.
27
28
Painting primed doors and frames is specified in Division 9 Section Painting.
'
29
30
Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 Section.
31
32
Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry construction is specified in Division 4.
33
34
35
SUBMITTALS
36
37
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
38
Sections.
39
40
Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials,
41
dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, profiles, and finishes.
'
42
43
Shoo drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of
44
each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and
45
installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and
46
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
47
48
Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as
150
49
those on contract drawings.
51
Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
52
53
'
54
tyelm Sig] 08111- 1 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-1
UALITY ASSURANCE
Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications Standard Steel
Doors and Frames" ANSI A 250.8 /SDI- 100 -98 and as herein specified.
Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are identical to door and frame assemblies
whose fire resistance characteristics have been determined per NFPA252 -95 and which are labeled on both
the door and frame and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, Warnock Hersey, or other testing and inspecting
organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
Glazed openings, other than doors or ducts, in one -hour rated corridors, shall be labeled for a fire protection
rating of at least three - fourths hours and shall include an affixed label on frame. The total area of all openings,
other than doors, in any portion of an interior corridor shall not exceed 25 percent of the area of the corridor
wall of the room which it is separating from the corridor.
DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver doors and frames cardboard - wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage.
Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory- finished doors and frames.
Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished
items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace
damaged items as directed.
Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4- inches high wood blocking.
Avoid use of non - vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard
wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 114- inches spaces between stacked
doors to promote air circulation.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Warren : Submit door manufacturer's two -year warranty, from date of substantial completion, signed by
Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors or doors that do not
conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards.
PART2- PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standard steel doors and frames by one of
the following:
Standard Steel Doors and Frames:
Ceco Corp
Curries Company
North Central Supply, Inc.
Stiles
Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.
[yeim stg] 08111 - 2 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-2 1
I
1
MATERIALS
2
Hot - Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel, pickled and oiled, complying with
'3
4
ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568.
5
6
Cold - Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568.
7
8
Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc - coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with
9
ASTM A 653, or drawing quality, ASTM A 642, hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653, with
10
11
G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized.
12
Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 -gage sheet steel; G60 galvanized where used with
13
galvanized frames.
14
15
Inserts. Bolts. and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exteriorwalls,
16
hot-dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
17
18
Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication.
19
20
Primer: Clean, etch-pretreat and apply one coat, minimum one mil dryfilm thickness, of rust- inhibitive
enamel or paint, either air -drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying
'21
22
with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
23
Steel Doors and Frames" Apply to both exposed and concealed surfaces and their accessories.
24
25
Accessories i.e. metal frame for light opening in door.
'
26
Plastic Filler: Two -part fiberglass reinforced filler similar to Bondo or approved.
27
28
Structo -Lite Gypsum Door Frame Packing: (Interior door frames only) Provide Structo-Lite gypsum plaster
29
30
or approved which complies with ASTM -C28.
31
Grout for Exterior Frames: Comply with ASTM C 476. Use grout of consistency indicated or, if not otherwise
32
indicated, of fine consistency, at time of placement that will completely fill spaces intended to receive grout.
33
34
35
DOORS
36
37
Provide metal doors of SDI grades and models specified below or as indicated on drawings or schedules:
38
39
Interior /Exterior Doors: ANSI /SDI -100, Grade III, extra heavy -duty, Model 1, full flush — with seam
40
edge. Minimum 16 -gage cold - rolled sheet steel faces. Insulate exterior doors.
41
42
Exterior /Interior Doors: ANSI /SDI -100, Grade III, extra heavy -duty Model 5, flush panel —Stile and
'
43
rail composite construction. Minimum 16-gage galvanized steel faces. Insulate exterior doors.
44
45
FRAMES
'46
47
48
Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, of types and styles
'
49
50
as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
51
Fabricate frames with full mitered and welded corners.
52
53
Fabricate interior frames of 16 -gage cold - rolled furniture steel.
54
55
Form exterior frames from 14 -gage hot - dipped galvanized steel.
'
56
[yelm stg] 08111 - 3 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-3
Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of
single -door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double - door frames.
FABRICATION
Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle.
Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be
permanently factory- assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with
ANSI /SDI -100 requirements.
Joints: The width of all exposed joints at the intersection of frame members shall not exceed 1164"
(.015 ") maximum. Joints exceeding this limit shall be filled with the specified plastic filler and sanded
smooth to flush out with surface of frame.
Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard honeycomb, polyurethane, polystyrene, unitized steel
grid, vertical steel stiffeners, or rigid mineral fibercore with internal sound deadener on inside offace
sheets where appropriate in accordance with SDI standards. (Exterior doors insulated).
Clearances: Not more than 118 inch atjambs and heads except between non -fire -rated pairs of doors
not more than 114 inch. Not more than 314 inch at bottom.
Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of nonflush units, from only cold- rolled
steel.
Fabricate door edges with exposed hairline seam of uniform width located on center of door edge.
Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either
cold - rolled or hot - rolled steel. (Fabricator's option.)
Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel in accordance with SDI -112. Provide
top flush edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16 -gage
inverted steel channels. Recessed space between faces, at top of door, not acceptable.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws
and bolts.
Thermal- Rated(insulating) Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, provide
doors fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C 236
or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide thermal -rated assemblies with U factor of 0.24 Btu /(hr x sq R x
deg F.) or better.
Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware in accordance
with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable
requirements of ANSI Al 15 Series Specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface- applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface- applied
hardware may be done at project site. Provide 10 gage reinforcement for all hardware; include reinforcement
for closers on frames whether closers are scheduled or not, and plasterguards at strike pockets. Welding of
hinges to frames or doors not permitted.
Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in locations listed in SECTION08700
— FINISH HARDWARE. If not indicated in the Finish Hardware then, in accordance with "Recommended
Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames," published by Door and Hardware
Institute.
lyeim stg] 08111 - 4 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-4
I
Shoo Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized
2
surfaces.
'3
4
Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and otherforeign materials before application
5
of paint.
6
7
Apply shoo coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to
8
receive finish paint.
9
'
10
11
After welding of galvanized steel, clean and grind welds as necessary, and apply high zinc dust
contentpaintfor regalvanizing welds, complyingwith the Military Spec. MIL-P-21035 (Ships)orSSPC-
12
Paint -20.
13
14
Apply asohaltemulsion undiluted, to all concealed surfaces offrames in showeranddrying areasand
15
exterior frames. This is in addition to the prime coat.
16
17
18
PART 3- EXECUTION
19
20
21
INSTALLATION
22
23
General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with final shop drawings,
'
24
25
manufacturer's data, and as herein specified.
26
Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI- 105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames,"
27
unless otherwise indicated.
28
29
Interior Frames: In all interior wood and steel stud walls or existing masonry walls, pack solid the
30
head and jambs of all newly installed hollow metal door frames with Structo-Lite Gypsum. When
31
integral sidelites are a part of the door frame assembly creating mullions, pack only the perimeter
'32
framework of the overall frame assembly. Do not pack the inclosed interior mullions. Relites alone
33
do not receive packing. In gypsum wallboard walls, protect the exposed wallboard from excess
34
moisture.
35
36
Exterior Frames: Solid grout the perimeter head and jambs of all newly installed hollow metal door
37
frame assemblies at all exteriorwalls. Provide wood or styrofoam filler materials in "doorstop "recess
38
to promote easier drilling for weatherstrip installation. Seal all joints between frame and wall surface
39
to prevent loss of grout, bulging, uneven or exposed grout surfaces.
40
41
Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specked in ANSUSDI -100.
42
43
Install fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA Standard No. 80
44
45
'46
ADJUST AND CLEAN
47
48
Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat
49
and apply touch -up of compatible air -drying primer.
'
50
51
Final Ad ustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged
52
and in complete and proper operating condition.
53
54
55
ENO OF SECTION O8111
1
'
[yelm stgl 08111-5 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-5
I
'
SECTION 08360 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
'
1
PART 1- GENERAL
2
13
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
6
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
7
Division -1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
8
9
10
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
11
12
Extent of sectional overhead doors is shown on drawings.
13
'
14
15
QUALITY ASSURANCE
16
Provide each sectional overhead door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including frames,
'17
18
sections, brackets, guides, tracks, counterbalance mechanisms, hardware, operators and installation
19
accessories, to suit the openings and head room allowable.
20
'21
Unless otherwise acceptable to Architect, furnish sectional overhead door units by one manufacturer for entire
22
project.
23
Inserts and Anchorages:
Furnish inserts and anchoring devices which must be set in concrete or built into
'24
25
masonry for installation
of units. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of
26
anchorage devices. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
27
'28
Wind Loading: Design and reinforce sectional overhead doors to withstand 20 It. per sq. ft, wind loading
29
'a
pressure.
30
'
31
32
SUBMITTALS
33
34
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, roughing -in diagrams, and installation instructions for
35
each type and size of overhead door. Include manufacturer's operating instructions and maintenance data.
36
37
Shoo Drawings: Submit shop drawings for special components and installations which are not fully
38
39
dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data.
40
41
PART2- PRODUCTS
'42
43
44
MANUFACTURER
'46
45
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
47
48
Kinnear, Div. Harsoo
49
Northwest Door, Inc.
50
Overhead Door Co.
51
Raynor Manufacturing Co.
'53
52
54
lyelm stgl 08360 - 1 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360-1
DOOR SECTIONS
All door sections shall be roll - formed from 20 -gauge hot -dipped galvanized steel with integral reinforcing ribs
consisting of six longitudinal ribs and two flat bottom W grooves. Meeting rails shall have double- rabbeted
interlocking joints to provide weathertight closure. Interlocked rails shall function as integral struts and sure
alignment with the full width of each section. When required, applied steel struts shall be bolted to the inside
of sections. All end and intermediate stiles shall be cut, shaped, and welded to the contour of the door
sections and provide a total of 2" thickness. Doors shall have 16 -gauge stiles.
STEEL SECTIONS
Construct door sections from galvanized structural quality carbon steel sheets complying with ASTM A 446,
Grade A, or ASTM A 526, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, and a minimum G90 zinc coating
complying with ASTM A 525.
Steel Sheet Thickness: 20- gauge.
Fabricate sections from a single sheetto provide units not more than 2N'high, and nominal 2" deep. Meeting
rails shall have double- rabbeted interlocking joints to provide weathertight closure. Interlocking rails shall
function as integral struts and assure alignment with the full width of each section.
Enclose open section with 16 ga. galvanized steel channel end stiles welded in place. Provide intermediate
stiles, cut to door section profile, spaced at not more than 48" o.c. and welded in place.
Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle conforming to bottom section profile.
Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcing, as required by door width and design
wind loading. Provide galvanized steel bars, struts, trusses or strip steel, formed to depth, and bolted or
welded in place.
Insulate inner core of steel sections with manufacturer's polyurethane foam type insulation.
Enclose insulation with manufacturer's standard 26 gauge galvanized steel sheet secured to door
panel.
Finish door sections as follows:
Steel sections shall be bonderized phosphate treated, baked -on epoxy base coat and white polyester
top coat on exterior and interior door faces. All door edges shall be prime painted. Finish painting
shall be as noted in Section 09900.
TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES
Tracks: Provide manufacturer's standard galvanized 3" steel track system. Provide complete track assembly
Including brackets, bracing and reinforcing for rigid support of ball bearing roller guides, for required door type
and size. Slot vertical sections of track at 2" o.c. for door drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle
from vertical, or otherwise design to ensure tight closure atjambs when door unit is closed. Weldor bolt to
track supports.
Track Reinforcement and Supports: Provide galvanized steel track reinforcement and support members.
Secure, reinforce and support tracks as required for size and weight of door to provide strength and rigidity,
and to ensure against sag, sway, and detrimental vibration during opening and closing of doors.
[yeim stgl 08360 - 2 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360-2
1
1
1
1
Support and attach tracks at opening jambs with brackets or continuous angle welded to tracks and attached
2
to wall. Support horizontal (ceiling tracks) with continuous angle welded to track and supported by
laterally - braced attachments to overhead structural members at curve and end of tracks.
'3
4
5
Weather Seals: Provide continuous rubber, neoprene, or flexible vinyl adjustable weatherstrip gasket at tops
and compressible astragal on bottoms of each overhead door.
'6
7
8
In addition, provide continuous flexible seals at door jamb edges for a fully weathertight installation.
9
'10
11
HARDWARE
12
13
Provide heavy -duty, rust - resistant hardware, with galvanized or cadmium- plated or stainless steel fasteners,
14
to suit type of door.
15
16
Rollers: Provide heavy -duty rollers, with steel ball bearings in case- hardened steel races, mounted with
varying projections to suit slope of track. Provide roller tires to suit size of track (3" diameter for 3" track) and
'17
18
as follows:
19
20
Case - hardened steel tires, for normal installations.
21
'
22
Locking:
23
24
25
Provide interior slide lock engaging track with provision for padlock.
26
Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring - loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cam plate,
27
and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks.
'28
29
Locking Bars'. Full -disc Cremone type, both jamb sides, operable from inside and outside.
30
'
31
32
Lock cylinder is specified in another Division 8 Section.
33
34
COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISMS
35
'
36
Torsion Spring: Hang door assembly for operation by torsion spring counterbalance mechanism, consisting
37
of adjustable tension tempered steel torsion springs mounted on a case - hardened steel shaft, and connected
38
39
to door with galvanized aircraft type lift cable.
40
Provide cast aluminum or grey iron casting cable drums, grooved to receive cable. Mount counterbalance
41
mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball - bearing brackets at each end of shaft with one additional
42
mid -point bracket for shafts up to 16' long and 2 additional brackets at 1 /3- points to support shafts over 16'
43
long, unless closer spacing recommended by door manufacturer.
44
45
Include a spring - loaded steel or bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assemblyon each side, designed
'46
to stop door automatically if either cable breaks. Provide either a compression spring or leaf spring bumper
47
installed at end of each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.
48
49
50
MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
51
52
Push-up Ooeration: Provide lift handles and pull rope for raising and lowering doors, operating with not more
53
than 25 -lbf (111 -N) lift or pull.
54
55
1
IYelm stgl 08360 - 3 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08360-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb and head mold stops,
anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's
instructions and as herein specified.
Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24" o.c. Hang horizontal track from structural
overhead framing with angle or channel hangers, welded and bolt - fastened in place. Provide sway bracing,
diagonal bracing, and reinforcing as required for rigid installation of track and door operating equipment.
Coordinate with electrical.
Upon completion of installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate
easily, free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.
END OF SECTION 08360
lyelm stgl 08360 - 4 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS
08360 -4 1
I
'
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
1
PART 1- GENERAL
2
3
4
RELATED DOCUMENTS
5
6
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division -1
'7
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
8
9
10
STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
'
11
12
Except as hereinafter specified, for materials and workmanship, conform to the "Architectural Painting
13
Specification Manual' hereinafter referred to as "MPI," as published by The Masters Painters and Decorators
14
Association,
15
16
Inspection Service: As provided by the Owner, the inspection service shall be an independent
'17
18
inspector or inspection agency to provide the inspection services as detailed in the "MPI" and file
reports of finding to Architect. The cost of such inspection services shall be paid by the Owner,
19
20
Notify Inspection Agency at least 10 full working days prior to starting work under this section. Allow
'21
full access to the work and give full cooperation at all times with the Inspection Agency in the
22
performance of its duties of inspecting and testing the work. Painting contractor to repair all
23
destructive testing sites.
24
25
Warranty: Provide a two -year warranty covering painting finishing work and materials which are
26
inspected and found to be in compliance with the standards of the MPI Manual.
27
'28
29
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
30
31
Accent: Approximately 5% or less of total area will consist of "medium to deep colors" which may require one
'32
additional coat above those specified for custom or premium finishes. This accent is in addition to any accent
33
specified in graphics application.
34
35
Extent of Painting: As scheduled and indicated on the drawings, or unless noted otherwise, all new surfaces
36
on the total exterior and interior of all buildings of this project shall be prepared, painted, and finished as
37
described in the following contents of this Section 09900. Exceptions to this rule are natural finishes of
38
materials specifically noted below in paragraph "Surfaces Not To Be Painted."
39
40
Where surfaces and materials have not been scheduled or noted for paint finish, paint with similar
41
material and number of coats as on similarly scheduled or noted surface.
42
43
Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop - priming and surface
44
treatment specified under other sections of work.
45
'46
Surfaces Not To Be Painted:
47
48
Pre- Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory- finishing or
49
50
installer- finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) roofing, brick, glass, plastic
laminate toilet enclosures, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework, and finish
51
mechanical and electrical equipment, including sprinkler heads, light fixtures, switchgear and
52
distribution cabinets.
53
Ihelm stit 09900 -1 PAINTING 09900 -1
Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls
or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas,
utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.
Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless
steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting.
Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and
electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motorand fan shafts
will not require finish painting.
Do not Paint over any code- required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual,
or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
Followino categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications.
Shoo Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under
various sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and similar items.
Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as architectural woodwork,
wood casework and shop - fabricated or factory-built mechanical and electrical equipment or
accessories is included under other sections of these specifications.
Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and
16, respectively. For ductwork and miscellaneous electrical items to be painted see "Surfaces to be Painted'
in this specification section.
"Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains,
sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
Records of Paints Used: Contractor shall retain in good condition all paint schedules, marked plans and paint
samples used forjob quality and color control. These are to be turned over to the Owner atthe end of the job.
COLOR SCHEDULES which are provided to the Contractor are frequently, due to the Contractors
preference of paint supplier, "crossed over'vdth colors being matched by another paintsupplier (other
than the supplier whose colors were specified).
Since it is not possible to predict what supplier and therefore which product numbers will be used to
complete a job, the color schedule (master) has extra blanks under each color for the insertion of
product information which must be supplied by the paint contractor when a scheduled color may have
to be mixed in more than one product type to paint different surfaces.
For example: Walls are scheduled to be painted color Y'. If metal louvers set in these walls require
a different product type other than the type scheduled for the walls, use the blank space under 'Y' in
the schedule to record the paint product and its number, thereby facilitating the Owner's purchase of
the proper product when maintenance is required.
See sample at end of this section
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Single Source Resoonsibiliri: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer
as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided
to ensure compatibility of total coatings systems for various substrates. Upon request from other trades,
lyeim stgl 09900 - 2 PAINTING 09900-2
1 furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats
2 are used.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data Submit manufacturers technical information including paint label analysis and application
instructions for each material proposed for use.
Samples: Prior to beginning work, Architect will furnish cofor schedule for surfaces to be painted. Use
representative colors when preparing samples for review. Paint contractor shall allow adequate lead time for
a ten - working -day approval process. This allows time for color adjustments, site approvals and required sign -
offs of submittals.
Submit samples on 8 -1/2 inches x 11 inches index weight stock. Provide 3 samples of each color
and material.
Provide the following information on all bmshouts sent:
JOB NAME
MANUFACTURER
COLOR#
COLOR NAME
MODIFICATIONS TO FORMULA (IF REQUIRED TO MATCH ANOTHER
MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCT)
'32
31
PRODUCT#
33
Mail samples to be approved to:
34
35
ERICKSON McGOVERN, me
36
Attn: Shenon Porter
37
120 South 131st Street
38
Tacoma, WA 98444
i
39
(Telephone: 253- 531 -0206)
Samples for wood surfaces: Samples for surfaces to be stained or clear finished shall be submitted
on no less than 6 inch lengths of material representative of the surface to be stained and /or
clearcoated. Three samples required.
Provide the following information onto the backs of samples:
■ 47 1) Paint manufacturer name
48 2) Stain color, type, product number
49 3) Percentage of modification if formula is decreased or increased to achieve a
50 specified level of transparency
51
52 Glulams and other large items shall receive small sample patches of color in inconspicuous areas
'53 at the jobsite before coating of entire surface if approved, unless approval is waived in writing by the
54 Architect or consulting representative.
56 UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL PAINT APPLICATION BE PERMITTED WITHOUT
57 SPECIFIED SAMPLE APPROVAL. ANY PRODUCT APPLIED WHICH IS NOT ACCORDING TO
tyeim stg] 09900 - 3 PAINTING 09900-3
SPECIFICATIONS AND SIGNED OFF FOR PROPER COLOR WILL BE SUBJECT TO REMOVAL
AND REPAINT AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.
On concrete masonry, provide two 4 -inch square samples of masonry for each type of finish and
color, defining filler, prime and finish coat.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturers
name and label.
Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage of paint
in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Protect from freezing where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and
waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected
from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints.
JOB CONDITIONS
Apply water -base aD Inte only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures
are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), unless otherwise permitted by
paint manufacturers printed instructions.
Apolv solvent- thinned ao ints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F (35 degrees C), unless otherwise
permitted by paint manufacturers printed instructions.
Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85 %, or to damp or wet
surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturers printed instructions.
Painting may be confinued during inclementweather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed
and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying
periods.
General contractor to supply adequate ventilation at all times during painting application.
Electrical contractor to supply adequate lighting at all times during painting application.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
Extra Paint: Provide 1 gallon of each type and color of paint and finish used. Label and store where directed.
Cans to be new and unopened.
Extramaterial: Provide for owner a minimum of one un- opened quart of each color for narrow stripes
and one un- opened gallon for wide stripes.
lyeim stgl 09900 - 4 PAINTING 09900-4 1
PART2- PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved:
Benjamin Moore
Cl Dulux
Sherwin- Williams
MATERIALSIMANUFACTURERS
Unless otherwise specified conform to Standards of MPI for materials; this includes paint, enamel, fillers and
related paint products and materials not specifically indicated, but required for prime, intermediate and finish
coats.
MATERIALS LISTS
Submit complete and detailed list by MPI Product No. with appropriate product trade name and number, of
materials proposed for use on the work; NO EXCEPTIONS. Submit letter from manufacturer or
manufacturer's representative accompanying list staling that proposed materials are first grade of types
specified and best of their respective kinds and suitable forthe intended purposes. Nosubstitutionspermitted
after approval of material list. Obtain Architect's approval of materials before ordering material.
Proorietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products of
named manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSPECTION
Applicator mustexamine areas and conditions underwhich painting work is to be applied and notify Contractor
in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Applicator.
Existing painted surfaces to be repainted shall be examined by the applicator so as to determine the cost for
repainting due to the extent of deterioration and preparation needed. Include costs in Base Bid proposal.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to
formation of a durable paint film.
Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any
particular area.
SURFACE PREPARATION
General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures to new and existing surfaces in accordance with
MPI and paint manufacturer's instructions.
ly.ni stgl 09900-5 PAINTING 09900-5
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or existing paint or remove and reprime as required.
Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with
substrates primed or painted by others.
Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar
items in place and not to be finish- painted, or provide surface - applied protection prior to surface
preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of hems and
adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items.
Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that dust and
other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly - painted surfaces.
MATERIALS PREPARATION
Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturers directions.
Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and
residue.
Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.
APPLICATION
General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best
suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
Priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop - priming and surface treatment specified under
other sections of work.
Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop -primed and touch -up painted, unless
otherwise indicated.
Transition Coat: When a system is wiled for over a previous coating with which it is not entirely compatible
(by either its chemical type or condition), a special type of primer may be required to assure good adhesion
and "tying° the new system to the old.
Prime Coats: Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been
prime coated by others.
Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in
first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn - through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
Soot Primina: Items that have been factory primed or shop primed and are damaged in shipment or during
the construction process may require spot priming where indicated in paint schedule. Paint contractor shall
verify that the spot primer specified is compatible with the shop primer applied during the fabrication process.
Prime coat to be applied prior to and after application of sprayed -on texture (see Section 09250).
Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.
Paint colors surface treatments and finishes are indicated in "schedules" of the contract documents.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, retreated or otherwise
prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
[yelmstg] 09900 -6 PAINTING 09900 -6
Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to pennit proper drying. Do not rewat until paint
has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and
application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate,
to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating
manufacturer.
Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint
film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges,
comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of fiat surfaces.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish,
color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or
other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
Vary color of successive paint and enamel coats to a distinguishable difference but similar to finish coat.
Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or vamish coat.
Stipple Enamel Finish: Rolland redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling
such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks or other surface imperfections. Provide samples for approval.
Spray Paint Application: Surfaces coated by spraying method shall be backrolled immediately after application
to redistribute paint film fora more consistent and even coverage. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps,
irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.
Completed Work: Painter responsible for improper workmanship or misuse of finishing materials; refinish at
Painter's expense and leave in first class condition, as approved by Architect. Surfaces damaged after
painting and decorating is completed shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor and repaired at
General Contractors expense to condition approved by Architect
Coating application prior to installation: For exterior wood siding, standing and running trim, i.e. fascia, rake
boards or other miscellaneous type of finish wood trim, apply a coat or primer or stain, dependent upon
specified finish, to all surfaces and cut ends which will be concealed after installation.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces
behind permanently- fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment.
Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.
Finish doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated
CLEAN -UP AND PROTECTION
Clean -Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at
end of each work day.
Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint- spattered surfaces. Remove spattered
paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise damage finished
surfaces.
Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and
finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to
Architect.
(yaim stgl 09900 - 7 PAINTING 09900-7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly- painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.
At completion of work of other trades, touch -up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
General: Work specified herein is in ADDITION to shop coats called for under various other Divisions and
Sections.
SURFACE
FINISH
CO
PRODUCT
SYSTEM
REMARKS
MATERIAL L
COATS
NO.
CODE
Exterior Non -Cedar
1 coat
#6
Waterborne Primer
Wood
Ext 6.2M
2 coats
#11
Semi -Gloss Waterborne
Medium Density
1 coat
#5
Solvent Base Primer
Overlay PI Pod
Ext 6.2A
2 coats
#11
Semi -Gloss Waterborne
Spot Prime
Steel Doors 8
#79
Alkyd Anti- Corrosive Primer
Door Frames
Ext 5313
2 coats
#94
Silicone Alkyd Enamel (with Industrial
(Shop Primed)
Base Solvent Colorent #844 G-6
Metal - Preprimed
Spot prime
• Flashing
EA 5736
1 coat
#26
Galvanized Metal Primer
• Gutters
1 2 coats
#94
Alk d Gloss Enamel
Downspouts. Shall be painted out same color as their background. PVC downspouts painting preparations:
Fine sand to degloss and provide tooth. Provide one coat primer, ICI Devoe, Devguard #4160, or equivalent
and two finish coats 100% acrylic satin enamel. (Tint primer coat similar to topcoat for best hide).
Soot Prime all factory or shop primed items damaged in shipment or installation with primer compatible to
existing primer and top coats.
(yNm still 09900 - 8
PAINTING
09900-8 1
I
1 PAINT RECORDS REQUIREMENTS
2
'3
4 The painting contractor shall maintain, keep current and in good condition through the duration of thejob, all
5 drawings and schedules indicating specified products and their locations of application. These records shall
'6 be returned to the Owner, through the Architect, at the end of the job to facilitate future building maintenance.
7
8 Because the painting contractor may prefer to use a different paint manufacturer (requiring the Architect's
9 approval) from the one specified, he is required to fill outthe PAINT PRODUCTS SCHEDULE to indicate the
10 alternate manufacturer and product number. (See sample below.)
11
12 Also, when a scheduled color is to be used in more than one paint type, i.e. on wood, metal or concrete, the
13 requested information shall be filled in on the PAINT PRODUCTS SCHEDULE in the spaces provided below
' 14 the "scheduled color /material" listed. (See sample below.)
AINT PROJECTS SCHEDULE
rickson McGovern, �
PAINTING CONTRACTOR
PROJECT SAMPLE
PAINT NO.
ON MASTER
SCHEDULE
SPECIFIED
MFR.
COLOR
NAME
PAINT TYPE
SURFACE
CONTRACTOR'S ALT.
REMARKS
MFR.
COLOR
NO.
PROD.NO.
PROD.NO.
PRODUCT NO.
EP -A
Glidden
Blue
Latex
Plaster
3900
234
OTHER
PRODUCTS
USED IN
ABOVE
COLOR
EP -B
OTHER
PRODUCTS
USED IN
ABOVE
COLOR
EP -C
OTHER
PRODUCTS
USED IN
ABOVE
COLOR
II
1
' belm stg] 09900 - 9 PAINTING 09900-9
PAINT PROJECTS SCHEDULE
PROJECT
Erickson McGovern, rug PAINTING CONTRACTOR
I
i
PAINT NO.
ON MASTER
SCHEDULE
SPECIFIED
MFR.
COLOR
NAME
PAINT TYPE
SURFACE
CONTRACTOR'S ALT.
REMARKS
MFR.
COLOR
NO.
PROD. NO.
PROD. NO.
PRODUCT NO.
OTHER
PRODUCTS
USED IN
ABOVE
COLOR
OTHER
PRODUCTS
USED IN
ABOVE
COLOR
OTHER
PRODUCTS
USED IN
ABOVE
COLOR
OTHER
PRODUCTS
USED IN
ABOVE
COLOR
OTHER
PRODUCTS
USED IN
ABOVE
COLOR
END OF SECTION 09900
1
Lvelm stgl 09900 -10 PAINTING 09900 -10 1
I
'
ENGINEERS, INC.
TACOMA • SEATTLE OLYMPIA
1
28
'29
30
1
1
YELM STORAGE BUILDING
BCE PROJECT NO. 205- 003.00
Notice
TACOMA OFFICE
6021 12w Street East, Suite 200
Tacoma, WA 98424
Phone (253) 922-0446
Fax (253) 9220896
The following list of specifications and drawings represents those documents that were prepared under
the provisions of the Revised Code of Washington RCW 18.43, by BCE Engineers, Inc. of Tacoma,
Washington. The sealing of this specification and drawings list is provided in accordance with
Washington Administrative Code WAC196 -23 -020.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
15000 — MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section Description
15055
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
15060
PIPE AND FITTINGS
15065
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR MECHANICAL
UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
15095
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15100
VALVES
15120
PIPING SPECIALTIES
15261
PIPING INSULATION
15412
SOIL, WASTE, AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM
15487
NATURAL GAS
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
EXPIRES 06_21 - --0
No. of Panes
6
2
5
3
3
1
2
2
2
' (yelm stgj toc - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS toc - 1
I SECTION 15055 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
2 PART 1- GENERAL
3 1.01 GENERAL
4 A. Includes, but not limited to, furnishing labor, materials, and equipment for completion of
5 work unless indicated or noted otherwise. See Division 1 for sequence of work.
6 B. All work included in Division 15 shall be the responsibility of a single Mechanical
7 Subcontractor. All Division 15 work shall be bid to that single prime Mechanical
8 Contractor.
9 C. This Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits required by State and local authorities
10 governing the installation of the mechanical work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to
11 contact all utility organizations serving the building, prior to bid, and to include all charges
12 for inspections, installation of materials, equipment and connecfion of all required utilities.
13 D. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is
14 binding as if called for in both.
15 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
16 A. General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 apply to this Section.
17 1.03 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
18 A. Site Inspection:
19 1. Examine premises and understand the conditions which may affect performance
20 of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work.
21 2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any
22 consequence related to failure to examine site conditions.
23 B. Drawings
24 1. Mechanical drawings show general arrangement of piping, equipment, etc.
25 Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will
26 permit.
27 2. Consider architectural and electrical drawings part of this work in so far as these
28 drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building.
29 Architectural drawings take precedence over mechanical drawings.
30 3. Because of small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all
31 offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. Investigate structural
32 and finish conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing
33 such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions.
34 1.04 SUBMITTALS
35 A. All material used on the project shall be new and free of defects. The Architect and /or
36 Engineer reserves the right to reject any material, the appearance of which has been
37 damaged on the site or in shipment. The material shall be of pre- approved equal quality
38 to that which is specified. Should the make and type of material differ from that specified,
39 the Contractor may be required to submit catalog and engineering data (samples if
40 requested) necessary to make a comparison and determine its suitability. The Contractor
41 shall also bear the cost of all changes to any aspect of the project (electrical, mechanical,
42 building, etc.) made necessary by any approved substitutions. Approved substitutions
43 include those listed as approved manufacturers or approved substitutions. Tentative
44 approval of substitute material and equipment will be made prior to bid only. Such
45 request for approval shall be made two weeks in advance of the bid opening to allow time
' [yelm stg] 15055- 1 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15055-1
1
to assess its suitability. Failure to obtain approval prior to bid shall require the successful
2
bidder to furnish materials and equipment only as specified herein (see paragraph 2.01,
3
this specification).
4
B.
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect, for approval, complete information on all
5
equipment and materials to be provided on the project. Provide copies as specified by
6
Division 1 and at a minimum provide six (6) copies of the manufacturer's catalog and
7
engineering data, shop drawings of shop fabricated equipment and instruction data for
8
each item included under this Section of the Specifications. Submittals shall be
9
presented to the Architect within 30 calendar days from the date of the Contract signing
10
in complete indexed and bound sets. Submitting portions of the submittals will not be
11
accepted. The Contractor shall submit a typed, signed list including all items to be
12
furnished on the vroiect. The signature on the aforementioned list shall indicate that the
13
Contractor has examined the suitability of all material and equipment with respect to
14
compliance with these specifications. The Contractors approval shall also indicate that
15
physical dimensions of the equipment have been verified with the installation
16
requirements and were found to cause no interference therewith.
17
C.
Review of submittal data by the Engineer or Architect does not relieve the Contractor of
18
responsibility for quantities, measurements, and compliance with the intent of all contract
19
documents.
20
D.
Furnish submittals in a hard -back, three -ring binder. The binder shall have tabs which
21
are indexed with a Table of Contents. The Table of Contents shall correlate an index
22
number for each individual specification number. If the equipment submittal is not bound
23
to the Engineer's satisfaction, it may be rejected.
24
E.
Furnish submittals generally according to the list below. Individual Sections may contain
25
more specific submittal listing of the particular Section labeled "Submittal Requirements."
26
Furnish on each particular Section and the following equipment:
27
1. Pipe
28
2. Pipe Insulation
29
3. Plumbing Fixtures
30
4. Valves
31
5. Pipe Hangers
32
6. Piping Specialties
33
F.
Any material found to be installed without prior approval will be required to be removed
34
and replaced with only specified material at Contractor's cost.
35
G.
Mechanical Drawings for the project have been developed by the Engineer using
36
AutoCADTM Revision 2004 software. These drawing files will be made available to the
37
Contractor for development of shop drawings and /or "As- Builts" for a fee of $20.00 per
38
sheet. Full payment to be made prior to release of drawing files.
39
1.05 QUALITY
ASSURANCE
40
A.
Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
41
1. Perform work in accordance with applicable Codes.
42
2. In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, utility
43
company regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern.
44
B.
Product Approvals: See paragraphs elsewhere in this specification.
45
C.
Manufacture: Use domestic made pipe and pipe fittings on Project.
[yelm srg] 15055 - 2 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15055-2 1
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
1 1.06 CODES AND STANDARDS
2
A.
Codes and agencies having jurisdictional authority over mechanical installation.
3
1. Washington State Energy Code
4
2. International Building Code — Latest Approved Edition
5
3. International Mechanical Code -- Latest Approved Edition
6
4. Uniform Plumbing Code -- Latest Approved Edition
7
5. Local Sewer and Water District Requirements
8
6. State and County Department of Health
9
7. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)
10
8. Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA)
11
1.07 PRODUCT HANDLING AND PROTECTION
12
A.
Contractor is responsible for protection of all material, equipment and apparatus provided
13
under this Section from damage, water, corrosion, freezing and dust, both in storage and
14
when installed, until final project acceptance.
15
B.
Handle and protect equipment and /or material in manner precluding unnecessary fire
16
hazard.
17
C.
Material or equipment damaged because of improper storage or protection will be
18
rejected.
19
1.08 WARRANTIES
20
A.
In addition to guarantee specified in General Conditions, guarantee plumbing systems to
21
be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct system in
22
accordance with Contract Documents.
23
B.
In order to be protected, secure proper guarantees from suppliers and Subcontractors.
24
1.09 ABBREVIATIONS
25
AFF
Above Finish Floor
26
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
27
ASME
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
28
ASTM
American Society of Testing 8 Materials
29
AW WA
American Water Works Association
30
31
BFF
Below Finish Floor
32
33
CISPI
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
34
fpm
feet per minute
35
FS or
Federal Specifications
36
F.C.O
Flush Cleanout
37
38
GPM
Gallons per Minute
39
40
IAPMO
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
41
42
MS
or
43
Mil.Spec. Military Specifications
44
MSS
Manufacturers Standardization Society
45
46
PDI
Plumbing and Drainage Institute
47
per
in accordance with
46
POC
Point of Connection
49
PSI
Pounds per Square Inch Gauge Pressure
50
PVC
Polyvinyl Chloride
' [yelm sfg] 15055 - 3 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15055-3
1
2
UL
Underwriter's Laboratories
3
4
w.g.
Water Gauge (inches of water)
5
W.P.
Working Pressure
6
WQA
Water Quality Association
7
Additional
abbreviations are as listed on the drawings or elsewhere in these specifications.
8
1.10 DEFINITIONS
9
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces used for habitation or occupancy where rough surfaces are
10
plastered, paneled, or otherwise treated to provide a pleasing appearance.
11
B.
Unfinished Spaces: Spaces used for storage or work areas, such as fan rooms,
12
mechanical and boiler rooms, etc., where appearance is not a factor.
13
C.
Concealed Spaces: Spaces out of sight. For example, above ceilings; below Floors;
14
between double walls; furred -in areas; pipe and duct shafts; and similar spaces.
15
D.
Exposed: Open to view. For example, pipe running through a room and not covered by
16
other construction.
17
E.
Outside: Open to view up to 5 feet beyond the exterior side of walls, above the roof, and
18
unexcavated or crawl spaces.
19
F.
Conditioned Space: An area, room or space normally occupied and being heated or
20
cooled for human habitation by any equipment as defined by the extent of the building
21
envelope insulation.
22
1.11 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
23
A.
The Contractor shall maintain, in addition to any reference drawings, an as -built set of
24
prints, which have been reproduced from the approved site set on which all deviations
25
from the original design shall be drafted in a neat, legible manner with red colored pencil.
26
This red lined set shall identify all drawing revisions including addenda items, change
27
orders, and Contractor revisions.
28
B.
Drawings shall show locations of all underground pipe and duct installed by this
29
Contractor. Underground pipes and ducts shall be shown with cross Section elevations.
30
All pipe, raceway, manholes or lines of other trades shall be included.
31
C.
The Contractor shall update all references to specific products to indicate products
32
actually installed on project. This shall include, but not be limited to, air handlers, heat
33
pumps etc.
34
D.
Upon completion of the Division 15 Work, the Contractor shall deliver the red lined
35
drawings and one set of neatly drafted as -built drawings on reproducible mylar to the
36
Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to the Owner.
37 PART2- PRODUCTS
38 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
39 A. Any reference to the specifications or on the drawings to any article, device, product,
40 material, fixture, form or type of construction by manufacturer, name, make, or catalog
41 number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be
42 construed as limiting competition.
[yelm sfg] 15055 - 4 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15055-4 1
1
1
1
1
B.
The manufacturer listed as Acceptable Manufacturers are approved to bid the project for
2
33
the items indicated without obtaining prior approval. Other manufacturers desiring to bid
3
34
the project require prior approval.
4
C.
The listing of a manufacturer as an Acceptable Manufacturer does not necessarily mean
5
36
that the products of that manufacturer are equal to those specified. The listing is only an
6
indication of those manufacturers which may be capable of manufacturing, or have in the
7
38
past manufactured, items equal to those specified, and is intended to aid the Contractor
8
39
in identifying manufacturers.
9
D.
Products provided by Acceptable Manufacturers shall be equal to or superior to the
10
41
specified manufacturers item in function, appearance, and quality, and shall fulfill all
11
requirements of the plans and specifications. The ArchitecVEngineer shall be the final
12
43
judge as to whether an item meets these requirements or not. If a manufacturer is not
13
44
certain that his product meets these requirements or not, then the manufacturer shall
14
45
submit data as required to obtain the Design Consultant's approval prior to bid opening.
15
E.
The approval of a manufacturer applies to the manufacturer only and does not relieve the
16
Contractor from the responsibility of meeting all applicable requirements of the plans and
17
specifications.
18
F.
Contractor shall be responsible for all costs to other trades and all revisions required to
19
accommodate any products which are different than those specified or shown.
20
G.
In reviewing a manufacturer for acceptance, factors considered include the following:
21
engineering data showing item's performance, proper local representation of
22
manufacturer, likelihood of future manufacturer's local support of product, service
23
availability, previous installation, previous use by Owner /Engineer /Architect and record,
24
product quality, availability /quality of maintenance and operation data,
25
capacity /performance compared to specified items, acoustics, items geometry/access
26
utility needs, and similar concerns.
27
H.
If approval is received to use other than specified items, responsibility for specified
28
capacities and ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space available lies with this
29
Division.
30
I.
If non - specified equipment is used and it will not ft job site conditions, this Division
31
assumes responsibility for replacement with items named in Specification.
'
32
PART 3 - EXECUTION
33
3.01 WORKMANSHIP
34
A. This Contractor shall provide completed systems with a neat and finished appearance. If,
35
in the judgment of the Engineer, any portion of the work has not been performed in a
36
workmanlike manner or is left in a rough, unfinished state, this Contractor will be required
'37
to remove, reinstall or replace same and patch and paint surrounding surfaces in a
38
manner acceptable to the Engineer, without increase in cost to the Owner.
39
3.02 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
'
40
A. Requirements: Final approval of mechanical installation will be recommended upon
41
completion of the following:
1. Completion of all punchlist items
'42
43
2. Permit Submittal
44
3. Reproducible As -Built drawings delivered to Architect
45
4. Guarantees
' jyelm stg] 15055 - 5 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15055-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
3.03 FINAL INSPECTION
A. Final Inspection:
1. The time of the final inspection shall be mutually agreed to by the Owner,
Engineer, and Contractor.
3.04 PREPARATION
A. New Buildings: Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching,
repairing, and replacing of work of other Sections required because of its fault, error,
tardiness, or because of damage done by it.
3.05 INSTALLATION
A. Dissimilar Metals: Provide separations between all dissimilar metals. Where not
specified in another way, use 10 mil black plastic tape wrapped at point of contact or
plastic centering inserts.
3.06 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Properly lubricate equipment before Owner's acceptance.
B. Remove debris from site.
C. Remove stickers from fixtures.
END OF SECTION 15055
[yelm stg] 15055 - 6 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15055-6 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
SECTION 15060 - PIPE AND FITTINGS
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes, but not limited to, general piping installation procedures for domestic water
systems.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
General Conditions, Division 1
B.
Section 15055 — General Mechanical Requirements.
C.
Section 15095 — Hangers and Supports.
D.
Section 15120 — Piping Specialties
E.
Section 15200 — Sleeves and Seals.
F.
Section 15412 — Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping System.
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A.
Pipe
B.
Solder
1.04 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM E814: Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire Stops.
B.
UL 1479: Through - Penetration Fire Stop Systems.
PART2- PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE (FOR POTABLE SYSTEMSI
A. Type "K" Copper
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND FITTINGS
A. Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as necessary to
completely control entire apparatus. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate
general location and connections. Piping may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as
required or directed at site. This does not relieve this Division from responsibility for
proper erection of systems of piping in every respect.
B. Properly make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage.
1. Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at site and
work into place without springing or forcing.
2. Remove burr and cutting slag from pipes.
3. Make changes in direction with proper fittings.
C. Coordinate installation of piping with all trades which are affected by installation to avoid
conflicts.
]yelm stg] 15060 - 1 PIPE AND FITTINGS 15060-1
1
D.
Allow sufficient clearances for installation of pipe insulation in thickness specified. If
2
interferences occur, reroute piping to accommodate insulation.
3
E.
Make connections of dissimilar metals with insulating couplings. (di- electric unions). See
4
Section 15120 — Piping Specialties.
5
F.
Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials
6
out of system. Do not use plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste, or similar materials.
7
G.
Do not use reducing bushings, street elbows, or close nipples.
8
H.
Tdrill procedure for connecting pipes will not be allowed.
9
I.
Wrought tees shall be used on all branch piping and branch to main connections.
10
J.
Solder for potable water pipes shall be of a lead free type and shall conform to current
11
UPC standards for solder and all local code requirements.
12
1. Approved Manufacturers:
13
a. Canfield
14
b. J.W. Harris
15
C. Aqua -Clean
16
3.02 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING TESTS AND STERILIZATION
17
A.
Tests: As the work progresses each section of the water system shall be tested under a
18
125psi hydrostatic test held for 24 hours without reduction of pressure. If any leaks occur
19
or piping or valves are found to be defective, same shall be removed and new material
20
installed, and the test made on that section again until all material is found to be
21
satisfactory. Such test shall be made in the presence of the Owner's Representative.
22
B.
Flushina and Chlorination: All piping shall be flushed to remove all dirt and foreign
23
material. After flushing, all piping shall be chlorinated in accordance with regulations of
24
the Washington State Health Dept. After the contact period, the chlorine shall be drained
25
from the piping and the piping flushed. The Contractor will take samples for
26
bacteriological analysis. The water analysis must be satisfactory before piping is
27
acceptable.
28 END OF SECTION 15060
(yelm stg] 15060 - 2 PIPE AND FITTINGS 15060-2 1
I SECTION 15065 -EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR MECHANICAL
2 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
'�ctiiiQH�:I� �7
4
1.01 GENERAL INCLUDES
5
A.
Excavation and Associated Grading.
6
B.
Trenching and Trench Protection.
7
C.
Backfilling and Compaction.
8
D.
Verification of Existing Utilities.
9
E.
Protection of Utilities.
10
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
11
A.
Section 15060 - Pipe and Fittings
12
B.
Section 15412 - Soil, Waste and Vent Piping System
13
C.
Section 15487 - Natural Gas
14
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
15
A.
Inspection of Job Conditions: Prior to starting work and during work, the installer shall
16
examine the work by others, site and job conditions under which excavation, trenching,
17
and backfilling for underground utilities work will be performed, and notify the General
18
Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions or work. Do not proceed with work until
19
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
20
B.
Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the following codes and standards
21
(Latest Edition) except as modified herein:
22
1. International Building Code.
23
2. Loral requirements for all utility work.
24
3. OSHA and WISHA regulations.
25
4. APWA Standard Specifications.
26
1.04 RESPONSIBILITY
27
A.
The Contractor is solely responsible for compliance with the requirements of the
28
drawings, specifications, local codes and standards, proper construction coordination
29
with work of other trades, and protection and workers safety. Contractor shall advise
30
Design Consultant of any discrepancy in, or disagreement with the specifications and /or
31
drawings prior to starting work and not proceed until issue is resolved. Commencement
32
of work shall indicate Contractors acknowledgement of his expertise in this type of work.
33
Any delay resulting from failure to comply with this procedure will not be basis for an
34
extension of the completion date.
35
1.05 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
36
A.
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
37
B.
American Society of Testing and materials (ASTM) publications:
38
D 422 -63 Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
39
D 423-66 Liquid Limit of Soils.
40
D 424 -59 Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR MECHANICAL
' [yelm stg] 15065 - 1 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 15065-1
I D 1557 -78
2
3 D 2167 -66
4 D 2217 -66
5
6 D 2487 -69
7 02922-81
8
9 E 548 -79
10
Moisture Density Relations of Soils using a 10 Ib. (4.54kg) Rammer and
18 inch (457 mm) Drop.
Density of Soil In -Place by the Rubber Balloon Method.
Wet preparation of Soil Samples for Particle -Size Analysis and
Determination of Soil Contents.
Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate In Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth).
Generic Criteria for Use in the Evaluation of Testing and Inspection
Agencies.
11 PART 2 - MATERIALS
12 2.01 SATISFACTORY MATERIALS
13 A. Materials classified as ASTM D2487, Unified Soil Classification System as SW, SP, GIN,
14 and GP are satisfactory for backfll use. Materials classified as SP -SM, GP -GM, GM, GC
15 and ML are also satisfactory for backfill use provided that they contain moisture contents
16 suitable for the intended use and are reasonably free of organic matter. Native material,
17 not considered unsatisfactory as specified below, may comply. Except that no material
18 shall have any object with a dimension exceeding 2 inches.
19 2.02 UNSATISFACTORY MATERIALS
20 - A. Materials classified in ASTM D2487, Unified Soil Classification System as PT, OH, and
21 OL are unsatisfactory. Unsatisfactory materials also include man -made fills, refuse and
22 all materials containing excessive organic matter or having moisture contents which are
23 not suitable for the intended use, or having objects with dimensions exceeding 2 inches
24 (boulders, etc.).
25 2.03 UNSTABLE MATERIAL
26 A. Unstable material shall consist of material too wet to properly support the utility pipe,
27 conduit or appurtenance structure.
28 2.04 GRAVELLY SAND BORROW MATERIAL
29 A. Gravelly sand borrow material to provide backfll, or replace unsuitable soil, shall meet
30 the requirements of SW, SP, GW, and GP materials, except that the maximum
31 percentage passing the No. 200 sieve shall not exceed 5% based on the soil fraction
32 passing the U.S. No. 4 sieve, and not contain discrete particles greater than 2 inches in
33 diameter.
34 2.05 DEGREE OF COMPACTION
35 A. Degree of compaction shall be expressed as a percentage of the maximum density
36 obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D1557, Method D. Minimum
37 compaction requirements shall be as specified in PART 3.
38 2.06 DRAINAGE GRAVEL
39 A. Shall be 3/4 inch washed gravel with no more than 2% passing 1/2 inch sieve opening.
40 2.07 SPECIAL BEDDING AND INITIAL BACKFILL MATERIAL
41 A. Minus 3/8 inch washed pea gravel.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR MECHANICAL
[yelm stg] 15065 - 2 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 15065-2 '
I
'
27
the excavation, and any water accumulating therein shall be removed so that the stability
1
PART 3- EXECUTION
2
3
3.01 EXCAVATION
A. If workers enter any trench or other excavation four or more feet in depth that does not
4
meet the open pit requirements of WSDOT Section 2.09.3(3)B, it shall be shored and
'
5
6
cribbed. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for worker safety. All trench safety
systems shall meet the requirements of the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act,
7
Chapter 49.17 RCW.
'
8
B. Excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered shall be
'
9
performed to allow the installation of all utilities at the lines and grades as required.
'
10
During excavation, material satisfactory for backflling shall be stockpiled in an orderly
'
11
12
manner at a distance from the banks of the trench sufficient to avoid overloading and to
prevent slides or cave -ins. Adequate drainage shall be provided for the stockpiles and
13
surrounding areas by means of ditches, dikes, or other approved methods. The
'
14
stockpiles shall also be protected from contamination with unsatisfactory excavated
'
15
material or other material that may destroy the quality and fitness of the suitable
16
stockpiled material.
17
C. If the Contractor fails to protect the stockpiles and any material becomes unsatisfactory
18
as a result, such material shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory on -site or
19
imported material from approved sources at no additional cost to the Owner.
20
D. Excavated material not required or not satisfactory for backfill shall be removed from the
21
site and shall be disposed of off site, at the Contractor's expense, at the Contractor's
22
waste area. Any excess satisfactory excavated materials shall not be mixed with
23
unsatisfactory materials. Unsatisfactory materials shall not cover available suitable
24 materials, or be disposed of in such a manner as to interfere with subsequent borrow
25 operations.
26 E. Grading shall be done as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into
' EXCAVATIONAND BACKFILL FOR MECHANICAL
(yelm st9) 15065 - 3 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 15065-3
27
the excavation, and any water accumulating therein shall be removed so that the stability
28
of the bottom and sides of the excavation is maintained. Unauthorized over - excavation
29
shall be backfilled in accordance with paragraph 3.05 BACKFILLIING at no additional
30
cost to the Owner.
31
F. The Contractor shall provide any dewatering needed and is considered incidental to the
32
Contract.
'
33
3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION
34
A. The trench shall be excavated as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to be
'
35
36
installed unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Where recommended trench widths
are exceeded, redesign shall be performed by the Contractor using stronger pipe or
37
special installation procedures. The cost of this redesign and the increased pipe or
38
installation procedures shall be bome by the Contractor without additional cost to the
'
39
Owner.
40
B. Bottom Preparation: The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide
41
uniform bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe and for
42
bedding. Bell holes shall be excavated to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to
43
eliminate point bearing. Stones of 2 inches or greater in any dimension, or as
44
recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, shall be removed to avoid
45
point bearing.
' EXCAVATIONAND BACKFILL FOR MECHANICAL
(yelm st9) 15065 - 3 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 15065-3
1 C. Removal of Unsuitable Material: Where unsuitable material is encountered in the bottom
2 of the trench, such material shall be removed to the depth directed and replaced to the
3 proper grade with select granular material as provided in paragraph 3.05 BACKFILLING.
4 When removal of unsuitable material is required due to the fault or neglect of the
5 Contractor in his performance of the work, the resulting material shall be excavated and
6 replaced by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.
7 D. Bedding: The bedding surface for the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform
8 density throughout the entire length of the pipe. The pipe shall be bedded carefully in a
9 soil foundation accurately shaped and rounded to conform to the lowest one - fourth of the
10 outside portion of circular pipe or to the lower curved portion of pipe arch for the entire
11 length of pipe or arch. When necessary, the bedding shall be taped. Bell holes and
12 depressions for joints shall be only of such length, depth and width as required for
13 properly making the particular type joint. Provide bedding using pea gravel where noted
14 on the drawings.
15 3.03 JACKING, BORING, AND TUNNELING
16 A. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut, except that sections of a
17 trench may be jacked, bored, or tunneled if the pipe, cable or duct can be safely and
18 properly installed and backfill can be properly tamped in such sections.
19 3.04 BACKFILLING
20 A. Backfll material shall be compacted to 6" layers and as specified in Paragraph 3.07.
21 1. Trench Backfill: Trenches shall be backfilled to finish grade. The trench shall be
22 backfilled to above the top of pipe prior to performing the required pressure tests
23 (except that where piping requires insulation, the pipe shall have an initial test
24 prior to insulating and then a final test as specified herein). The joints and
25 couplings shall be left uncovered during the pressure test.
26 1 Replacement of Unstable Material: Unstable material removed from the bottom of
27 the trench of excavation shall be replaced with select granular material or gravel
28 borrow placed in layers not exceeding 6 inches loose thickness.
29 3. Bedding and Initial BackfilL Bedding shall consist of satisfactory materials. Initial
30 backfll shall be in 6 inch lift.
31 3.05 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
32 A. Special requirements for excavation, backfll, and bedding relating to the specific utilities
33 are as follows:
34 1. Domestic Water Lines: Trenches shall be of a depth to provide a minimum cover
35 of 3.0 feet from the existing ground surface, or from the indicated finished grade,
36 whichever is lower, to the top of the pipe. Bedding shall use "special bedding"
37 materials as specified in paragraph 2.07.
38 2. Where piping passes under footings, provide concrete fill starting 12 inches
39 above pipe for excavated length and width of footing above pipe for footing
40 support. Concrete specification shall match same provided for footing.
41 3.06 COMPACTION
42 A. Each layer of fill, or the excavated subgrade, shall be compacted to at least 95 %, per
43 ASTM D1557, of laboratory maximum density. Compaction shall be accomplished by
44 approved tamping rollers, pneumatic -tired rollers, three -wheel power rollers, or other
45 approved compaction equipment.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR MECHANICAL
(yelm stg] 15065 - 4 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES - 15065-4 '
1 3.07 PROTECTION
2 A. Newly graded excavated or bedded areas shall be protected from traffic and from
3 erosion, and any settlement or washing away that may occur from any cause, prior to
4 acceptance, shall be repaired and grades reestablished to the required elevations and
5 slopes.
6 END OF SECTION 15065
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR MECHANICAL
' [yelm stg] 15065 - 5 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 15065-5
I
I
1 SECTION 15095 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
2 PART 1- GENERAL
3
1.01
GENERAL
4
A.
Includes:
5
1. Pipe Hangers and Supports
6
2. Duct Hangers and Supports
7
3. Mechanical Equipment Anchors and Supports
a
1 -02
RELATED SECTIONS
9
A.
All Division 15 using piping, ductwork, equipment and air terminals.
10
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
11
A.
Pipe Hanaer Standards: (MSS) Manufacturers Standardization Society Standards SP-
12
58 -1975, SP -89 -1978, and SP-69 -1976.
13
B.
All methods, materials, and workmanship shall conform to the Uniform Building Code
14
(UBC) and Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC), as amended and adopted by the authority
15
having jurisdiction.
16
1.04
SUBMITTAL
REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
17
A.
Hangers.
18
B.
struts.
t9
C.
Anchors.
20 PART 2- PRODUCTS
21 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
22 A. Hangers and Supports: Elcen, Grinnell, B -Line Systems, Unistmt, Michigan, Tolco, PHD.
23 B. Anchors: Rawplug, Phillips, Hilti, Michigan.
24 2.02 GENERAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
25 A. Hanger Rods: Threaded hot rolled steel, electro - galvanized or cadmium plated, Hanger
26 rods shall be sized so that the total load (including pipe or duct, insulation, hangers, and
27 fluid) does not exceed the following:
Nominal Rod Diameter Maximum Load
3/6 Inch 610 Pounds
112 Inch 1130 Pounds
28 B. Hanger Straps: Galvanized steel. Straps shall be sized so that the total load does not
29 exceed the following:
Strap Size Maximum Load
1" x 22 Gauge 230 Pounds
1"x 20 Gauge 290 Pounds
1"x 18 Gauge 380 Pounds
1" x 16 Gauge 630 Pounds
' fyelm stg] 15093 -1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15095-1
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
2.03
3.01
3.02
C. Beam Attachments: Shall be of the following type:
MSS Type Elcen Figure No. Grinnel Figure No.
21 33,34 131
22 67 66
23 29A 87
28 95 292,228
30 95 229
D. Anchors: Masonry anchors shall be Phillips wedge anchors, Phillips "Red Head" or Rawl
"Saber - Tooth".
E. Steel: Structural steel per ASTM A36.
F. Wood. Shall be fire treated.
A. All hangers used directly on copper pipe shall be copper plated or have a factory applied
1/16 -inch thick (minimum) plastic coating on all contact surfaces.
B. All other hangers, supports, and hardware shall be cadmium plated or galvanized.
C. Pipe Hangers and Supports'. Shall be of the following type (numbers are'MSS').
Maximum System Temperature Insulated Pipe Type
60 to 120 Degrees 1, 3, 7, 9, 10
33 to 59 Degrees 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, E
D. Insulated Pipe Supports and Insulation Shields:
1. Insulation material at pipe support shall consist of expanded perlite insert with
flame resistant jacket of nylon reinforced kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil
cover on insulation, with sheet metal shield. Expanded perlite shall have no
more than 5% deformation at 100 psi and a thermal conductivity no more than
0.32 Btu /hr. /sq. ft. /degree F/1 -inch thick.
2. Expanded perlite insert shall be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and
sized to match pipe in which it is used on. See Section 15261 for insulation
sizes.
3. Provide shield per Section 15120 Piping Specialties.
4. Manufacturer: Michigan Hanger Company, Model Nos. 1031 and 4031.
INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Provide all necessary bolts, nuts, washers, tumbuckles, rod connectors, and any other
miscellaneous accessories required for the support and anchoring of all pipes.
B. Install concrete inserts and anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. All welded steel support assemblies shall have a power wire brush and primer paint
finish.
INSTALLATION OF PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Pipe which is not run underground, shall be adequately anchored to the structure to
prevent sagging and to keep pipe in alignment.
B. All pipe supports shall be provided with a means of adjustment for the aligning and
leveling of the pipe after installation.
(yelm stg] 15095-2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
15095-2 1
Is
9
10
11
12
1 13
F
'
14
G.
1
C. Installation and sizing of pipe supports and accessories shall be in accordance with the
2
manufacturers recommendations and standard MSS SP -89 and MSS SP-69, UPC, and
3
UMC.
4
D. Provide supports at each change in direction of piping; and on cast iron soil pipe at each
5
branch connection and at each side of concentrated loads.
i6
20
E. Where mechanically coupled piping is used, a hanger shall be placed within 2 feet on
7
each side of couplings, with hanger spacing in no case to exceed the following:
22
Maximum Span Mechanically
t
Nominal Pipe Diameter Coupled Piping
Y. to 1 Inch 7 Feet
1 %to 1 %Inch 7 Feet
'
2Inches 10 Feet
2 % Inches 10 Feet
3 Inches and Larger 12 Feet
Is
9
10
11
12
1 13
F
NOTE: Manufacturers support instructions shall be used where it is more
restrictive than the above. Above is for rigid coupled piping systems.
Follow manufacturer's requirements for flexible piping systems, except that
in no case is spacing to be more than the above.
`Gas piping.
Cooper Tubing: Maximum spacing between supports:
Nominal Tubing Diameter Maximum Span Copper
• Inch 5 Feet
• to 1 % Inch 6 Feet
i Y. to 2 % Inch 8 Feet
3 Inches and Larger 10 Feet
Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Maximum spacing between supports shall be 5 feet, except when
the pipe length between joints exceeds 5 feet, in which case the maximum spacing
between supports may be 10 feet.
No -Hub Cast Iron Soil Pipe. Shall be supported at every other joint, except when the
pipe length between joints exceeds 4 feet, in which case the pipe shall be supported at
each joint. Supports shall be provided at each horizontal branch connection and shall be
adjacent to couplings.
Insulated Pipe Supports and Insulation Shields: Protect insulated pipe at point of support
with pipe insert and shield as required by the following table:
Nominal Pipe Insulation Length Shield Length Minimum Shield
Diameter in Inches in Inches in Inches Gauge
% to 2 6 3 20
23 Such supports shall be in place at the time of installing pipe.
24 J. Underground Pipe: Shall be evenly supported on approved bedding materials, as
25 specified for the type of piping being used. Such bedding and backfilling shall be as
26 specified in Section 15065.
i27 END OF SECTION 15095
1
Ij yelm sW 15095 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15095-3
'
14
G.
15
16
17
H.
18
19
1
20
21
22
NOTE: Manufacturers support instructions shall be used where it is more
restrictive than the above. Above is for rigid coupled piping systems.
Follow manufacturer's requirements for flexible piping systems, except that
in no case is spacing to be more than the above.
`Gas piping.
Cooper Tubing: Maximum spacing between supports:
Nominal Tubing Diameter Maximum Span Copper
• Inch 5 Feet
• to 1 % Inch 6 Feet
i Y. to 2 % Inch 8 Feet
3 Inches and Larger 10 Feet
Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Maximum spacing between supports shall be 5 feet, except when
the pipe length between joints exceeds 5 feet, in which case the maximum spacing
between supports may be 10 feet.
No -Hub Cast Iron Soil Pipe. Shall be supported at every other joint, except when the
pipe length between joints exceeds 4 feet, in which case the pipe shall be supported at
each joint. Supports shall be provided at each horizontal branch connection and shall be
adjacent to couplings.
Insulated Pipe Supports and Insulation Shields: Protect insulated pipe at point of support
with pipe insert and shield as required by the following table:
Nominal Pipe Insulation Length Shield Length Minimum Shield
Diameter in Inches in Inches in Inches Gauge
% to 2 6 3 20
23 Such supports shall be in place at the time of installing pipe.
24 J. Underground Pipe: Shall be evenly supported on approved bedding materials, as
25 specified for the type of piping being used. Such bedding and backfilling shall be as
26 specified in Section 15065.
i27 END OF SECTION 15095
1
Ij yelm sW 15095 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15095-3
I
' 1 SECTION 15100 - VALVES
2 PART 1-GENERAL
3 1.01 GENERAL
4 A. Includes, but not limited to, valve installation for all systems with water.
5 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
6 A. Comply with MSS SP -25.
7 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
8 A. All valve types.
9 PART 2- PRODUCTS
10 2.01 GENERAL
11 A. Provide factory4abricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service
12 indicated. Provide valves of types and pressure rating indicated; provide proper selection
13 as determined by installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as
14 indicated, and connections which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment
15 connections. Where more than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option.
16 Valves shall be of same make for all these services.
17 2.02 GATE VALVES
18 A. Packing - Select valves, equipped with packing suitable for intended service. (Under no
19 circumstances is asbestos acceptable.) Select valves designed so back seating protects
20 packing and stem threads from media when valve is fully opened, and equipped with
21 gland follower. Guides for disc on rising stem valves must be machined for accurate fit.
22 B. Comply with the following standards:
23 1. Cast -Iron Valves: MSS SP - 70
24 2, Bronze Valves: MSS SP - 80
25 C. For Domestic Water Service:
26 1. Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising
27 stem, solid wedge: Nibco T -111, Stockham B100, Milwaukee 148 or equal. (Non -
28 rising stem gate valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of
29 rising stems: Nibco T -113, Stockham 8103, Milwaukee 105 or equal.)
30 2, Solder Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising
31 stem, solid wedge: Nibco S -111, Stockham B108, Milwaukee 149 or equal. (Non -
32 rising stem gate valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of
33 rising stems: Nibco S -113, Stockham B104, Milwaukee 115 or equal.)
34 D. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide gate valves of one of the
35 following.
36 1. STOCKHAM VALVE
37 2. NIBCO
38 3. MILWAUKEE VALVE COMPANY
39 4. HAMMOND
(yelm stg] 15100 -1 VALVES 15100-1
1
2.03 BALL VALVES
2
A.
General - Select with Standard, port opening, blow -out proof stem, hard chrome plated
3
24
bronze ball, rated not less than 600# W.O.G.
4
B.
Comply with the following standards:
5
26
1. MSS SP -110 Ball Valves - THREADED, SOLDER JOINT
6
C.
For Domestic Water Service'.
7
28
1. Threaded Ends 4" and Smaller: 6009 W.O.G., bronze two piece body, hard
8
29
chrome plated bronze ball, true adjustable packing nut ( "O" -ring only type stem
9
30
seal not acceptable), blow -out proof stem: HAMMOND 8301, Nibco T- 585 -70,
10
31
Stockham S206- BR -RT, Apollo 70- Series, or equal.
11
32
2. Soldered Ends 3" and Smaller: 600# W.O.G., bronze two piece body, hard
12
33
chrome plated bronze ball, true adjustable packing nut ( "O" -ring only type stem
13
seal not acceptable), blow -out proof stem: HAMMOND 8311, Nibco 5585 -70,
14
Stockham 5206- BR -RT, Apollo 70Series, Milwaukee BA -150, or equal.
15
D.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ball valves of one of the
16
following:
17
1. HAMMOND VALVE
18
2. STOCKHAM VALVE
19
3. NIBCO VALVE
20
4. APOLLO
21 2.04 VALVE FEATURES
22
A. General
- Provide valves with features indicated and where not otherwise indicated,
23
provide
proper valve features as outlined in this specification. Comply with ANSI B31.1.
24
1.
Threaded: Valve ends complying with ANSI B2.1.
25
2.
Solder Joint: Valve ends complying with ANSI B16.18.
26
3.
Trim: Fabricate pressure - containing components of valves, including stems and
27
seats from brass or bronze materials, of standard alloy recognized in valve
28
manufacturing that resists de- zincification.
29
4.
Bonnet: Part of gate or globe valve through which stem passes to valve body,
30
and attached to valve body by threads, bolts, union, or welding.
31
5.
Solid Wedge: One -piece tapered disc in gate valve, designed for contact with
32
both sides.
33
6.
Grooved: Ductile iron body complying to ASTM A536 with a PPS coating.
34 PART 3 - EXECUTION
35 3.01 INSTALLATION
36 A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements.
37 B. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including
38 valves in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. Locate valves so as
39 to be accessible and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.
40 C. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case
41 with stems pointed downward for horizontal plane unless unavoidable.
42 1. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated,
43 select and install valves with the following ends or types of pipe /tube
44 connections:
45 a. Tube Size 2" and Smaller: Soldered -joint valves.
jye/m sfgl 15100 - 2 VALVES 15100-2 1
1 b. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: One of the following at installer's option:
2 1) Threaded Valves
3 2) Grooved -end Valves
4 ENO OF SECTION 15100
[yelm stg] 15100 -3 VALVES 15100 -3
1 SECTION 15120 - PIPING SPECIALTIES
a MCI A11q: &11
3 1.01 GENERAL
4 A. Furnish devices as indicated with complete installation procedures for systems
5 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
6 A. General Conditions, Division 1
7 B. Section 15055 — General Mechanical Requirements
8 C. Section 15060 — Pipe and Fittings
9 D. Section 15065— Excavation and Backfll for Mechanical Underground Utilities
10 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
11 A. Unions
13
2.01 UNIONS
14
A.
Dielectnc Unions: Rated at 250 psi at 180 deg. F., conforming to ANSI 876.39. Type and
15
size to match piping.
16
B.
Unions on Cooper Pipe:
17
1. In 2 -Inch Pipe and Smaller: Wrought copper solder joint copper to copper union.
18
2. In 2 -112 -Inch Pipe and Larger: Brass flange unions.
19
C.
Unions on Steel Pipe:
20
1. In 3 -1/2 -Inch Pipe and Smaller Screwed malleable iron with ground joints, brass
21
to iron insert, 150 psi minimum working pressure.
22
2, In 4 -Inch Pipe and Larger: Flange unions, cast or malleable iron.
23
2.02 PIPE SHIELDS (SADDLES)
24
A.
Saddles shall be minimum, 20 gauge dimpled galvanized sheet steel covering 40% of the
25
circumference of the insulation. Length shall be a minimum of 6 ".
�I�LI3ir11 M*3x111 Lei
27 3.01 INSTALLATION
28 A. Unions: Install unions in pipe connections to regulators, reducers, all equipment, and
29 where it may be necessary to disconnect the equipment or piping for repairs or
30 maintenance; and as indicated.
31 END OF SECTION 15120
[yelm stg] 15120 - 1 PIPING SPECIALTIES 15120-1
I
I
1 SECTION 15261 - PIPING INSULATION
2 PART 1 -GENERAL
3
1.01
GENERAL
4
A.
Includes, but not limited to, insulating of piping and fittings per schedule in Part 3 of this
5
specification.
6
B.
Insulation at Hangers: Insulation shall be continuous through hangers on all insulated
7
systems. Inserts at hangers are specified in Section 15095 and are considered as part of
8
the hanger and support system. Inserts are required to be installed at the time of pipe
9
installation and are intended to be installed by the Contractor installing the pipe
10
hangers/supports. See Section 15095.
11
C.
The intent of this section is to meet or exceed the requirements of the most current
12
version of the Washington State Energy Code (WSEC). The stricter of this section and
13
WSEC shall be met.
14
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
15
A,
General Conditions, Division 1
16
B.
Section 15055 — General Mechanical Requirements
17
C.
Section 15060 — Pipe and Fittings
18
D.
Section 15095 — Hangers and Supports.
19
1.03
SECTION INCLUDES
20
A.
Piping insulation and accessories.
21
1.04
SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
22
A.
All insulation
23 PART 2- PRODUCTS
24 2.01 PIPE INSULATIONS
25 A. Glass Fiber: Meeting ASTM C547, rigid molded, noncombustible.
26 1. 'K' ('ksi') Value: 0.23 at 75 degrees F (0.033 at 24 degrees C).
27 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F (454 degrees C).
28 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: AP -T PLUS White Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber
29 yam and bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and
30 butt strips or AP Jacket with outward clinch expanding staples or vapor banner
31 mastic as needed.
32 PART 3 - EXECUTION
33 3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
34 A. Verify that piping has been tested for leakage in accordance with U.P.C. standards
35 before applying insulation materials.
36 B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry, and free of foreign material.
(yelm stgj 15261 - 1 PIPING INSULATION 15261-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes,
and industry standards.
B. Continue insulating vapor barrier through penetrations except where prohibited by code.
C. Piping Insulation:
1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
2. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
3. Provide insulated mid pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature with
vapor retardant jacket with self sealing laps. Insulate complete system.
4. Insulated pipe supports and insulation shield shall be in place at each hanger
and support as required by Section 15095 prior to insulating.
3.03 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
21 END OF SECTION 15261
[yelm stg] 15261 - 2 PIPING INSULATION
15261 -2
PIPE SIZE INCH THICKNESS
INSULATION TYPE
(MM) INCH III
Glass Fiber Insulation:
Cold Water
Up to 4" 1"
344 PIPE HANGERS
A. Do not allow pipes to come in contact with hangers.
21 END OF SECTION 15261
[yelm stg] 15261 - 2 PIPING INSULATION
15261 -2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
SECTION 15412 - SOIL. WASTE 8 VENT PIPING SYSTEM
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL
A. Includes but not limited to
1. Furnish and install soil, waste, and vent piping systems.
2. Perform excavating and backfilling required by work of this Section.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. General Conditions, Division 1
B. Section 15055 — General Mechanical Requirements
C. Section 15060 — Pipe and Fittings
D. Section 15065 — Excavation and Backfill for Mechanical Underground Utilities
E Section 15095 — Hangers and Supports
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
A. Pipe
B. Above ground couplings
C. Below ground couplings
D. Solvent Cement
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL WASTE AND VENT PIPING
A. Each piece of cast -iron pipe shall bear the manufacturers identification mark and shall be
certified by the manufacturer to have met the requirements of the latest ASTM
specifications.
I . Above Ground Waste and Vent: All soil and waste vent piping above ground
shall be.
a. Hubless cast iron pipe and fittings (West Coast ASA Group 022 [no hub),
ASTM A 888 and comply with Federal Specification).
b. Couplings for hubless cast iron pipe and fittings (UWP - 801 E, and
ASTM C -1277) consisting of a stainless steel coupling with Neoprene
gaskets conforming to ASTM C 564. Federal Specification UWP - 801.
2. Below Ground Waste and Vent: All soil and waste vent below ground shall be
a. Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Conform to ASTM A 888.
b. Cast iron couplings with neoprene gaskets ASTM C 564 and stainless
steel bolts and nuts: MG couplings. Torqued to 175 -inch lbs.
c. No Hub Coupling: Couplings shall be constructed of 304 type stainless
steel with a minimum shield thickness equal to 0.015. Shield shall have a
minimum width of 3" for pipe sizes 1 -1/2" to 4" and 4" width for pipe sizes
5" to 10 ". Sealing bands shall have a minimum thickness of 0.026 and
require a minimum of 80 -inch Ibs. torque per band. Neoprene gasket
shall meet ASTM C 564.
d. Approved No Hub Couplinc Manufacturers.
11 Clamp -All Corp. - HI -TORQ 80
2) Ideal - Heavy Duty
Wrn sfgj 15412 - 1 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM 15412-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
OTI
3) Mission - Heavy Weight
3, Belowground Waste and Vent Beyond 5' From The Building: All soil, waste, and
vent piping below ground shall be:
a. PVC schedule 40 pipe shall be iron pipe size (IPS) conforming to ASTM
D 1785 and ASTM D 2665. PVC DWV fittings shall conform to ASTM D
2665.
b. Fitting: Comply with current UPC.
PART 3- EXECUTION
BE6➢M1269 fill i1A3iUl:
A. Do not caulk threaded work.
B. Place cleanouts as follows:
1. Where shown on Drawings.
2. At every 135 degree change of direction for horizontal lines.
3. Extended cleanout to accessible surface.
C. Use torque wrench to obtain proper tension in cinch bands on above ground hubless cast
iron pipe. Butt ends of pipe against centering Flange of coupling.
D. Grade soil and waste lines within building perimeter 1/4 inch fall per ft. in direction of flow.
E. Installation shall comply with all the latest local plumbing, building, and fire code
requirements. Solvent cement joints shall be made in a two step process with primer
manufactured for thermoplastic piping systems and solvent cement conforming to ASTM
D 2564, test installation with water.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Before piping is covered, conduct tests for leaks and defective work. Notify Architect
prior to testing. Correct leaks and defective work.
rZNIX&JA t0*110]:fFiiPa
(yelm slgJ 15412-2 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM 15412 - 2 1
'I
' 1 SECTION 15487 - NATURAL GAS
2 PART 1- GENERAL
3
1.01 SUMMARY
4
A.
Includes But Not Limited To: Furnish and install gas piping and fittings.
5
B.
Related Sections:
6
1, General Conditions, Division 1
7
2. Section 15055 — General Mechanical Requirements
8
1 Section 15060 — Pipe and Fittings
9
4. Section 15065 — Excavation and Backfill for Mechanical Underground Utilities
10
5. Section 15095 — Hangers and Supports
11
C.
The above - mentioned Section apply to this section. Contractor is responsible for all
12
service charges.
13
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
14
A.
Qualifications: Welders shall be certified and bear evidence of certification 30 days prior
15
to commencing work on project. If there is doubt as to proficiency of welder, Owner's
16
Representative may require welder to take another test. This shall be done at no cost to
17
Owner. Certification shall be by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratories or other approved
18
authority.
19
1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
20
A.
Pipe
21
B.
Fittings
22
C.
Valves
23
D.
Stops
24
E.
Gas Regulators
25 PART 2- PRODUCTS
26 2.01 PIPE
27 A. Meet requirements of ASTM A 53 -87b, 'Specification for Piping, Steel, Black &
28 Hot - Dipped Zinc - Coated Welded & Seamless ".
29 B. Carbon steel, butt welded, Schedule 40 black steel pipe.
30 2.02 FITTINGS
31 A. Black Pine: Welded forged steel fittings of ASTM A 234 -87, 'Specification for Piping
32 Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated
33 Temperatures," or standard weight malleable iron screwed.
34 2.03 VALVES (GAS SHUT OFF VALVE)
35 A. 125 psi bronze or iron body, square head cock, with bronze plug or AGA approved ball
36 valve.
37 B. Aooroved Manufacturers: Crane 1228 or equal
' [yelm stgJ 15487-1 NATURAL GAS 15487-1
1 2.04 STOPS
2 A. Furnish Crane or Mueller stops as herein before specified. Furnish union joints as
3 required for removal of equipment.
4 2.05 GAS REGULATORS
5 A. Provide gas pressure regulators, pressures and capacity as shown on Plans to reduce
6 medium pressure gas to recommended equipment operating range. Gas regulators shall
7 be by Equimeter /Rockwell or approved.
8 PART 3 - EXECUTION
9 3.01 INSTALLATION
10 A. Pipe installed underground shall have welded fittings and joints. Other pipe may have
11 screwed or welded fittings.
12 B. Machine apply coating and lay underground pipe in accordance with local gas utility
13 company regulations and specifications.
14 C. Install gas cocks on lines serving all gas fired equipment adjacent to or on outside of
15 equipment cabinet and easily accessible.
16 D. Do not use Flexible pipe connections to furnace.
17 END OF SECTION 15487
[yelm stg] 15487 - 2 NATURAL GAS
1
15487-2
'
ENGINEERS, INC.
' TACOMA • SEATTLE • OLYMPIA
1
1
' 30
31
32
1
1
1
YELM STORAGE BUILDING
BCE PROJECT NO. 205- 003.00
Notice
TACOMA OFFICE
6021 12u Street East, Suite 200
Tamma, WA 98424
Phone (253) 922-0446
Fax (253) 9220896
The following list of specifications and drawings represents those documents that were prepared under
the provisions of the Revised Code of Washington RCW 18.43, by BCE Engineers, Inc. of Tawma,
Washington. The sealing of this specification and drawings list is provided in accordance with
Washington Administrative Code WAC196 -23 -020.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
16000 - ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section Description
16050
ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
16055
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ELECTRICAL
UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
16110
RACEWAY
16120
WIRES AND CABLES
16130
OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
16140
SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
16160
PANELBOARDS
16450
GROUNDING
16500
LIGHTING
[yelm sig] toc - 1
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
EXPIRES 11.117,0;-41
I
No. of Pages
9
4
3
3
3
2
3
2
6
toc - 1
1 SECTION 16050 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
2 PART 1- GENERAL
3 1.01 GENERAL
4 A. Conform to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and related work in other
5 Division for all work in Division 16. See Division 1 for sequence of work.
F)iIfIY Ide] X.111 I[311774Ill
7 A. It is the intention of this division of the specifications and the accompanying drawings to
8 describe and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory and
9 successful operation all equipment, materials, devices and necessary appurtenances to
10 provide a complete electrical system, together with such other miscellaneous installations
11 and equipment hereinafter specified and/or shown in the plans. The work shall include all
12 materials, appliances and apparatus not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the
13 plans, but which are necessary to make a complete working installation of all electrical
14 systems shown on the plans or described herein. Equipment and devices furnished and
15 installed under other divisions of this specification (or by the Owner) shall be connected
16 under this division. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is
17 called for in either is binding as if called for in both.
18 B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor is acknowledging that he has made a thorough
19 examination of the Contract Documents, existing site and building conditions, and has
20 determined that these documents do sufficiently describe the scope of construction work
21 required under this Contract.
22 1.03 SCOPE OF BASIC BID
23 A. Included in Division 16 work is all work and related items necessary to provide all
24 electrical installations except as specifically excluded. In general, this includes all labor,
25 equipment, tools, etc., to complete the electrical work.
26 1.04 RELATED WORK
27 A. Temporary Power and Lighting - See Section 01500
28 8. Mechanical Control Wiring - See Division 15
29 1.06 STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
30 A. The work shall comply with the latest edition of the applicable Standards and Codes of
31 the following.
32 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
33 NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
34 NEC National Electrical Code
35 — State Electrical Code
36 NESC National Electrical Safety Code
37 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
38 NFPA National Fire Protection Association
39 U.L. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
40 IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Associated
41 CBM Certified Ballasts Manufacturers
42 — Federal, State and Local Building Codes
43 ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
I(yelm sfgj 16050 - 1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 16050-1
1
B.
If any conflict occurs between Government adopted Code Rules and this specification,
2
the codes are to govern. Nothing in these drawings and specifications shall be construed
3
to permit work not conforming with goveming codes. Also, this shall not be construed as
4
relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the plans and
5
specifications which may be in excess of, but not in conflict with, requirements of the
6
Governing Codes.
7
1.06 PERMITS & FEES
8
A.
The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by
9
laws, ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. The Contractor shall arrange
10
for inspection of work by the inspectors and shall give the inspectors all necessary
11
assistance in their work of inspection.
12
B.
The Contractor shall consult with and follow the requirements of the local fire, power,
13
telephone, and television utilities serving the area and shall coordinate his work with
14
them.
15
1.07 DEFINITIONS
16
A.
When "Provide" is used, it shall be interpreted as "furnishing and installing complete in
17
operating condition ".
18
B.
When "Drawings" is used, it shall be interpreted as "all Contract Drawings for all
19
Disciplines ".
20
C.
When "Contractors" is used, it shall be interpreted as the Electrical Contractor.
21
1.08 INTENT OF DRAWINGS
22
A.
The electrical drawings are intended to serve as working drawings for general layout.
23
The equipment layout is diagrammatic and unless specifically dimensioned or detailed,
24
does not indicate all fittings, hardware or appurtenances required for a complete
25
operating installation.
26
B.
Anything shown on the drawings but not covered in the specifications, or anything
27
covered in the specifications but not shown on the drawings, shall be as if covered in
28
both. In case of conflict between the drawings and specifications, the Engineer will select
29
the method to be used. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all
30
measurements before proceeding with the work.
31
C.
Wiring diagrams are not intended to indicate the exact course of raceways or exact
32
location of outlets. Raceway and outlet locations are approximately correct and are
33
subject to revision as may be necessary or desirable at the time of installation. Precise
34
location in every case shall be subject to the Engineers approval.
35
1.08 PROTECTION
36
A.
The Contractor shall store and guard all equipment before installation and shall protect
37
same, and replace any equipment that has been damaged prior to final acceptance. See
38
Section 01600 for detailed requirements.
39
1.10 HOUSEKEEPING
40
A.
All electrical materials shall be kept stored in an orderly fashion protected from heat, cold,
41
and the weather.
42
B.
All marred surfaces shall be refinished and painted after installation.
43
C.
All debris shall be removed from premises during work, as directed, and at completion of
44
job.
iyelm stg] 16050 - 2 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 16050-2 1
I
1
1.11 TEMPORARY USE
'
2
3
A.
Temporary or interim use of any and all portions of the electrical system shall be under
the supervision of the Electrical Contractor.
4
B.
Temporary power and lighting for use during construction shall be provided per the
5
6
requirements of the Division 1 specifications.
1.12 AS DRAWINGS
-BUILT
7
A.
The Contractor shall maintain, in addition to any reference drawings, an as -built set of
'
8
prints on which all deviations from the original design shall be drafted in a neat, legible
9
manner with red colored pencil. This red lined set shall identify all drawing revisions
10
including addenda items, change orders, and Contractor revisions. The Contractor is
'
11
responsible to revise panel schedules and load calculations as required.
12
B.
Drawings shall show locations of all concealed raceway runs larger than 1", giving the
13
number of conductors and size of raceway. Underground ducts shall be shown with
'
14
cross section elevations. All pipe, raceway, manholes or lines of other trades shall be
15
included.
16
C.
The Contractor shall update all references to specific products to indicate products
17
actually installed on project. This shall include, but not be limited to, lighting fixtures,
18
baseboard heaters, etc.
19
D.
Upon completion of the Division 16 Work, the Contractor shall deliver the red lined
'20
drawings and one set of neatly drafted as -built drawings on reproducible mylar to the
21
Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to the Owner.
'22
23
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide a written warranty that the Division 16 work is free from mechanical and electrical
24
defects. Contractor shall replace and repair, to the safisfaction of the Engineer, any parts
'25
26
of the installation which may fail within a period of 12 months after the certificate of final
acceptance, provided that such failure is due to defects in material or workmanship, or
27
failure to follow the specifications and drawings.
'28
1.14 WORK NOT INCLUDED
29
A.
Indicated motors, controls, and equipment as described in other divisions shall be
30
furnished by other trades, but shall be moved, set and wired to electrical controls and
'31
power supply by the Electrical Contractor.
32
8.
Work to be included under this Contract shall be defined on drawings and in these
33
specifications. Any details beyond these limits are meant only to give installation clarity to
'34
that portion which is a part of this Contract.
35
1.15 COMPLETION OF WORK
'
36
37
A.
Upon completion of the Division 16 work, the Contractor shall comply with requirements
of Section 01700 for project closeout.
38
B.
Arrange for and obtain all required inspections and certificates pertaining to the Division
'39
16 work and deliver the certificates to the Engineer in triplicate.
40
C.
Prior to or at the time of final inspection, the Contractor shall, as outlined in detail in the
41
specifications, complete the delivery of all the following items:
'42
1. Complefion Letter
43
2. Certificate of Final Inspection, in triplicate form.
Electrical Inspector COMPLETION OF WORK
Fire Department 16050-1.17
3, Warranty to Owner (with SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
'
[yelm stg]
16050 - 3 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 16050-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
copy for Engineer 16050-1.13
4. Marked Set and GENERAL AS -BUILT DRAWINGS
Reproducible Mylar St of 16050-1.12
"As- Built" Electrical
Drawings
5. Motor Current Readings GENERAL, TESTS
16120 - 3.03(D)
6. Phase Current Readings GENERAL, TESTS
16120 - 3.03 (E)
7. OHMIC Test Readings GENERAL, TESTS
16120 - 3.03 (B)
8. Panelboard and Special MATERIALS, GENERAL
Equipment Shop Drawings 16050 -2.03
and Final Approved List of
Materials Installed
9. Certified of Feeders WIRES AND CABLES
Torque Results 16120
10. ' Receipt from person to LIGHTING FIXTURES
whom delivered the 16500
following spare glasses,
plastic diffusers, lamps,
and ballast fuses.
11. ' Receipt from person to FIRE ALARM -16720
whom delivered the FUSES - 16180
following: Spare Elements PANELBOARDS -16160
for Fire Detectors, Fuses SWITCHES & RECEPTACLES - 16140
for Switches, Spare Keys
for Panelboards,
receptacles switches,
plugs, etc.
12. Wiring diagrams, GENERAL, INSTRUCTIONS & MANUALS -
Maintenance Manuals, 16050-1,14
Operation Instructions, and
Brochures (5 sets
minimum)
Secure delivery instructions from Architect for delivery to Owner.
1.16 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect no later than 30 days after the award of the
Contract, a minimum of seven (7) copies, each bound under separate cover, with index,
detailed shop drawings, to include:
1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data.
2. Complete Physical and Technical Data.
3. Wiring Diagrams.
4. Detailed Reference (written or highlighted) noting compliance with the
appropriate specification section and applicable item numbers within that section.
5. Other Descriptive Data as required by the Architect/ Engineer.
B. Shop drawings shall be submitted complete, at one fime and each item indexed with
dividers and shall be, but not limited to the items of equipment listed below:
1. All panelboards, showing breaker arrangement with circuit numbers, relays, and
panel skirts.
2. Lighting Fixtures (Complete)
]yelm stg] 16050 - 4 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
16050-4 '
1 3. Wiring Devices
2 4. Back Boxes
3 5. Coverplates
4 6. Nameplates
5 7. Raceways and Connectors
6 8. Copper Wire
7 9. Fire Wall Penetration Seals
8 10. Any other items requested by Engineer.
9 C. Within 10 working days after the date of the letter rejecting any items of equipment,
10 lighting fixtures, or materials as not in accordance with the specifications, Contractor shall
11 submit a new list of items he proposes to furnish and install in place of those items
12 rejected. If the Contractor fails to submit this new list within the above specified time, or if
13 any items on this second list are rejected as not being in accordance with these
14 specifications, the Engineer may select the items which the Contractor shall furnish and
15 install without change in Contract price or time of completion.
16 D. The acceptance of a manufacturer's name or product by the Engineer does not relieve
17 the Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in
18 all details with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be
19 solely responsible for submitting materials at such a time to allow a minimum of two
20 weeks for Engineer's review.
21 E. Electrical Drawings for the project have been developed by the Engineer using
22 AutoCAD- Revision 2004 software. These drawing files will be made available to the
23 Contractor for development of shop drawings and /or "As- Builts" for a fee of $20.00 per
24 sheet.
25 PART 2- PRODUCTS
26 2.01 COMPETITIVE PRODUCTS
27
A. Any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form
28
or type of construction by name, make or catalog number shall be interpreted as
'
29
establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The
30
Contractor, in such cases, may at his option use any article, device , product, material,
31
fixture, form or type of construction which in the judgment of the Engineer, expressed in
32
writing, is equal to that specified. However, any manufacturer not listed as an accepted
33
bidder for a specific item must be submitted for acceptance in writing and with descriptive
34
data verifying equal quality and performance at least ten (10) working days prior to the
'35
36
bid date for approval.
2.02 MANUFACTURER/EQUIPMENT PRIOR APPROVALS
37
A. Any manufacturer /equipment not listed as an approved substitute for a specified 'Rem
38
must be submitted for acceptance in accordance with Section 01600, in writing, with
'
39
detailed information to include:
40
1. Manufacturers Catalog Data
41
2. Complete Physical and Technical Data
42
3. Wiring Diagrams
43
4. Detailed reference (written or highlighted) noting compliance with the appropriate
Specification Section and all applicable Specification item numbers within that
'44
45
Section
46
5. Complete type written index cross referencing all proposed substitutes and
47
specified items
48
6. Detailed reference to specified items (written or highlighted) noting equal quality
49
and performance of proposed substitute equipment
'
[yelm stg] 16050 - 5 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 16050-5
1
7. Other descriptive data, as required by the Engineer
2
B.
If substitute material is determined to be acceptable by the Engineer, it will be induced in
3
a subsequent Addenda prior to bidding. The acceptance of a manufacturers name or
4
product by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing
5
materials and equipment which comply in all details with the requirements of the Contract
6
Documents.
7
C.
Only materials which are specified or published in addenda as acceptable shall be used.
8
2.03 MATERIALS
9
A.
All materials must be of the quality herein specified. All materials shall be new, of the best
10
quality and free from defects. They shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation
11
and operational life in the environmental conditions which will prevail where they are
12
being installed.
13
B.
Each type of material shall be of the same make and quality. The materials furnished
14
shall be standard products of the manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of
15
such equipment and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design.
16
C.
All materials shall be U.L. or E T.L. listed for the purpose for which they are used.
17
D.
Equipment in compliance with U.L. standards but not bearing their label is not
18
acceptable. If the manufacturer cannot arrange for labeling of an assembled unit at the
19
factory the unit shall be field evaluated per WAC 296402.
20
2.04 COMPLETE SYSTEM
21
A.
All the systems mentioned shall be complete and operational in every detail except where
22
specifically noted otherwise- Mention of certain materials in these specifications shall not
23
be construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and
24
performing all labor required to provide a complete and operable system.
25
2.05 NAMEPLATES
26
A.
Provide nameplates constructed of plastic (black on white) laminated material engraved
27
through black surface material to white sublayer (attach with screws on NEMA 1
28
enclosures). EXCEPTION (1): Emergency distribution system component labeling -
29
white letters on red background. Exception (2): Series rated systems shall be yellow
30
background with white letters.
31
1. Service Entrance Label: Refer to Section 16470
32
2. Panelboard Labels: Refer to Section 16160
33
3. Switch and Receptacle Labels: Refer to Section 16140
34 PART 3 - EXECUTION
35 3.01 GENERAL
36 A. Careful consideration shall be given to clearances under and over beams, pipes and
37 ducts, to provide proper headroom in all cases. Check drawings to determine heights of
38 all suspended ceilings and size of pipe shafts where raceway and wire -ways shall run.
39 Coordinate installation of Division 16 wiring and equipment with Division 15 and other
40 trades. Where insufficient room for proper installation appears, obtain clarification from
41 Engineer before any installation is begun.
42 B. Cutting and Patching:
43 1. Obtain permission from the Architect/Engineer prior to cutting. Locate cuttings so
44 they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum
(yelm stgj 16050 - 6 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 16050-6 1
1
2
3
4
5
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
3.02
3.03
3.04
41 3.05
42
43
44
45
46
amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills except where space
limitations prevent the use of such drills.
2. All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work
must be repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original
materials by skilled labor experienced in that particular building trade.
COORDINATION
A. The Contractor is responsible for accomplishing Division 16 work shall coordinate his
work with that of the other Contractors and /or other trades doing work in the building and
shall examine all Drawings, including the several Divisions of Mechanical, Structural, Civil
and Architectural, for Construction Details and necessary coordination. Specific locations
of construction features and equipment shall be obtained from the Contract Documents,
field measurements, and /or from the trade providing the material or equipment. No extra
costs will be allowed for failure to obtain this information.
B. All conflicts shall be reported to the Engineer in writing before installation for decision and
correction. Special attention is called to the following items:
1. Door swings to the end that switches will be located on "Strike" side of the door.
2. Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment
so that all electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and
equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items.
3. Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures
and equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items.
4. Type and height of ceiling.
C. The Contractor will not be paid for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination
or interference with other Contractors or trades. This includes, but is not limited to,
removing, replacing, relocating, cutting, patching, and finishing.
D. Device and fixture locations may be changed within 15 feet without extra charge if so
desired by the Engineer, before installation.
REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION IRFII
A. It is our intent to provide a timely response for RFls regarding Division 16 Work. To
further expedite this process, where a suggestion can be determined or derived at by the
initiator of the RFI, it is required this suggestion be supplied with the submitted RFI. If no
suggestion is given where one is possible, the RFI will be returned as incomplete.
CLEANING AND PAINTING
A. All equipment, whether exposed to the weather or stored indoors shall be covered to
protect it from water, dust and dirt.
R After installing, all metal finishes shall be cleaned and polished, cleaned of all dirt, rust,
cement, plaster, grease and paint.
C. All equipment with a primer coat of paint shall be given two (2) or more coats of a finish
enamel and scratched surfaces be refinished to look like new. Markings, identification
and nameplates shall be replaced.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide identifying engraved bakelite nameplate on all equipment, including pull boxes, to
clearly indicate its use, area served, circuit identification, voltage, and any other useful
data.
B. Each auxiliary system, including communications, shall be clearly labeled to indicate its
function.
IJyefm stgj 16050 - 7 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 16050-7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
B
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Is
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
3.06
3.07
3.08
k14Til
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
DEVIATION
A. Deviation from the shop drawings in construction or installation of equipment shall not be
made unless Shop Drawings showing proposed deviations are submitted to and
approved by the Engineer. If any equipment is furnished under this or other divisions
with current, voltage or phase ratings that differ from those shown on the drawings, the
Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing immediately and shall not connect said
equipment until instructed as to required changes by the Architect. No extension of time
will be granted as a result of such changes.
EXCAVATIONS
A. All excavations are to be so conducted so that no walls or footings shall be disturbed in
any way.
B. Remove all surplus earth not needed for backilling and dispose of same as directed.
A. All branch circuit wiring shall be installed in raceway with junction boxes and fittings.
B. Provide access panels as needed for pull boxes and equipment located above ceiling or
behind walls.
C. All emergency systems outlet and junction boxes shall have a red plastic tag inside.
D. Multiple feeder runs shall be rod hung, using a strut type channel with individual one hole
clamps, back plates and machine screws.
E. Any low voltage cables that are not terminated at both ends shall be tagged and labeled
per code.
PENETRATIONS OF FIRE RATED ELEMENTS
A. Must be made such as to retain that rating.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide hangers, brackets, and suspension rods and supplementary steel to support
equipment.
B. Hangers provided under other divisions shall not be used for support of Division 16
equipment unless permitted by ArchitecUEngineer.
CHASES AND OPENINGS
A. Provide to the masonry and concrete trades all templates and details of chases, openings
in Floors and walls as required for Division 16 equipment installation.
PAINTING
A. Painting in general will be covered under another division of this specification, except
items furnished under Division 16 that are scratched, marred in shipment or installation,
shall be refinished by the Division 16 Contractor.
WORKMANSHIP AND OBSERVATION
A. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent workers shall be
employed under the supervision of a competent foreman. All completed work shall
represent a neat and workmanship like appearance.
B. All work and materials shall be subject to observation at any and all times by
representatives of the Engineer.
(yelm st9l 16050-8 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
16050-8 1
i �b C l •:. I Fib i�1: l X•1tF:
2 A. Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for the lateral and vertical support of
3 conduit and electrical equipment, as required by the Uniform Building Code.
4 B. Conduits that cross seismic separations shall be installed with flexible connection suitable
5 to accommodate conditions. Secure raceways on each side of a separation and provide
6 a minimum of 36" length of flexible conduit to span separation.
7 END OF SECTION 16050
1
'
(yelm stg] 16050 - 9
ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
T�ai29-;
II
'1
1 SECTION 16055 - EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR ELECTRICAL
2 UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
3 PART 1-GENERAL
4
1.01 GENERAL INCLUDES
5
A.
Excavation and Associated Grading.
6
B.
Trenching and Trench Protection.
7
C.
Backfilling and Compaction.
8
D.
Verification of Existing Utilities.
9
E.
Protection of Utilities.
10
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
11
A.
Section 16110 - Raceways
12
B.
Section 16500 - Lighting
13
C.
Section 16720 — Fire Alarm System
14
D.
Section 16727 — Intrusion Alarm System
15
E.
Section 16740 — Communications System /Clock/Program System
16
F.
Section 16800 — Data and Voice Infrastructure
17
1.03 QUALITY
ASSURANCE
18
A.
Inspection of Job Conditions: Prior to starting work and during work, the installer shall
19
examine the work by others, site and job conditions under which excavation, trenching,
20
and backfilling for underground utilities work will be performed, and notify the General
21
Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory conditions or work. Do not proceed with work until
22
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
23
B.
Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the following codes and standards
24
(Latest Edition) except as modified herein:
25
1. International Conference of Building Officials, "Uniform Building Code'.
26
2. Local requirements for all utility work.
27
3. OSHA and WISHA regulations.
28
4. APWA Standard Specifications.
29
5. National Electrical Code — NFPA 70.
30
1.D4 RESPONSIBILITY
31
A.
The Contractor is solely responsible for compliance with the requirements of the
32
drawings, specifications, local codes and standards, proper construction coordination
33
with work of other trades, and protection and worker's safety. Contractor shall advise
34
Engineer of any discrepancy in, or disagreement with the specifications and /or drawings
35
prior to starting work and not proceed until issue is resolved. Commencement of work
36
shall indicate Contractor's acknowledgement of his expertise in this type of work. Any
37
delay resulting from failure to comply with this procedure will not be basis for an
38
extension of the completion date.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR
1
[yalm stg]
16055- 1
ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
16055-1
1 1.05 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
2
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
3
8. American Society of Testing and materials (ASTM) publications:
4
D 422-63
Particle Size Analysis of Soils. _
5
D 423-66
Liquid Limit of Soils.
6
D 424 -59
Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.
7
D 1557 -78
Moisture Density Relations of Soils using a 10 lb.
8
(4.54kg) Rammer and 18 inch (457 mm) Drop.
9
D 2167 -66
Density of Soil In -Place by the Rubber Balloon Method.
10
D 2217 -66
Wet preparation of Soil Samples for Particle -Size
11
Analysis and Determination of Soil Contents.
12
D 2487 -69
Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
13
D 2922 -81
Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil- Aggregate In
14
Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
15
E 548 -79
Generic Criteria for Use in the Evaluation of Testing and
16
Inspection Agencies.
17 PART 2. MATERIALS
18 2.01 SATISFACTORY MATERIALS
19 A. Materials classified as ASTM D2487, Unified Soil Classification System as SW, SP, GIN,
20 and GP are satisfactory for backfill use. Materials classified as SP -SM, GP -GM, GM, GC
21 and ML are also satisfactory for backfill use provided that they contain moisture contents
22 suitable for the intended use and are reasonably free of organic matter. Native material,
23 not considered unsatisfactory as specified below, may comply. Except that no material
24 shall have any object with a dimension exceeding 2 inches and no object shall be sharply
25 angular.
26 2.02 UNSATISFACTORY MATERIALS
27 A. Materials classified in ASTM D2487, Unified Soil Classification System as PT, OH, and
28 OL are unsatisfactory . Unsatisfactory materials also include man -made fills, refuse and
29 all materials containing excessive organic matter or having moisture contents which are
30 not suitable for the intended use, or having objects with dimensions exceeding 2 inches
31 (boulders, etc.).
32 2.03 UNSTABLE MATERIAL
33 A. Unstable material shall consist of material too wet to properly support the utility conduit or
34 appurtenance structure, and material identified as unsuitable in the National Electrical
35 Code 300 -5(F).
36 2.04 GRAVELLY SAND BORROW MATERIAL
37 A. Gravelly sand borrow material to provide backfill, or replace unsuitable soil, shall meet
38 the requirements of SW, SP, GIN, and GP materials, except that the maximum
39 percentage passing the No. 200 sieve shall not exceed 5% based on the soil fraction
40 passing the U.S. No. 4 sieve, and not contain discrete particles greater than 2 inches in
41 diameter.
42 2.05 DEGREE OF COMPACTION
43 A. Degree of compaction shall be expressed as a percentage of the maximum density
44 obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D1557, Method D. Minimum
45 compaction requirements shall be as specified in PART 3.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR
(yelm stg) 16055 - 2 ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 15055-2 ,
1 2.06 DRAINAGE GRAVEL
2 A. Shall be 314 inch washed gravel with no more than 2% passing 1/2 inch sieve opening.
3 2.07 SPECIAL BEDDING AND INITIAL BACKFILL MATERIAL
4 A. Minus 3/8 inch washed pea gravel.
5 PART 3- EXECUTION
6 3.01 EXCAVATION
7 A. If workers enter any trench or other excavation four or more feet in depth that does not
8 meet the open pit requirements of WSDOT Section 2.09.3(3)8, it shall be shored and
9 cribbed. The Contractor alone shall be responsible for worker safety. All trench safety
10 systems shall meet the requirements of the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act,
11 Chapter 49.17 RCW.
12
B.
Excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered shall be
13
performed to allow the installation of all utilities at the lines and grades as required.
14
During excavation, material satisfactory for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly
15
manner at a distance from the banks of the trench sufficient to avoid overloading and to
16
prevent slides or cave -ins. Adequate drainage shall be provided for the stockpiles and
17
surrounding areas by means of ditches, dikes, or other approved methods. The
18
stockpiles shall also be protected from contamination with unsatisfactory excavated
19
material or other material that may destroy the quality and fitness of the suitable
20
stockpiled material.
21
C.
If the Contractor fails to protect the stockpiles and any material becomes unsatisfactory
22
as a result, such material shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory on -site or
23
imported material from approved sources at no additional cost to the Owner.
24
D.
Excavated material not required or not satisfactory for backfill shall be removed from the
25
site and shall be disposed of off site, at the Contractor's expense, at the Contractors
26
waste area. Any excess satisfactory excavated materials shall not be mixed with
27
unsatisfactory materials. Unsatisfactory materials shall not cover available suitable
28
materials, or be disposed of in such a manner as to interfere with subsequent borrow
29
operations.
30
E.
Grading shall be done as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into
31
the excavation, and any water accumulating therein shall be removed so that the stability
32
of the bottom and sides of the excavation is maintained. Unauthorized over - excavation
33
shall be backfilled in accordance with paragraph 3.05 BACKFILLIING at no additional
34
cost to the Owner.
35
F.
The Contractor shall provide dewatering as required for installation of underground work.
36
3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION
37
A.
The trench excavation shall meet the requirements of the National Electrical Code and
38
local utility standards.
39
B.
Bottom Preparation: The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide
40
uniform bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the conduit and
41
for bedding. Stones of 2 inches or greater in any dimension, or as recommended by the
42
conduit manufacturer, whichever is smaller, shall be removed to avoid point bearing.
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR
' [yelm stg] 16055 - 3 ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 16055-3
1 C. Removal of Unsuitable Material: Where unsuitable material is encountered in the bottom
2 of the trench, such material shall be removed to the depth directed and replaced to the
3 proper grade with select granular material as provided in paragraph 3.05 BACKFILLING.
4 When removal of unsuitable material is required due to the fault or neglect of the
5 Contractor in his performance of the work, the resulting material shall be excavated and
6 replaced by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.
7 D. Bedding: The bedding surface for the conduit shall provide a firm foundation of uniform
8 density throughout the entire length of the conduit. The conduit shall be bedded carefully
9 in a soil foundation accurately shaped and rounded to conform to the lowest one - fourth of
10 the outside portion of circular conduit or to the lower curved portion of conduit arch for the
11 entire length of pipe or arch. When necessary, the bedding shall be taped. Provide
12 bedding using pea gravel where noted on the drawings.
13 3.03 EXCAVATION FOR APPURTENANCES
14 A. Excavation for manholes, handholes or similar structures below grade shall be sufficient
15 to leave at least 12 inches clear between the outer structure surfaces and the face of the
16 excavation or support members. When concrete or masonry is to be placed in an
17 excavated area, special care shall be taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation.
18 Excavation to the final grade level shall not be made until just before the concrete or
19 masonry is to be placed.
20 3.04 JACKING. BORING, AND TUNNELING
21 A. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut, except that sections of a
22 trench may be jacked, bored, or tunneled if the raceway, cable or duct can be safely and
23 properly installed and backfll can be properly tamped in such sections.
24 3.06 BACKFILLING
25 A. Backfill material shall be compacted to 6" layers and as specified in Paragraph 3.07.
26 1. Trench Backfll: Trenches shall be backflled to finish grade.
27 2. Replacement of Unstable Material: Unstable material removed from the bottom of
28 the trench of excavation shall be replaced with select granular material or gravel
29 borrow placed in layers not exceeding 6 inches loose thickness.
30 3. Bedding and Initial Backfill: Bedding shall consist of satisfactory materials. Initial
31 backfill shall be in 6 inch lift.
32 3.06 COMPACTION '
33 A. Each layer of fill, or the excavated subgrade, shall be compacted to at least 95 %, per
34 ASTM D1557, of laboratory maximum density. Compaction shall be accomplished by
35 approved tamping rollers, pneumatic -fired rollers, three -wheel power rollers, or other
36 approved compaction equipment.
37 3.07 PROTECTION
38 A. Newly graded excavated or bedded areas shall be protected from traffic and from
39 erosion, and any settlement or washing away that may occur from any cause, prior to
40 acceptance, shall be repaired and grades reestablished to the required elevations and
41 slopes.
42 END OF SECTION 16055
EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR
[yelm stg] 16055 - 4 ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 16055-4
I
' 1 SECTION 16110 -RACEWAY
2 PART 1- GENERAL
3 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
4 A. Provide Raceway System complete.
5 PART2- PRODUCTS
6
2.01
GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT IGRSI
7
A. General. Hot dipped galvanized.
8
B.
B. Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy compatible with galvanized
9
conduit. Erickson couplings, watertight split couplings (O.Z. type or equivalent)
10
C.
permitted. Running thread or set screw type fittings not approved.
11
2.02
ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
12
D.
A. General: Hot dipped galvanized.
13
E.
B. Fittin s: Raintight: steel or malleable iron type using a split corrugated compression ring
14
and tightening nut or stainless steel locking disc. Steel set screw fittings are acceptable.
15
[yelm stg]
Indenter, drive-on and pressure cast or die cast type set screw are not acceptable.
16
2.03
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
17
A. Dry Locations.
18
1. General: Galvanized flexible steel for dry locations.
19
2. Fittings: Malleable iron or steel, Thomas and Betts "squeeze" type or equal.
20
B. Damp and Wet Locations:
21
1. Liquid Tight: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) weatherproof cover over flexible steel
22
conduit.
23
2. Fittings: Thomas and Betts "Super -Tile" or equal.
24
2.04
RIGID NON - METALLIC CONDUIT IPVC)
25
A. Schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride type unless otherwise noted.
26 PART 3 - EXECUTION
P*�mG d4:14:T_1�
28
A.
Install Raceway concealed in construction unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or
29
specifically approved in wrifing by the Architect/Engineer.
30
B.
Cut Raceway ends square, ream and extend maximum distance into all couplings and
31
connectors.
32
C.
Provide and install manufactured end caps on all Raceway ends during construction to
33
prevent the entrance of water or dirt. Tape, as a cover, not permitted.
34
D.
Swab out all Raceways before pulling wires.
35
E.
All elbows for GRS and PVC Raceway shall be factory elbows. For all other Raceway,
36
use factory ells for bends of 1 -114" and larger diameter.
[yelm stg]
16110 - 1 RACEWAY 16110-1
1
F.
Raceway shall not penetrate sheet metal ducts unless permission is granted by
2
Architect/Engineer. All sleeves shall be provided for Raceway installation.
3
G.
Provide 2 - 3/4" C.O. stub into accessible ceiling space from all recessed panelboards or
4
systems terminal boxes.
5
3.02 GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT
6
A.
All Connections shall be watertight. Install for all Raceways in concrete or where subject
7
to damage.
8
3.03 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING
9
A.
Install for wiring in masonry, frame construction, furred ceilings and above suspended
10
ceilings. May be used for exposed work in unfinished areas where not subject to damage.
11
Where construction involves masonry work, surface cut masonry units wherever such
12
masonry units are to remain unplastered or uncovered in complete construction.
13
3.04 RACEWAYS UNDERGROUND
14
A.
Galvanized rigid steel conduit - painted with two coats of bitumasdc paint - or galvanized
15
rigid steel conduit with 15 mil. polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacket (repair abrasions with PVC
16
base paint or PVC)
17
B.
PVC Raceways may be used for underground runs when permitted by code. Field
18
bends, when necessary, shall be formed only with factory recommended heater.
19
Penetrations through floor and walls shall be galvanized rigid steel conduit. PVC, if used,
20
shall be increased in size from that shown to include code required ground wire. Bends
21
in excess of 10 degrees shall be GRS.
22
C.
Arrange and slope Raceways entering building to drain away from building.
23
D.
Ground wires shall be provided in all PVC Raceway.
24
3.05 INSERTS, SHIELDS AND SLEEVES
25
A.
Furnish and set in place, in advance of pouring slabs and walls, all inserts and sleeves
26
needed to execute Division 16 equipment installation.
27
B.
Where supports in slabs are required after wall has been poured, use a drilled -in
28
threaded insert, installed as recommended by Manufacturer.
29
C.
Sleeves shall be provided for all wall penetrations.
30
3.06 RACEWAYS THAT STUB UP THROUGH FLOOR
31
A.
Install at such depth that the exposed Raceway is vertical and no curved section of the
32
elbow is visible.
33
B.
PVC Raceway shall not be stubbed through floors.
34
3.07 SEALING OF RACEWAY PENETRATIONS
35
A.
Exterior Wall Surfaces Above Grade: Seal around all penetrations with caulking approved
36
by Engineer. For concrete construction above ground level, cast Raceway in wall or core
37
drill wall and hard pack with a mixture of equal parts of sand and cement.
38
B.
Exterior Surfaces Below Grade: Cast Raceway into wall (or floor) or use manufactured
39
seal assembly (such as O.Z. type TSW) cast in place.
40
C.
Roofs: Provide mopped, lead, roof jack where Raceway penetrates roof membrane.
41
D.
Fire Rated Floors Walls, Ceiling /Roofs: Concrete or masonry, seal around Raceway
42
penetration with Dow Coming 3-6548 silicone RTV foam or approved equal. Plaster or
43
gypsum wallboard, seal around Raceway penetration with plaster, fire tape per local Fire
44
Marshal's requirements.
(yelm stg) 16110 - 2 RACEWAY 16110-2 1
3.08 SEALING OF RACEWAYS
A. Seal interior of all Raceways which pass through buildings roofs or through outside walls
of the building, above or below grade. Seal on the end inside the building using duct
sealing mastic, non - hardening compound type, specially designed for such service. Pack
around the wires in the Raceways.
3.09 HANGARS FOR RACEWAYS
A. In suspended ceiling spaces Contractor may, at his option, attach 12" or 3l4" EMT
Raceways to the ceiling suspension system where such system is structurally suitable; in
which case, provide clips manufactured for the purpose.
3, When more than two Raceways will use the same rou0ng, group together on a patented
channel support system (such as Unistnrt).
3.10 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
A. Flexible conduit shall be used only for connection to motors and equipment subject to
vibration with 90 degrees loop minimum to allow for isolation and for lay -in fluorescent
fixtures above T -Bar ceilings. For fixture installations, one end of flex must terminate in
rough -in junction box. Flex conduit shall not be installed over 6' long or used to connect
from fixture to fixture. Use liquid tight for pumps, equipment which is regularly washed
down, and equipment in damp locations. Provide ground wire when required by code.
3.11 PULL CORDS
A Nylon type, shall be included in all installed empty Raceway.
END OF SECTION 16110
' [yelm s[g] 15110 - 3 RACEWAY 16110-3
1 SECTION 16120 - WIRES AND CABLES
2 PART 1- GENERAL
3 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
4 A. Provide all wire, cable, and terminations complete.
5 PART 2- PRODUCTS
6 2.01 WIRE AND CABLE (COPPER. 600 -VOLT)
7 A. Interior and Above Grade: All wires to be Type THW or RHW. Type THWNrrHHN or
8 XHHW wire may be utilized at Contractors option, subject to code requirements. Wire
9 and cables shall be brought to project in original containers bearing the underwriters
10 label. Provide Type AVA wire where conductors are subject to temperature above 167
11 Degrees F.
12 B. Underground: All conductors to be type USE. Increase Raceway size when necessary
13 to accommodate conductors per code. Exception: Underground conductors completely
14 contained in code recognized Raceway and boxes may be Type THW, THWN or XHHW.
15 2.02 SPLICES
16 A. Above Grade. Solderless type only. Preinsulated "twist -0n" type (limited to size #10 and
17 smaller). Bolt on compression type with application of preformed insulated cover, heat
18 shrinkable tubing or plastic insulated tape acceptable for all sizes.
19 B. Below Grade: Splices below grade shall be in handholes and shall be made watertight
20 with epoxy resin type splicing kits similar to Scotchcast.
21 2.03 TERMINATIONS
22 A. Compression set, bolted or screw terminal.
23 B. Conductors #12 and smaller shall utilize eye or forked tongue type compression set
24 terminator when termination is to a bolted or screw set type terminal block or terminal
25 cabinet.
26 2.04 PLASTIC CABLE TIES
27 A. Nylon or Equivalent, locking type
28 PART 3 - EXECUTION
29 3.01 GENERAL
30 A. Install all wiring in Raceway unless shown or specifically authorized otherwise.
31 3.02 WIRE SIZE
32 A. No. 12 AWG minimum for power and lighting circuits.
33 B. Provide solid wire for No. 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG
34 and larger (600) volts.
[yelm sfg] 16120 - i WIRES AND CABLES 16120-1
1 3.03 TESTS
2 A.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
B.
C.
In addition to the factory testing of all equipment and cable, the Contractor shall test all
wiring connections for continuity and ground before any fixtures or other loads are
connected. Tests shall be made with a 500V. Minimum DC "Megger" type tester. If
tests indicate faulty insulation (less that 2 megohms), such defects shall be corrected and
tested again. Contractor shall provide all apparatus to make tests and shall bear all
expenses of required testing. Routine operation tests shall be made on all pieces of
equipment to demonstrate that working parts are in operating condition. Results of all
tests shall be recorded and submitted to the Architect . The Contractor shall immediately
replace all parts, which fail to pass the test.
Measure the OHMIC value of the Electric Service Entrance metallic 'System Ground"
with reference to "Earth Ground" using the "Multiple Ground Rod Fall -In- Potential"
method and suitable instruments. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 10
ohms. If this resistance cannot be obtained with the ground system shown, notify the
Architect immediately for further instructions. Provide OHMIC test results to Engineer.
All circuits both in and out of the building shall test out free of grounds, short circuits and
other defects.
D. Check and record catalog number and ampere size of controller overload heaters
installed, nameplate full -load amperes, and actual operating amperes of each motor.
IMPORTANT: Submit recorded data in triplicate to the Engineer. Check proper load
balance on the electrical system, direction of rotation, lubrication, and overload protection
of all motors before placing in operation.
1
1
E. Provide a log of ampere reading for all panels from phase to neutral for 4 wire panels and
from phase to phase for 3 wire panels. These readings shall be taken with all loads ,
activated.
26
F. The final test of all equipment shall be made on dates designated by the
27
Architect/Engineer and all readings shall be made in his presence.
,
28
G. Feeders shall be checked to ensure all phases are energized before connecting to their
29
respective motors. Each motor shall rotate in the proper direction for its respective load.
30
Prior to rotation test, all bearings shall be inspected for proper lubrication.
'
31
H. Minimum megger lest for equipment shall be as follows:
32
Equipment Maximum Minimum Test
33
Voltage Rating Resistance
'
34
35
1,000 -Volts or less 2 Megohms
36
I. Provide certification of torque values for feeder and service entrance conductors per
37
equipment manufacturers recommendation.
38
3.04
CONDUCTOR SIZES, REFERENCED ON PLANS
'
39
A. Copper, type THW or RHW unless noted.
40
41
3.05
PULLING
A. Use no mechanical means for pulling No. 8 AWG conductors and smaller. Powdered
42
soap stone or approved spray cream shall be the only lubricant used.
43
3.06
STRIPPING INSULATION
44
A. Do not ring the cable, always pare or pencil.
45
3.07
TAPING
,
46
A. If used shall be half lapped synthetic tape.
[yelm
stg] 16120-2 WIRES AND CABLES 16120-2
'
1 3.08 CONDUCTORS IN PANELS AND SWITCHBOARDS
2 A. Conductors in panels, switchboards, and terminal cabinets shall be neatly grouped and
3 formed in a manner to "Fan" into terminals with regular spacing.
4 3.09 CABLE SUPPORTS
5 A. Provide conductor support devices as required by code in vertical cable runs.
6 3.10 RACEWAY SIZES REFERENCED ON DRAWINGS
7 A. Raceways are sized for copper, type THW, unless otherwise noted. Size all Raceways
8 per code unless specifically noted to be larger on the drawings.
9 END OF SECTION 16120
' (yelm stg) 16120 - 3 WIRES AND CABLES 16120-3
1 SECTION 16130 - OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
2 PARTI - GENERAL
3 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
4 A. Provide outlet and pull boxes to enclose devices, permit the pulling of conductors and for
5 wire splices and branches.
7
2.01 INTERIOR WIRING
8
A.
General: Outlet and pull boxes shall be pressed drawn steel, zinc coated with plaster
9
ring where applicable. Welded boxes not allowed. Four -inch size minimum. Large pull
10
boxes shall be fabricated sheet steel, zinc coated or baked enamel finish, with return
11
flange and screw retained cover.
12
B.
Surface Metal Raceway: Boxes of same Manufacture and to match Raceway. Boxes to
13
accommodate standard devices and device plate.
14
C.
Concrete and Masonry: Boxes for casting in concrete or mounting in masonry walls shall
15
be the type specifically designed for that purpose.
16
D.
Install pull boxes so as to be accessible after completion of building construction.
17
E.
Ceiling outlet boxes shall be galvanized octagonal 4 inch, 1 -1/2 inch deep (without fixture
18
stud), 2 -1/8 inches deep (with fixture stud).
19
2.02 EXTERIOR WIRING
20
A.
Above Grade: Outlet and junction boxes shall be cast or malleable iron or shall be cast
21
of corrosion resistant alloy compatible with Raceway to which it is connected. Pull boxes
22
shall be fabricated of heavy gauge steel and hot dipped galvanized. All boxes shall have
23
gasketed covers.
24
B.
Below Grade: Where exposed to earth, boxes (handholes) shall be constructed of
25
precast concrete with size, configuration, cover, grates and reinforcing as required by the
26
particular installation. Manufacturer: Similar to Utility Vault 3030LA with base or Fogfite
27
J11 Type 2 with base. Lid shall be H -20 rated where installed in traffic areas. Where not
28
exposed to earth shall comply with Paragraph 2.02A above.
29
C.
Exterior outlet boxes shall be weather resistant and rain tight, with appropriate covers,
30
gaskets and screws.
31 PART 3 - EXECUTION
32 3.01 ANCHORING
33 A. All boxes shall be firmly anchored directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or
34 joints. Boxes must be so attached so that they will not "Rock" or "Shift' when devices are
35 operated.
36 3.02 FLUSH MOUNTING
37 A. Except for surface mounted boxes or boxes above accessible ceilings, all boxes shall
38 have front edge (box or plaster ring) even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling.
' [yelm stg] 16130 - 1 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES 16130- 1
1 3.03 ELECTRICAL OUTLETS
2
A.
General: Coordinate the work of this section with the work of other sections and trades.
3
Study all Drawings that form a part of this Contract and confer with various trades
4
involved to eliminate conflicts between the work of this section and the work of other
5
trades. Check and verify outlet locations indicated on Architectural Drawings, door
6
swings, installation details, layouts of suspended ceilings and locations of all plumbing,
7
heating and ventilating equipment.
8
B.
Centered on Built -In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recessed or similar features,
9
or where outlets are centered between such features, such as between a door jamb and
10
a cabinet, make these outlet locations exact. Relocate any outlets which are located off
11
center.
12
C.
Vertical and Horizontal Relationships: Where more than one outlet is shown or specified
13
to be at the same elevation or one above the other, align them exactly on centerlines
14
horizontally or vertically. Relocate as directed all such outlets (including lighting,
15
receptacle, power signal and thermostat outets) which are not so installed, at no
16
additional cost to Owner.
17
D.
Device Outlet Heicht: Measure from the finished floor to the centeriine, unless otherwise
18
noted.
19
Switches 4 Feet, Set Vertically
20
Receptacles & Telephone 18 Inches, Set Vertically or as Indicated
21
Other As Noted or as Directed by Architect
22
E.
Ceiling Location: For acoustical material locate outlet either at the comer joint or in the
23
center of a panel, whichever is closer to the normal spacing. Locate all outlets in the
24
same room in the same panel location.
25
F.
Installed In Sound Walls: Boxes installed in sound walls shall not be installed back to
26
back. All boxes shall be separated by one stud space and shall be interconnected with
27
flex conduit with a 90° loop.
28
3.04 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT
29
A.
For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the Specifications, or by others.
30
Provide outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve such equipment. An
31
outlet box is required if the equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not
32
have space to accommodate circuit wiring used. Study equipment details to assure
33
proper coordination.
34
3.05 BLANK COVERS
35
A.
Provide blank covers or plates over all boxes not covered by equipment.
36
3.06 JUNCTION OR PULL BOXES
37
A.
Pull and junction boxes shall be installed as shown, and to facilitate pulling of wire and to
38
limit the number of bends within code requirements. Boxes shall be permanently
39
accessible and shall be placed only at locations approved by the Architect.
40
B.
In suspended ceiling spaces, boxes shall be supported from the structure independently
41
from ceiling suspension system.
42
C.
The Drawings do not necessarily show every pull or Junction Box required. The
43
Contractor is permitted to provide boxes deemed necessary by him for his work when
44
installed in accordance with these Specifications.
jyelm 5191 16130 - 2 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES 16130-2 1
1 3.07 BOXES IN EARTH
' 2 A. Provide for all wire splices and as required to pull conductors. Boxes (handholes) shall
3 be set in place on a 3" sand bed. Coverplates shall be flush to, and match the slope of,
4 the final surface grade.
5 END OF SECTION 16130
1
1
1
1
(yelm stg] 16130 - 3 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
16130-3
I
5 PART 2- PRODUCTS
6
1
SECTION 16140 - SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
'
A.
Hubbell
2
PART 1- GENERAL
B.
3
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
4
A. Provide all wiring devices and plates.
5 PART 2- PRODUCTS
6
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
7
A.
Hubbell
8
B.
Pass & Seymour
9
C.
Leviton
10
D.
Cooper
11
2.02
SWITCHES
12
A.
"Specification Grade ", quiet type, side wired, rated 277 volt, 20 amp, unless noted, with
13
plastic handle. Single pole, double pole, 3 -way, or locking type as required. Meets Fed.
14
Spec. WS-896 Provide matching styles and colors in other devices as required for the
15
conditions of installation. Hubbell CS1221 -1
16
B.
Interchangeable type shall be rated same as above.
17
C.
Device plates shall be Hubbell Type 302 stainless steel.
18
2.03
RECEPTACLES
19
A.
Duplex NEMA 5 -20R configuration (20 -Amp, 120 -Volt) unless shown othervrise. Side
20
wired only. Meets Fed Spec. WC -596 Hubbell CR53531
21
B.
Ground -Fault Circuit - Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: NEMA 5 -20R. Hubbell GFR5352 -1
22
for 20 Amp, 125 -Volt AC. Side wired only. Provide GFI receptacles where required by
23
code.
24
C.
Special Purpose Receptacles: For special purpose receptacles, see drawings for
25
voltage, amperage, and phase. Provide with matching plug delivered to the Owner.
26
2.04
DEVICE PLATES
27
A.
Interior. Plates for receptacles other than NEMA 5 -20R shall have ampere rating, voltage
28
and phase engraved in the plate. Plates for recessed boxes shall be Hubbell Type 302
29
stainless steel. Attachment screws shall match finish of plate. Plates for surface
30
mounted boxes shall be of pressed stainless steel with size to fit exactly the box used.
31
B.
Exteric, r: Intermatic # WP1010MC or equivalent for receptacles. Metal cover shall be
32
raintight while -in -use.
33
PART
3 - EXECUTION
34
3.01
MOUNTING
35
A.
Rigidly fasten each device to the outlet box at proper position with the wall to bring
36
receptacle flush with plate or switch handle the proper distance through the plate.
(yelm stg) 16140 - 1 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 16140-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
3.02 ORIENTATION
A. Set Switches vertical with handle operating vertically, up position "OM' at +48" above
finished floor.
B. Set Receptacles vertical with ground slot down at +18" above finished floor.
C. Set Exterior Receptacles horizontal at +18" above finished grade.
3.03 DEVICE PLATES
A. Shall be stainless steel for each new wiring device and for each telephone and signal
equipment outlet, except where equipment mounted thereon covers the outlet box
completely.
B. Provide new covers on existing outlet boxes being reused.
3.04 DIMMER SWITCHES
A. Provide a separate neutral for each phase.
B. Fluorescent dimmer switches require a 4 square backbox per switch.
3.05 RECEPTACLE GROUNDING
A. Provide bare bonding wire between receptacle grounding terminal and box. Plaster ear
screws connecting frame to the box will not be acceptable for grounding.
B. Provide green insulated grounding conductor in all branch circuits supplying isolated
ground and ground -fault circuit - interrupter type receptacles.
3.06 HANDICAPPED ACCESS
A. Comply with requirements of Washington State Handicapped Access Code.
21 END OF SECTION 16140
]yelm stg] 16140-2 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
16140-2 1
II
1 1 SECTION 16160 - PANELBOARDS
1 2 PART 1- GENERAL
1 3 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
4 A. Provide all panelboard equipment, complete; dead front type.
5 PART 2- PRODUCTS
6
2.01 PANELBOARDTVPE
7
A.
Panelboards shall be rated at proper voltage and current for intended use with busbars of
8
copper or aluminum. Panels shall be 3- phase, 4 -wire, 100% neutral, unless noted
9
otherwise. Where aluminum is utilized, all lugs shall be of an approved compression
10
type. Provide multiple lugs where conductors in parallel or "feed through" are shown on
11
the Drawings.
12
B.
Conductor Connectors shall be bolted to busbars using Grade 5 bolts and Belleville
13
washers. Feeder conductor connectors shall be rated for 75 Degree C. wire when 75
14
Degree C. wire is indicated. Where aluminum conductors are utilized for feeders or
15
branch circuits the connectors shall conform with Section 16120.
16
C.
Panelboards shall have a separate ground bus bonded to the panelboard frame.
17
D.
Where 120 -Volt, 15- or 20 -Amp breakers are intended for switching loads they shall be of
18
type rated for switching duty labeled "SWD."
19
2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
20
A.
General Electric
21
B.
Square -D
22
C.
Seimens
23
D.
Cutler- Hammer
24
2.03 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
25
A.
The following interrupting capacity, 10,000 AIC Symmetrical shall be considered
26
minimum. Other ratings shall be as specified on panel schedules shown on the
27
Drawings. Series rating of breakers is not allowed.
28
B.
Mount breakers in all panelboards so that breaker handles operate in a horizontal plane.
29
Bolt in type only. Provide common trip on all multiple pole breakers.
30
C.
Where noted, provide spare breakers, complete for future connection of wiring circuits.
31
Where "Space" is indicated for breakers, provide all bussing and breaker mounting
32
hardware in the panelboard, provide steel knockouts in dead front metal closure of
33
unused part of panel. If any steel knockouts are removed, provide breakers in such
34
spaces or approved coverplates. Open spaces are not permitted.
35
2.04 CABINET FOR EACH PANELBOARD
36
A.
Flush or surface, as indicated; tight closing doors without play, when latched. Where two
37
cabinets are located adjacent to each other in finished areas, provide matching trim of the
38
same height. Where a remote controlled switch or contactor is mounted in any
39
panelboard, mount on same frame as panelboard interior with screw retained access
40
door in dead front shield; common door over circuit breakers and remote controlled
I(yelm stg] 16160-1 PANELBOAROS 16160-1
1
device. Where flush mounted, provide (2) 3/4" conduits to accessible ceiling space for
2
future expansion.
3
B.
All conduits for future expansion shall stub into a junction box, where located above
4
grade, and shall be sealed in the panel.
5
C.
Provide cabinets of sufficient dimensions to allow for future expansion and addition of
6
circuit breakers within the panelboards as indicated on panel schedules.
7
D.
Provide lock for each cabinet door. All Electrical Distribution Equipment Locks shall be
8
keyed identically. Key system shall match existing. Supply Owner with minimum six
9
keys.
10
E.
Fasten panelboard front with machine screws with oval counter -sunk heads, finish
11
hardware quality, with escutcheons or approved trim clamps. Clamps accessible only
12
when dead front door is open are acceptable. Surface mounted panelboards with fronts
13
greater than 48 inches vertical dimension shall be hinged at right side in addition to
14
hinged door over dead front.
15
F.
Finish: Provide factory prime coat for cabinets to be located in finished areas. Where
16
cabinets are located in unfinished areas, standard lacquer or enamel finish, gray or blue -
17
gray color, shall be substituted for factory prime coat.
18
2.05 SYSTEM OF NUMBERING AND BUS ARRANGEMENT
19
A.
Shall be as shown on the Panel Schedules on the Drawings.
20
2.06 PANELBOARD NAMEPLATE
21
A.
Provide engraved and filled (or color layer - engraved through outer layer) plastic
22
nameplate with '/,inch high characters (for panel name); attached with screws to each
23
NEMA 1 panelboard front. White on black, include voltage, phases, wires and minimum
24
A.I.C. Rating in 3/8 -inch characters.
25
8.
Nameplate color shall be:
26
1. Normal System: White letters on black
27
C.
Provide a service entrance label nameplate on the main panelboard which includes the
28
following:
29
1. Service Voltage & Bus Amperage Rating
30
2. Symmetrical Short Circuit Current Rating
31
3. Year of Manufacture
32 PART 3 - EXECUTION
33 3.01 MOUNTING
34 A. Secure in place with top of cabinet at 6-0 ", unless otherwise noted. Top of cabinet and
35 trim shall be level. Firmly anchor cabinets directly or with concealed bracing to Building
36 Structure. When panels are not located in or directly on a wall, provide a support frame
37 of formed steel channel which is anchored to the floor and Ceiling Structure. Interiors
38 shall not be installed unfit Structure is totally enclosed. Where panels are mounted
39 adjacent to each other, the top edges shall be at the same height.
[yelm stg] 16160-2 PANELBOARDS 16160 - 2 1
3.02 CIRCUIT INDEX
A. For each branch circuit panelboard provide a typewritten index listing each circuit in the
panelboard by number with its proper load designation. Mount with a transparent
protective cover inside cabinet door. Listing shall match circuit breaker arrangements,
typically with odd numbers on the left and even numbers on the right. Room numbers
used shall be final room numbers used in the building as verified with the Owner, and not
room number assigned on Plans.
3.03 CABINET PAINTING
A. Cabinets furnished as prime painting shall be field painted to match color of adjacent
wail. (See Division - Painting).
3.04 SPACE
A. Verify space available with equipment sizes and Code Required Working Clearances
prior to Submittal of Shop Drawings.
3.05 GROUNDING
A. Provide separate ground busbar for all panels supplying isolated ground circuits.
3.06 FEED THROUGH AND DOUBLE LUGS
A. Provide feed through or double lugs with amperage equal to the incoming feeder
amperage unless shown as larger.
I�pl S�]X4XN7IiPfC•iI.3ri
[yelm stg] 16160-3 PANELBOARDS 16160-3
1 SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. A grounding system shall be provided for neutral ground and equipment ground as
required by code.
R An isolated grounding system shall be provided for all isolated ground receptacles as
allowed by Code (1999 NEC 250 -146, paragraph d).
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING
A. Copper, code size, with physical protection where subject to damage. Bare or green
insulated.
2.02 GROUND RODS
A. 3/4" x S -0" copper clad steel.
2.03 ISOLATED GROUND BARS
A. Provide in all panels containing isolated ground circuits.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Provide all grounding for electrical systems and equipment as required by codes and as
specified herein.
3.02 GROUND RODS
A. Provide as shown and /or required. Connect the ground conductor to each rod.
3.03 SIZE OF GROUND WIRE
A. As required by code. Where ground wire is exposed to physical damage or is used
outside of building or underground, protect with rigid non - metallic conduit.
3.04 GROUND CONNECTION OF WATER PIPING
A. Metal internal piping shall be grounded, as part of this Contract. This includes jumpers
for dielectric fittings.
3.05 CONNECTION TO THE GROUND BUS
A. Provide connections in accordance with the codes; including but not limited to conduit
system, switchboard frame, service neutral and electrically operated equipment and
devices. No device or equipment shall be connected for electrical service which has a
neutral conductor connected to a grounding conductor or to the frame within the device or
equipment
[yelm stg] 16450 -1 GROUNDING 16450-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1.06
A. Make all ground connections and ground cable splices by thermal welding. Grounding
lugs, where provided as standard Manufacturer's items on equipment furnished, may be
used.
3.07 FLEXIBLE RACEWAY
A. Shall not be used for grounding. Install separate ground conductor in all flexible raceway.
3.08 PVC RACEWAY
A. Install separate ground conductor in all PVC raceway as required per code.
9 END OF SECTION 16450
[yelm stg] 16450 - 2 GROUNDING 16450-2 1
I
SECTION 16500- LIGHTING
2 PART 1 -GENERAL
3 1.01 WORK INCLUDED
4 A. Provide the lighting system complete and operational.
5 1.02 FIXTURE SCHEDULE MANUFACTURER'S SERIES NUMBERS
6 A. Are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the number, size, wattage
7 or the type of lamp, ballast or special requirements as specified hereinafter.
8 1.03 SUBMITTALS
9 A. Shall be neatly and clearly marked to indicate the fixtures, lamps and ballasts fully
10 comply with contract documents. When substitute fixtures are submitted (if permitted)
11 the data shall clearly cross reference (wntten or highlighted) that the substitute fixture
12 complies with every detail of the specified fixture. Fixtures not fully complying with
13 contract documents are not permitted.
14 PART 2- PRODUCTS
15 2.01 METAL PARTS
16
A.
Interior Fixtures: Steel or aluminum with 300 °F, baked enamel finish, brushed aluminum
17
with baked acrylic clear lacquer finish, or stainless steel with a brushed finish.
18
manufacturer's standard color unless specified otherwise.
19
B.
Exterior Fixtures: Corrosion resisting metal, a (non - ferrous, stainless steel or special
20
finish) and in all cases suitable for outdoor service without tarnishing or other damage
21
due to exposure; manufacturer's standard colors unless specified otherwise; cadmium
22
plate all metal parts concealed by canopies, including screws, plates and brackets. All
23
exposed fasteners shall be tamperproof.
24
C.
Recessed Type: Incandescent fixtures shall have housing containing an integral thermal
25
device pursuant to NEC 410 -65C.
26
2.02 LIGHT TRANSMITTING COMPONENTS
27
A.
Virgin acrylic plastic (0.125 -inch thick overall minimum) or glass. Shall be contained in a
28
steel frame hinged and which remains attached to the fixture when door is in open
29
position.
30
2.03 SPECIAL PARTS
31
A.
Adapters, Plates, Brackets and Anchors: Provide where required by construction
32
features of the building to suitably mount lighting fixture. All such appurtenances and
33
mounting methods shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to fabrication and
34
installation.
[yelm sfg] 16500 - 1 LIGHTING 16500- 1
1 2.04 LAMPS
2 A. General Electric, Sylvania or Philips. All lamps supplied shall be by the same
3 manufacturer.
4 B. Provide for each fixture in the exact number and type for which the fixture is designed or
5 as noted.
6
7
D
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
!1/;
41
42
C. Incandescent Type: Inside frosted, 125V, filament lamps rated for 2500 hours of life
(extended service type).
D. Reflector Incandescent Type: 125V, filament lamps rated for 2000 hours of life.
E. Fluorescent Type:
1. Bi -pin, T -8 rapid start; color temperature of 3500 K; CRI 82; average life of
20,000 hours.
2. Bi -pin, T -5 high output; color temperature of 3500 K; CRI 82; average life of
16,000 hours.
F. Compact Fluorescent Type:
1. Twin tube, double twin tube, triple tube; 4 -pin, amalgam, color temperature of
3500 K; CRI 82; average life of 10,000 hours. (Sylvania — Dulux TIEAN).
2. Biax; 4 -pin, color temperature of 3500 K; CRI 82; high lumen output. (Sylvania —
Dulux L)
G. High Intensity Discharge Type:
1. Metal Halide: Coated or clear as designated on lighting fixture schedule,
universal burn position, color temperature of 3700 K; CRI 70; average life of
10,000 hours of life minimum.
a. 70 watt — Initial lumen 5600
b. 100 watt — Initial lumen 8100
C. 150 watt — Initial lumen 13500
d. 250 watt— Initial lumen 19800
e. 400 watt— Initial lumen 33900
2. Metal Halide Pulse Start: Coated or clear as designated on fixture schedule;
color temperature of 3600 K; CRI 70; average life of 20,000 hours.
3. Metal Halide UV Corrected Lamps: Coated; color temperature of 3600 K; CRI
70; average life of 10,000 hours. Provide for all light fixtures with polycarbonate
lenses.
4. High Pressure Sodium: Clear; color temperature of 2100 K; average life of
24,000 hours. (Sylvania Lumalux Plus)
a. 70 watt — Initial lumen 6300
b. 100 watt — Initial lumen 9500
C. 150 watt— Initial lumen 16000
d. 250 watt — Initial lumen 29000
e. 400 watt — Initial lumen 50000
2.05 SOCKETS
A. Porcelain, medium base except where mogul base lamps are standard for the fixture
specified.
(yelm stgj 16500 - 2 LIGHTING 16500- 2
1 1 2.06
'2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
' 10
11
BALLASTS - FLUORESCENT (ELECTRONIC)
A. Suitable for lamp type employed and approved by Lighting Design Lab specification
committee.
B. Acceptance Manufacturers
1.
Advance
2.
Magnetek
3,
Motorola
4.
Osram /Sylvania
C. UL and CBM labels.
D. Low temperature and/or outdoor application. Provide ballasts suitable for low
temperature where outdoors or space ambient is expected to be below 50 °F.
' [yelm sfg] 16500 - 3 LIGHTING 16500-3
12
E. Electronic ballasts shall be high power factor, greater than 95% and total harmonic
13
distortion (THD) less than 20 %. Provide for operation with T-8, T -12 and BIAX lamps. "A"
14
sound rating. Neutral wire to be used In lighting circutt associated with electronic
15
ballasts shall be #10 AWG CU.
16
F. All ballasts shall be fused (see Section 16180, Fuses).
t17
G. Ballasts for T5 fluorescent lamps:
18
1. Ballast factor of 98% or greater.
'19
20
2. "A" sound rating.
3. Electronic pre -heat starting.
21
4. The ballast shall operate at 40 - 60 Khz without visible flicker.
22
5. Five Year Warranty .
'
23
H. Ballasts for T8 fluorescent lamps:
24
1. Advance "Centium" Series or Equivalent programmed rapid start.
25
2. Ballast factor of 98% or greater.
26
3. "A" sound rating for 265 MA. (T8 lamps).
27
4. The ballast shall operate at a frequency below 30 Khz or above 40 Khz without
28
visible flicker.
29
5. Shall be designed for use with occupancy sensors by providing up to 30,000
30
lamp starts. The ballast shall heat the lamp cathodes to 650 degree C with no
31
glow current before applying arc voltage to the lamp.
32
6. Electronic ballast harmonic distortion and current shall be less than 10% THD.
33
7. Where fluorescent light fixtures are to be located outside, the ballast shall be
34
capable of 0 degree F. lamp ignition.
'35
B. Five Year Warranty.
36
I. Ballasts for 5 to 30 Watt Compact Fluorescent Lamps:
1. Motorola "Gold" Edition rapid start or Equivalent.
'37
38
2. Electronic, 4 -pin.
39
3. Ballast factor of 98% or greater.
40
4. "A" sound rating.
5. The ballast shall operate at a frequency below 30 Khz or above 40 Khz without
'41
42
visible flicker (high frequency operation).
43
6. Electronic ballast harmonic distortion and current shall be less than 10% THD.
44
45
7. Minimum starting temperature —5 degree F / -20 degree C.
a. Five Year Warranty.
' [yelm sfg] 16500 - 3 LIGHTING 16500-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
J. Emergency Battery Backup: Provide as indicated. Each fluorescent fixture unit shall
consist of an automatic power failure device, test switch operable from outside of the
fixture, pilot light visible from outside the fixture, automatic code - compliance testing, and
fully automatic solid -state charger in a self - contained power pack. Battery shall be
electrolyte type with power to supply two T -8 lamps at 1100 lumens each, two compact
fluorescent lamps at 300 to 750 lumens each, or one T -5HO lamp at 1100 lumens for a
period of 90 minutes. Emergency unit shall operate unattended and require no
maintenance for a period of 5 years.
1. Emergency unit for T -8 lamps shall be Bodine B50 ST. Emergency unit for
compact fluorescent lamps shall be Bodine B94. Notify the Engineer In cases
where the Bodine units are too large to ft in the light fixtures. In such cases an
ESI equivalent unit will be acceptable.
2.07 BALLAST - HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Advance
2. Magnetek
3. Osram /Sylvania
4. General Electric
B. All 120 -volt ballasts shall have single fusing. All other ballast shall have double fusing.
C. All ballasts shall be high power factor type.
D. All ballasts 70 W and above to be multi -tap ballasts, 120V/208V/240V1277V.
E. For indoor applications, provide encapsulated core and coil. Class A noise rating up to
175 watts and Class B noise rating for 250 and 400 watts.
F. Pulse start ballasts shall be provided for all pulse start lamps.
G. All high - pressure sodium ballasts shall be high reactor type with restrike ignitor.
2.08 HANGING FOR PENDANT FIXTURES
A. Rigid type, with not less than 5 thread engagement at each end, consisting of iron pipe,
with brass or aluminum tubing casing, or painted tubing not less than 0.040 inches thick.
B. Provide a canopy for each fixture hanger except where fixture conceals the outlet box
directly without a canopy.
C. Provide a safety chain for all glass pendant fixtures and for all fixtures mounted in
gymnasiums.
2.09 EXIT SIGNS
A. Fronts: Cutout stencils made of minimum #20 gauge sheet steel or sheet aluminum with
red glass or plastic back of the cutout Mount fronts either on concealed hinges or pull-
out type with chain catch. Removable cutout arrows shall indicate direction of travel.
(yelm stgj 16500 - 4 LIGHTING 16500-4
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES - GENERAL
A. Size and mounting height from finished floor to bottom of fixture as indicated on the
drawings. Verity mounting provisions prior to the ordering of fixtures. Fixtures shall be UL
listed for the location, and application in which they are installed.
B. Ceiling fixtures shall be coordinated with and suitable for installation in, on or from the
ceiling as shown. Installation and support of fixtures shall be in accordance with NFPA
70 and manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Suspended fixtures installed in seismic areas shall have 46% swivel hangers and shall be
located with no obstructions within the 45% range in all directions. The stem, canopy and
fixture shall be capable of 45% swing.
3.02 DIFFUSERS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Install lighting fixture diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean up are
completed. Prior to final acceptance, remove all lamps, reflectors and diffusers, wash,
rinse and reinstall.
3.03 ADJUSTMENT OF FIXTURES
A. Make all final spotlight and adjustable light settings under the direction of the
Architect/Engineer during a scheduled period of time prior to the completion of the
project. Include costs for all equipment and personnel expenses required for adjustment.
B. For fixtures with indirect lighting, notify Engineer prior to installation of any circumstance
where the fixture lamp source will be within 12" of ceiling.
3.04 SUPPORT OF HID AND INCANDESCENT FIXTURES
A. Surface or Pendant Type: Attach to heavy formed steel straps attached to the outlet box
by means of threaded stems with locknuts, or directly to the outlet box where the fixture is
specifically so designed
B. Recessed Type: Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling, with the recessed portion of the
fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing. For fixtures supported by a ceiling
suspension system, provide two safety chains secured to structural members above
suspended ceiling.
C. For HID Fixtures: Ballasts shall be accessible.
3.05 SUPPORT OF FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
A. Recessed Troffer Type: For fixtures supported by the ceiling suspension system, provide
integral tabs, which rotate into position after fixture is lifted into the ceiling cavity. Provide
two safety chains secured to structural members above suspended ceiling. Circuit
connection shall be through use of 60 -inch flexible conduit from a rigidly supported
junction box. For plaster or GWB ceilings, provide a plaster frame compatible with light
fixture.
[yelm stg] 16500- 5 LIGHTING 16500-5
1
B.
Recessed Downlight Type: Mount in frames suitable for the ceiling, with the recessed
2
portion of the fixture securely supported from the ceiling framing. For fixtures supported
3
by a ceiling suspension system, provide two safety chains secured to structural members
4
above suspended ceiling.
5
C.
Surface and Pendant Mounted Type:
6
1. Where mounted on accessible ceilings, hang from structural members by means
7
of hanger rods through ceiling or as approved.
8
2. Where ceiling is of insufficient strength to support weight of lighting fixture,
9
provide additional framing to support as required. Fixtures shall be supported
10
from structure with seismic bracing independent of ceiling.
11
1 For Pendant Mount Type: Provide a unistrut channel for mounting fixtures entire
12
fixture length unless light fixture is designed specifically for supporting itself.
13
Provide 3/8 -inch thread rod secured to structural members for support of unistrut
14
channel.
15
4, Continuous Runs of Fixtures: Straight when sighting from end to end, regardless
16
of irregularities in the ceiling. Where fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental
17
ends between sections.
18
3.06 LOCATION
19
A.
Mount to the dimensions shown on the drawings. Mount at quarter points where no
20
dimensions appear. Architect shall specify mounting locations where no dimensions
21
appear and quarter point mounting is impractical or not indicated on the drawings.
22
B.
Refer to details, mechanical drawings, and coordinate with mechanical Contractor for
23
equipment and ductwork mounted in ceilings to prevent conflict with light fixtures riD or to
24
installation. If conflicts cannot be resolved with the Mechanical Contractor, notify
25
Architect/Engineer.
26 3.07 SPARE PARTS
27 A. Ballast Fuses: Provide twenty (20) spare fuses of each size used, packaged and marked
28 to identify fixture type where used.
29 B. Fixture Diffusers : Provide ten (10) or 10% (whichever is less) spare diffusers of each
30 size and type used, packaged and marked to identity fixture used.
31 C. Fixture Glass: Provide ten (10) or 10% (whichever is less) spare glass of each size and
32 type used, packaged and marked to identify fixture type.
33 D. Lamps: Provide ten (10) spare T -8 lamps
34 3.08 SWITCHING FLUORESCENT FIXTURES
35 A. Provide two level switching of all three and four lamp fluorescent fixtures such that the
36 center lamp(s) are on one switch and the outer lamps are on another. Required
37 switchlegs in fixture flex connection "whips' are not shown on the drawings. Provide
38 number of ballasts required to accomplish two level switching.
39 END OF SECTION 16500
(yelm stgj 16500 - 6 LIGHTING 16500-6 1